A1 1 / 55

Noun gender and number

Os nomes: género e número

In short

Every Portuguese noun has a gender - it is either masculine or feminine, even a table or a book - and that gender controls the words around it (the word for “the”, every adjective). It also has a number: singular or plural. English marks only number, so the habit to build now is to learn each noun with its little gender tag o (masculine) or a (feminine) attached, and to know the plural endings, especially for the tricky -ão and consonant words.

The rule

Gender: masculine or feminine

There is no “it” in Portuguese. A thing is o (the, masculine) or a (the, feminine), and you cannot always guess which - so store the article with the word. That said, the endings give strong hints.

Usually masculine: nouns ending in -o (o livro, o carro, o dinheiro). Watch the Greek-origin -ma group, which is also masculine despite the a: o problema, o programa, o tema, o clima. And a few everyday words: o dia, o mapa, o cinema.

Usually feminine: nouns ending in -a (a casa, a mesa, a rua), and reliably these suffixes: -ção / -são (a nação, a televisão), -dade (a cidade, a verdade), -gem (a viagem, a garagem). A useful trap: many -or nouns are masculine (o professor, o amor), but a cor, a dor and a flor are feminine.

Gender of people and animals

For living beings the gender is natural, and there is often a masculine/feminine pair:

  • -o -> -a: o menino / a menina, o gato / a gata.
  • add -a to a consonant: o professor / a professora, o português / a portuguesa.
  • -ão shifts in several ways: o irmão / a irmã, o patrão / a patroa, o leão / a leoa.

Some nouns never change form - only the article does: o estudante / a estudante, o colega / a colega, o jovem / a jovem. And a few keep one fixed gender whoever they describe: a pessoa, a criança, a vítima are always feminine, even for a man.

Number: making nouns plural

The plural ending depends on how the singular ends:

  • vowel -> add -s: casa -> casas, livro -> livros, café -> cafés.
  • -r, -z, or stressed -s -> add -es: professor -> professores, luz -> luzes, o país -> os países. A word already ending in unstressed -s does not change: o lápis -> os lápis.
  • -m -> -ns: homem -> homens, jardim -> jardins, um -> uns.
  • -l -> drop the l, add -is: animal -> animais, papel -> papéis, lençol -> lençóis, azul -> azuis. If the -il is unstressed, use -eis: fácil -> fáceis, difícil -> difíceis.

The -ão plural (the classic trap)

Nouns in -ão take one of three plurals, and you must simply learn which:

  • -ões (the large majority): lição -> lições, coração -> corações, informação -> informações.
  • -ães (a small set): pão -> pães, cão -> cães, alemão -> alemães, capitão -> capitães.
  • -ãos (add -s, a few common words): mão -> mãos, irmão -> irmãos, cidadão -> cidadãos.

When you meet a new -ão noun, default to -ões; only the short -ães and -ãos lists are exceptions.

Forms & patterns

Common gender signals:

Ending / typeGenderExamples
-omasculineo livro, o carro
-ma (Greek)masculineo problema, o programa
-afemininea casa, a mesa
-ção, -sãofemininea nação, a televisão
-dade, -gemfemininea cidade, a viagem
-ormostly masculine (but a cor, a dor, a flor)o professor, o amor

Plural formation:

Singular ends inPluralExample
oral vowel+ slivro -> livros
-r, -z, stressed -s+ esflor -> flores, luz -> luzes
unstressed -sno changeo lápis -> os lápis
-m-nshomem -> homens
-al, -el, -ol, -ul-ais, -éis, -óis, -uisanimal -> animais
-ão-ões / -ães / -ãoslição -> lições; pão -> pães; mão -> mãos

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
O livro é novo.The book is new.
A casa é grande.The house is big.
O dia está bonito.The day is beautiful.
A cidade é antiga.The city is old.
Tenho dois irmãos.I have two brothers.
Comprei três pães.I bought three loaves of bread.
Há muitas lições hoje.There are many lessons today.
Os animais são simpáticos.The animals are friendly.
Os hotéis são caros.The hotels are expensive.
A professora é portuguesa.The teacher (female) is Portuguese.

Common mistakes

  • a problema -> o problema - the Greek -ma nouns are masculine (o tema, o programa, o clima too).
  • o cor azul -> a cor azul - a cor, a dor and a flor are feminine even though they end in -or.
  • dois irmães -> dois irmãos - not every -ão takes -ães; irmão, mão and cidadão take -ãos.
  • três pãos -> três pães - pão, cão and alemão belong to the small -ães group.
  • os animales -> os animais - words in -l drop the l and add -is; they never add -es.
  • o pessoa (about a man) -> a pessoa - pessoa, criança and vítima stay feminine whoever they refer to.
  • os lápises -> os lápis - a word already ending in an unstressed -s does not change in the plural.

Tips

  • Learn every noun with its article: store a viagem and o problema, never the bare noun - the gender is part of the word.
  • Trust the strong feminine suffixes -ção, -são, -dade and -gem; they almost never let you down.
  • For -ão nouns, memorise the two short lists (-ães: pão, cão, alemão; -ãos: mão, irmão, cidadão) and default everything else to -ões.
  • To feminise a person, the usual move is -o -> -a or “add -a” to a consonant (menino/menina, professor/professora).
  • The article and any adjective must match the noun’s gender and number too, but that is Lessons 2 and 6 - here just fix the noun’s own ending.
  • In Brazil: gender and plural rules are identical; only the pronunciation of the endings differs (recall the reduced European vowels from the reading & pronunciation guide).

A1 2 / 55

Articles and contractions with prepositions

Artigos e contrações da preposição com o artigo (do, no, ao, pelo, à)

In short

The little words for “the” and “a” (o, a, os, as and um, uma, uns, umas) must agree in gender and number with their noun, so they lean directly on noun gender and number. The twist that has no English equivalent: when the prepositions de, em, a and por meet an article, they fuse into a single word - de + o -> do, em + a -> na, a + a -> à. These contractions are not optional shortcuts; the separate spelling “de o” simply does not exist, so learn the fused forms as the real words.

The rule

The two articles

The definite article (English “the”) has four forms; the indefinite (English “a / an”, plural “some”) has four too. Pick the one that matches the noun’s gender and number:

  • o livro, a casa, os livros, as casas - “the”.
  • um livro, uma casa, uns livros, umas casas - “a book, a house, some books, some houses”.

European Portuguese uses the definite article in several places where English drops it. It appears before whole classes and abstract nouns (O café faz mal - “Coffee is bad for you”; Adoro a música - “I love music”), before most country names (a França, o Brasil, os Estados Unidos - but bare Portugal, Angola, Moçambique), and, very typically, before people’s first names in everyday speech (A Joana chegou - “Joana has arrived”). It is also kept before possessives (o meu carro - “my car”), a point you meet fully in Lesson 4.

The indefinite article is dropped before an unmodified profession or nationality after ser: Sou professor, Ela é portuguesa. Add it back only when there is a describing word: Ela é uma médica excelente.

Contractions with the definite article

This is the heart of the lesson. Four prepositions must contract with o, a, os, as:

  • de (of / from) -> do, da, dos, das
  • em (in / on / at) -> no, na, nos, nas
  • a (to / at) -> ao, à, aos, às
  • por (by / through / for) -> pelo, pela, pelos, pelas

So “the man’s book” is o livro do homem, “in the city” is na cidade, “to the cinema” is ao cinema, and “along the street” is pela rua. Writing de o, em a, a o or por a is always wrong.

The à contraction (a + a)

When the preposition a meets the feminine article a, the two merge and the fusion is written with a grave accent: a + a -> à, a + as -> às. The accent is the visible sign that two a’s have become one; it is obligatory, not decorative:

  • Vou à praia - “I am going to the beach” (a + a praia).
  • Chegámos às oito - “We arrived at eight” (a + as horas).

Contrast Vou a Lisboa - cities usually take no article, so there is no second a to swallow and no accent. The masculine equivalent is simply ao (Vou ao Porto).

Contractions with the indefinite article

em also contracts, obligatorily, with um / uma:

  • em -> num, numa, nuns, numas: Moro numa aldeia - “I live in a village”.

de may contract with um / uma (dum, duma), and both de um and dum are accepted in Portugal. The prepositions a and por do not contract with the indefinite article: a um amigo, por uma razão.

Contractions with demonstratives

The same three prepositions de, em and a fuse with the demonstratives (este, esse, aquele; the neuters isto, isso, aquilo), which you study in full in Lesson 4:

  • de: deste, desse, daquele; disto, disso, daquilo.
  • em: neste, nesse, naquele; nisto, nisso, naquilo.
  • a: only the aquele-series contracts, taking the grave accent: àquele, àquela, àquilo. After a, the near forms stay open: a este, a esse.

Forms & patterns

Definite and indefinite articles:

Masculine sg.Feminine sg.Masculine pl.Feminine pl.
definiteoaosas
indefiniteumumaunsumas

Preposition + definite article (all obligatory):

Prep.+ o+ a+ os+ as
dedodadosdas
emnonanosnas
aaoàaosàs
porpelopelapelospelas

Preposition + indefinite article and demonstratives:

Prep.+ um / uma+ este/esse/aquele+ aquilo
dedum / duma (or de um)deste, desse, daqueledaquilo
emnum / numaneste, nesse, naquelenaquilo
a(no contraction: a um)àquele only (a este, a esse)àquilo

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Vou ao cinema logo à noite.I am going to the cinema tonight.
A chave está na mesa da cozinha.The key is on the kitchen table.
É o carro do João.It is João’s car.
Gosto muito da música portuguesa.I like Portuguese music a lot.
Passámos pela ponte velha.We came across the old bridge.
Vamos à praia no domingo.We are going to the beach on Sunday.
Moro num apartamento pequeno.I live in a small apartment.
Falei com o senhor Costa.I spoke with Mr Costa.
Gosto deste livro, mas não daquele.I like this book, but not that one.
Dei o presente àquela senhora.I gave the present to that lady.

Common mistakes

  • de o professor -> do professor - de, em, a and por always fuse with the article; “de o”, “em a”, “a o” never appear.
  • Vou a a praia -> Vou à praia - the two a’s merge into à, and the grave accent is obligatory.
  • em uma casa -> numa casa - em always contracts with um / uma (num, numa); the split form sounds heavy in EP.
  • a aquele homem -> àquele homem - only the aquele-series contracts after a, and it carries the grave accent (àquele, àquela, àquilo).
  • o livro de o meu pai -> o livro do meu pai - the article stays and still contracts even before a possessive: de + o -> do.
  • Falei co o Pedro -> Falei com o Pedro - com, para and sem do NOT contract with the article; do not overapply the rule.
  • Vou à Lisboa -> Vou a Lisboa - cities take no article, so there is no second a and no accent; à appears only when a real feminine article is present.

Tips

  • Drill the four obligatory rows as one block: de -> do/da/dos/das, em -> no/na/nos/nas, a -> ao/à/aos/às, por -> pelo/pela/pelos/pelas. Treat “de o” as a spelling that does not exist.
  • Hear à as a slightly longer, more open “a” than plain a; that stretched vowel (recall the reduced vowels from the reading & pronunciation guide) is your ear’s cue that a preposition has swallowed an article.
  • After de, em or a, always contract a following demonstrative: deste, nesse, àquele. Remember that a fuses only with the aquele-series.
  • Only de, em, a and por contract; com, para, sem, sobre and entre stay separate before the article.
  • The name “crase” for the a + a -> à fusion is Brazilian school metalanguage; in Portugal you simply hear “a com acento grave” - the rule is identical, only the label differs.
  • In Brazil: num / numa are used the same way, but de um is preferred over dum, and dropping the article before first names (Falei com Joana, not com a Joana) is common.

A1 3 / 55

Subject pronouns, forms of address and the null subject

Pronomes sujeito, formas de tratamento e sujeito nulo

In short

Portuguese has subject pronouns - eu, tu, ele… - but it usually leaves them out, because the verb ending already tells you who is acting: Falo português means “I speak Portuguese” with no word for “I”. Master that habit first (it is the single biggest shift for an English speaker), then the second job of this lesson: European Portuguese has several ways to say “you”, and choosing the right one is a matter of politeness, not grammar. Tu for people you are close to, the respectful o senhor / a senhora, and a very European move - addressing someone in the third person by name or title - all live here.

The rule

The subject pronouns

Here is the full set, with the verb-person each one commands (you will conjugate the verbs themselves from Lesson 6 on - for now, notice only which “slot” each pronoun fills):

Every pronoun for “you” except tu takes a third-person verb - the same form as ele / ela. That is central: você fala, o senhor fala and ele fala all use the identical verb.

The null subject (drop the pronoun)

Because the verb ending is different for each person, Portuguese normally omits the subject pronoun. This is called the sujeito nulo. Say:

  • Falo inglês. (I speak English.) - not Eu falo.
  • És muito simpático. (You are very nice.) - not Tu és.
  • Moramos em Lisboa. (We live in Lisbon.) - not Nós moramos.

Put the pronoun back only when you actually need it:

  • for contrast: Eu trabalho, mas ele estuda (I work, but he studies);
  • for emphasis: Fui eu (It was me);
  • for clarity, when the verb form alone is ambiguous - above all the 3rd person, where você, ele and ela share one ending: Ela é médica vs Ele é médico.

English forces a subject onto every verb; Portuguese treats a bare pronoun-plus-verb (eu falo, eu como, eu vou) as heavy and slightly foreign.

Ways to say “you” (formas de tratamento)

This is where European Portuguese differs most from the textbook “you = você” shortcut:

  • tu - informal singular, for friends, family, children, classmates, anyone you are on close terms with. It takes the 2nd-person singular verb (the -s ending): tu falas, tu tens. In Portugal tu is alive and normal, not slangy.
  • você - a neutral-to-polite singular “you” that takes the 3rd-person verb (você fala). Handle it with care in EP: to some ears it can sound distant or even curt, so Portuguese speakers often avoid the word and let the verb plus a name or title carry the address.
  • o senhor / a senhora - the respectful, formal “you”, also with a 3rd-person verb: O senhor tem troco? (Do you have change, sir?).
  • third-person address by name or title - a hallmark of EP courtesy: instead of any pronoun, you name the person and use a 3rd-person verb. A Ana quer um café? (Does Ana - meaning you, Ana - want a coffee?), O doutor precisa de ajuda?.

In the plural, the choice narrows: vocês covers informal and neutral “you all” (3rd-person plural verb), and os senhores / as senhoras is the formal plural.

nós, a gente, and the vanished vós

“We” is nós (nós falamos, or just falamos). In everyday speech Portuguese also says a gente for “we” - but a gente takes a 3rd-person singular verb, like a collective noun: a gente vai means “we are going”. The old 2nd-person plural vós survives only in the north of Portugal, in prayer and in set phrases; for “you all” use vocês.

Forms & patterns

The pronouns and the verb-person they govern:

PronounMeaningVerb person
euI1st sg
tuyou (informal)2nd sg
vocêyou (neutral / polite)3rd sg
o senhor / a senhorayou (formal)3rd sg
ele / elahe / she / it3rd sg
nóswe1st pl
a gentewe (colloquial)3rd sg
vocêsyou all3rd pl
os senhores / as senhorasyou all (formal)3rd pl
eles / elasthey3rd pl

Choosing how to address someone (European norm):

Who you are talking toUseExample
friend, child, familytuTu tens tempo?
someone neutral, kept at a polite distancename/title + 3rd person (or careful você)A Sofia tem tempo?
someone you show respect too senhor / a senhoraO senhor tem tempo?
a group, informal or neutralvocêsVocês têm tempo?
a group, formalos senhores / as senhorasOs senhores têm tempo?

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Falo três línguas.I speak three languages.
Tu falas ou eu falo?Do you speak or do I speak?
Ela trabalha e ele estuda.She works and he studies.
Você é o novo aluno?Are you the new student?
O senhor precisa de ajuda?Do you need help, sir?
A Ana quer um chá?Do you want a tea, Ana?
Nós somos de Portugal.We are from Portugal.
A gente vai ao cinema.We are going to the cinema.
Vocês têm as chaves?Do you (all) have the keys?
Fui eu.It was me.

Common mistakes

  • Eu falo, eu como, eu vou -> Falo, como, vou - drop the pronoun; the verb ending already carries “I”, and repeating eu sounds foreign.
  • Using você the way Brazilian Portuguese does, as the default “you” -> in EP prefer tu with people you are close to, and o senhor / a senhora or third-person address otherwise; a bare você can sound cold.
  • tu fala -> tu falas - tu demands the 2nd-person singular verb (the -s ending); pairing tu with a 3rd-person verb is a Brazilianism, not EP standard.
  • o senhor tens -> o senhor tem - você and o senhor / a senhora take the 3rd-person verb, never the tu form.
  • a gente somos -> a gente é (or a gente está) - a gente means “we” but agrees in the 3rd-person singular.
  • Ele está a chover -> Está a chover - there is no “it” subject for weather or time; just drop it (É tarde, “It is late”).

Tips

  • Make dropping the subject your default. Add a pronoun only for contrast (eu… mas ele…), for emphasis (fui eu), or to separate você / ele / ela, which share one verb form.
  • In Portugal, tu is the ordinary informal “you” - use it freely with friends, family and children; it is not disrespectful or childish.
  • The safest polite move in EP is to address people in the 3rd person by name or title (A Ana quer…?, O doutor precisa…?) rather than reaching for você.
  • Learn a gente early - it is everywhere in speech for “we” - but keep its verb singular: a gente vai, a gente tem.
  • In Brazil: você is the everyday informal “you” (with a 3rd-person verb) and tu has largely faded or, where used, often takes a 3rd-person verb too; a gente very commonly replaces nós. So Brazilian leans on você / a gente exactly where European Portuguese leans on tu / nós and third-person address.

A1 4 / 55

Demonstratives, possessives and place adverbs

Demonstrativos, possessivos e advérbios de lugar

In short

This lesson gives you the words that point - este, esse, aquele (“this / that”) - and the words that own - meu, teu, seu (“my, your, his”). Both sets behave like the articles from Lesson 2: they agree in gender and number with the noun they attach to, not with you or with the owner. Portuguese also splits “this / that” three ways, not two, and each step matches a place adverb: este … aqui (near me), esse … aí (near you), aquele … ali (away from us both). Get that three-way map and the agreement habit, and you can point at anything and say whose it is.

The rule

Demonstratives: a three-way system

English has two degrees, this and that. European Portuguese has three, keyed to the three people in a conversation:

  • este - near the speaker (“this, here by me”).
  • esse - near the listener (“that, there by you”).
  • aquele - away from both (“that one over there”).

Each of these is a variable word: it takes four forms to agree with the noun (masculine/feminine, singular/plural), exactly like o / a / os / as. So este livro, esta casa, estes livros, estas casas.

Alongside the variable forms there are three invariable neuter demonstratives - isto, isso, aquilo - used when there is no noun to agree with: an unidentified object, a whole situation, or an idea. O que é isto? (“What is this?”), Isso é verdade (“That’s true”). The neuter form never sits in front of a noun: you say este livro, never isto livro.

Demonstratives contract with de, em and a

Recall the contractions from Lesson 2. The prepositions de, em and a fuse with the demonstratives, and this is obligatory:

  • de: deste, desse, daquele; neuters disto, disso, daquilo.
  • em: neste, nesse, naquele; neuters nisto, nisso, naquilo.
  • a: only the aquele-series contracts, taking the grave accent described in the reading & pronunciation guide: àquele, àquela, àquilo (the near forms stay open - a este, a esse).

So “I like this one” is Gosto deste, and “in that city” is nessa cidade.

Possessives agree with the thing owned

A possessive answers “whose?” - meu (my), teu (your, matching tu), seu (your/his/her, matching você / ele / ela), nosso (our), vosso (your, plural). The rule that trips every English speaker:

A possessive agrees with what is owned, never with the owner.

Casa is feminine, so “my house” is a minha casa - feminine - whoever the “I” is. Carro is masculine, so “my car” is o meu carro. English “my” never changes; Portuguese meu / minha / meus / minhas changes to match the noun.

Second habit: European Portuguese keeps the definite article in front of the possessive. Say o meu carro, a minha casa, os teus amigos - not bare meu carro. Drop the article only in a few set cases (direct address - Meu Deus! - and often with close family after ser: Ele é meu irmão).

The seu problem, and dele / dela

Because seu serves você, ele and ela at once, o seu carro can mean “your car”, “his car” or “her car” - genuinely ambiguous. European Portuguese resolves it by putting the owner after the noun with a de + pronoun phrase: de + ele -> dele, de + ela -> dela, de + eles -> deles, de + elas -> delas.

  • o carro dele = his car
  • o carro dela = her car
  • a casa deles = their (masc./mixed) house

In practice EP reserves seu / sua for “your” (the você / o senhor address) and uses dele / dela / deles / delas for “his / her / their”. These forms are invariable in themselves - dele stays dele whatever it owns - because they agree with the owner’s gender, not the noun’s.

Place adverbs match the demonstratives

The three demonstrative degrees line up with a set of place adverbs:

  • aqui / - here, by me (goes with este).
  • - there, by you (goes with esse).
  • ali / - (over) there, away from us (goes with aquele).

and lean towards movement and the general direction (“come here”, “I’m going over there”): Anda cá!, Vou lá amanhã. Aqui and ali point at a more precise spot. Use them to reinforce a demonstrative: este livro aqui, aquela casa ali.

Forms & patterns

Variable demonstratives, neuters, and their place adverb:

DegreeMasc. sgFem. sgMasc. plFem. plNeuterAdverb
near me (this)esteestaestesestasistoaqui / cá
near you (that)esseessaessesessasisso
away (that yonder)aqueleaquelaaquelesaquelasaquiloali / lá

Demonstrative contractions:

Prep.+ este-series+ esse-series+ aquele-series+ neuter
dedeste, desta…desse, dessa…daquele, daquela…disto, disso, daquilo
emneste, nesta…nesse, nessa…naquele, naquela…nisto, nisso, naquilo
aa este (open)a esse (open)àquele, àquela…àquilo

Possessives (agree with the noun owned):

OwnerMasc. sgFem. sgMasc. plFem. pl
eumeuminhameusminhas
tuteutuateustuas
você / ele / ela / o senhorseusuaseussuas
nósnossonossanossosnossas
vocês / vósvossovossavossosvossas

Owner-marking with de + pronoun (invariable; used mainly for his / her / their):

Meaning
dele / delahis / her
deles / delastheir (masc. or mixed / fem.)

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Este livro é meu, esse é teu.This book is mine, that one (by you) is yours.
Prefiro aquela casa ali.I prefer that house over there.
O que é isto?What is this?
A minha mãe e o meu pai moram no Porto.My mother and my father live in Porto.
Gosto deste, não gosto daquele.I like this one, I don’t like that one.
O carro dele é novo; o dela é velho.His car is new; hers is old.
Põe isso aí na mesa.Put that there on the table (by you).
Estas chaves são as tuas?Are these keys yours?
Nesta cidade chove muito.It rains a lot in this city.
Aquilo não me interessa.That doesn’t interest me.

Common mistakes

  • o meu casa -> a minha casa - the possessive agrees with the noun, and casa is feminine; the owner (“I”) is irrelevant.
  • meu carro -> o meu carro - European Portuguese keeps the article before the possessive; the bare form sounds Brazilian.
  • isto livro -> este livro - the neuter isto / isso / aquilo stands alone; in front of a noun you need the variable este / esse / aquele.
  • Using seu for “his / her” and hoping it is clear -> in EP say o carro dele / dela; keep seu / sua for “your” (você).
  • Collapsing three degrees into two - esse for everything -> keep este (by me), esse (by you) and aquele (away) distinct; EP hears the difference.
  • de este, em esse, a aquele -> deste, nesse, àquele - the contractions from Lesson 2 are obligatory on demonstratives too.
  • o carro delo -> o carro dele - the form is de + ele = dele (and de + ela = dela); there is no delo.

Tips

  • Anchor the three degrees to the three people talking: este = my zone (aqui), esse = your zone (), aquele = out there (ali / lá). Point as you say them and the system sticks.
  • Whenever you reach for a possessive, first find the noun’s gender, then pick the ending: casa -> minha, carro -> meu. Owner never enters the calculation.
  • Default to dele / dela / deles / delas for “his / her / their”. It is unambiguous and it is what Portuguese speakers actually use to avoid the seu fog.
  • Fuse automatically: after de, em or a, a following demonstrative contracts - deste, nesse, àquele, disto. Treat the open spellings as non-existent.
  • In Brazil: the article before the possessive is optional and often dropped (meu carro), seu / sua is used freely for “your / his / her”, and the este / esse contrast is weakened - many speakers use esse for “this” too, leaning on aqui / aí to mark distance instead.
  • In Brazil: isto / isso / aquilo survive, but isso tends to absorb the job of isto in speech, mirroring the este / esse merger.

A1 5 / 55

Adjectives: agreement and position

Adjetivos: concordância e posição

In short

A Portuguese adjective must agree with its noun in gender and number, so it changes shape the way nouns did in noun gender and number: um carro branco, uma casa branca, uns carros brancos, umas casas brancas. It also usually sits after the noun, the opposite of English - a red apple is uma maçã vermelha. A small group of common adjectives can move in front, and a handful actually change meaning depending on which side they land.

The rule

Agreement in gender and number

The adjective copies the gender and number of the noun it describes. How many forms it has depends on its ending:

  • Adjectives in -o have all four forms: alto, alta, altos, altas.
  • Adjectives in -e or in most consonants do not change for gender - only for number: grande / grandes, feliz / felizes, azul / azuis. So um homem inteligente and uma mulher inteligente share one form.
  • Adjectives in -or usually add -a for the feminine: trabalhador / trabalhadora, falador / faladora.
  • Nationality adjectives ending in a consonant DO inflect: português / portuguesa, inglês / inglesa, espanhol / espanhola. Note that nationalities and languages are written lower-case: ela é francesa, falo português.

Plurals follow the same rules as nouns (see noun gender and number): add -s after a vowel (bonito -> bonitos), -es after -r or -z (maior -> maiores, feliz -> felizes), -is for words in -l (azul -> azuis, fácil -> fáceis), and the -ão group behaves like nouns (alemão -> alemães).

Agreement with more than one noun

When one adjective describes two or more nouns, it goes plural, and if the nouns are of mixed gender the masculine wins:

  • o pai e a mãe estão cansados - “the father and mother are tired” (masculine plural cansados).
  • uma saia e um casaco novos - “a new skirt and coat” (masculine plural novos).

Where the adjective goes: after the noun

The default and by far the commonest position is after the noun: um livro interessante, uma cidade bonita, sapatos pretos. Reaching for the English order and saying uma vermelha maçã is the single most audible beginner error.

A few short, very common adjectives naturally come before the noun, especially bom, mau, grande, pequeno and ordinals: um bom livro, um mau dia, o primeiro comboio. Putting them before tends to read as a general or subjective judgement rather than a distinguishing feature.

Adjectives that change meaning by position

For a small set, the position is not a matter of taste - it changes the meaning. Learn these as pairs:

  • um grande homem “a great man” vs um homem grande “a big/tall man”.
  • um velho amigo “an old (long-standing) friend” vs um amigo velho “an elderly friend”.
  • um pobre homem “a poor (pitiable) man” vs um homem pobre “a poor (penniless) man”.
  • uma simples pergunta “a mere question” vs uma pergunta simples “a simple (easy) question”.

Before the noun the adjective is figurative or emotional; after it, literal and descriptive.

Forms & patterns

Adjective classes and their four (or two) forms:

ClassMasc sgFem sgMasc plFem pl
in -oaltoaltaaltosaltas
in -e (gender-invariable)grandegrandegrandesgrandes
in -lfácilfácilfáceisfáceis
in -zfelizfelizfelizesfelizes
in -ortrabalhadortrabalhadoratrabalhadorestrabalhadoras
nationality, consonantportuguêsportuguesaportuguesesportuguesas
in -ãoalemãoalemãalemãesalemãs

Position and meaning:

PhraseMeaning
um grande homema great man
um homem grandea big / tall man
um velho amigoan old (long-standing) friend
um amigo velhoan elderly friend
uma simples perguntaa mere question
uma pergunta simplesa simple (easy) question

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Tenho um carro branco.I have a white car.
A casa é muito grande.The house is very big.
São umas raparigas simpáticas.They are nice girls.
Ele é português e ela é francesa.He is Portuguese and she is French.
Comprei uns sapatos azuis.I bought some blue shoes.
É um bom livro.It is a good book.
O pai e a mãe estão cansados.The father and mother are tired.
Foi uma grande ideia!It was a great idea!
Os exercícios são fáceis.The exercises are easy.
Ela tem os olhos castanhos.She has brown eyes.

Common mistakes

  • uma vermelha maçã -> uma maçã vermelha - the adjective normally goes AFTER the noun; do not import the English word order.
  • a casa branco / meninas altos -> a casa branca, meninas altas - the adjective must copy the noun’s gender and number, every time.
  • uma mulher grande meaning “a great woman” -> uma grande mulher - after the noun grande means “big”; the “great” sense needs the pre-noun slot.
  • granda, inteligenta -> grande, inteligente - adjectives in -e have no separate feminine; only nationalities and -or words add -a (portuguesa, trabalhadora).
  • sapatos azuls / problemas fáceis written facils -> azuis, fáceis - adjectives in -l drop it and add -is.
  • Ela é Francesa -> Ela é francesa - nationalities and language names are lower-case in Portuguese.
  • o pai e a mãe estão cansadas -> cansados - with mixed-gender nouns the shared adjective takes the masculine plural.

Tips

  • Make “noun first, adjective second” your reflex: comida boa, tempo bom, uma pergunta difícil. Only bom, mau, grande, pequeno and ordinals slip comfortably in front.
  • Tie the adjective’s ending to the noun you can see: if the noun is feminine plural, the adjective ends the same way (as casas antigas).
  • Keep the meaning-shift pairs on a flashcard - grande, velho, pobre, simples - because getting the side wrong changes what you actually say.
  • For nationalities remember two things at once: they inflect for gender (espanhol / espanhola) and they are written lower-case.
  • When two nouns share one adjective, default to masculine plural unless both nouns are feminine.
  • In Brazil: agreement and position work exactly as in Portugal; the differences you notice are vocabulary, not grammar - Portugal’s giro / gira (“nice, cool”) is Brazil’s legal, but both still agree with their noun.

A1 6 / 55

Present indicative: regular verbs

Presente do indicativo: verbos regulares

In short

The present indicative is the workhorse of Portuguese: it covers what you do now, what you do regularly, and general truths. Portuguese has no separate “I speak / I am speaking / I do speak” - the single form falo is all three. Learn the three regular patterns here - verbs whose infinitive ends in -ar, -er or -ir - and you can already conjugate the large majority of Portuguese verbs. And because the ending itself tells you who is acting, you normally drop the subject pronoun (Lesson 3): falo on its own means “I speak”.

The rule

The three conjugations

Every Portuguese verb belongs to one of three groups, named after the last two letters of its infinitive:

  • 1st conjugation, -ar - by far the largest and the one most new verbs join: falar (to speak), morar (to live), trabalhar (to work), estudar (to study), comprar (to buy), gostar (to like).
  • 2nd conjugation, -er: comer (to eat), beber (to drink), aprender (to learn), escrever (to write), viver (to live).
  • 3rd conjugation, -ir: partir (to leave), abrir (to open), decidir (to decide), dividir (to divide), assistir (to attend/watch).

To conjugate, take the infinitive, drop the two-letter ending to get the stem (fal-, com-, part-), and add the present-tense ending for the person you need.

The endings, person by person

The eu form ends in -o in all three conjugations, and the nós form ends in -mos in all three - so those two persons are almost free once you know one verb. The rest follow the group:

  • -ar verbs take -o, -as, -a, -amos, -ais, -am.
  • -er verbs take -o, -es, -e, -emos, -eis, -em.
  • -ir verbs take -o, -es, -e, -imos, -is, -em.

Notice that -er and -ir verbs share four of their six endings; they differ only in the nós form (comemos vs partimos) and the archaic vós form (comeis vs partis). Remember from Lesson 3 that você, o senhor / a senhora and ele / ela all take the third-person ending (fala, come, parte), and that vós has died out in everyday Portugal - use vocês for “you all”.

One present, three English tenses

Estudo português can mean “I study Portuguese”, “I am studying Portuguese”, or “I do study Portuguese”, all at once. Portuguese does have a dedicated way to stress an action in progress (estar a + infinitivo, Lesson 9), but the plain present already carries habits, schedules and current facts, so do not reach for a progressive just because English happens to use “-ing”.

gostar de - saying what you like

Gostar is a perfectly regular -ar verb (gosto, gostas, gosta…), but it is never used bare: in Portuguese you like of something, so gostar is always followed by de.

  • Gosto de café. (I like coffee.)
  • Gostas de viajar? (Do you like travelling? - de followed by an infinitive.)

Remember from Lesson 2 that de contracts with a following definite article: de + o = do, de + a = da, and so on - so “I like the coffee” is Gosto do café, never gosto de o café.

achar que - giving an opinion

Achar (regular -ar: acho, achas, acha…) followed by que is the everyday way to introduce an opinion, exactly like English “I think that…”: Acho que sim (I think so), Acho que é caro (I think it is expensive). Keep acho que in your pocket - it is how Portuguese speakers hedge and give a view.

Forms & patterns

The present-tense endings, side by side:

Person-ar (falar)-er (comer)-ir (partir)
eu-o-o-o
tu-as-es-es
você / ele / ela-a-e-e
nós-amos-emos-imos
vós-ais-eis-is
vocês / eles / elas-am-em-em

The same three verbs written out in full:

Personfalar (speak)comer (eat)partir (leave)
eufalocomoparto
tufalascomespartes
você / ele / elafalacomeparte
nósfalamoscomemospartimos
vósfalaiscomeispartis
vocês / eles / elasfalamcomempartem

The vós forms (falais, comeis, partis) are given only for completeness; they are archaic or regional (Lesson 3). In real European Portuguese, use vocês + the third-person plural form (falam, comem, partem).

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Falo português e um pouco de inglês.I speak Portuguese and a little English.
A Ana trabalha num banco.Ana works in a bank.
Nós moramos em Coimbra.We live in Coimbra.
Comes carne?Do you eat meat?
Eles bebem café ao pequeno-almoço.They drink coffee at breakfast.
Aprendo português com uma aplicação.I learn Portuguese with an app.
O comboio parte às oito.The train leaves at eight.
Gostamos de música portuguesa.We like Portuguese music.
Gosto do teu casaco.I like your coat.
Acho que ela estuda medicina.I think she studies medicine.

Common mistakes

  • eu falo, eu como, eu estudo -> falo, como, estudo - drop the subject pronoun (Lesson 3); the ending already tells you it is “I”, and repeating eu sounds heavy and foreign.
  • gosto café -> gosto de café - gostar always takes de; you like of something. Leaving out de is simply ungrammatical.
  • gosto de o café -> gosto do café - de contracts with the article: de + o = do, de + a = da (Lesson 2). The uncontracted form is wrong.
  • tu partis, nós partemos -> tu partes, nós partimos - the -ir group differs from -er only at nós (-imos) and the old vós (-is); everywhere else the two match.
  • eu fala, ela falas -> eu falo, ela fala - match the ending to the person; você / ele / ela all take the bare third-person form (-a or -e), never the -s of tu.
  • eu comeco -> começo - começar is regular, but every present form keeps the ç (começo, começas, começa…) to preserve its soft /s/ sound before o and a (the hard/soft spelling system, treated in the reading & pronunciation guide). This is spelling, not a change of ending.

Tips

  • Learn the infinitive ending together with every new verb - -ar, -er or -ir is what tells you which pattern to apply.
  • Master the eu (-o) and nós (-mos) forms first: they look the same across all three conjugations, so you are already a third of the way into any regular verb.
  • Treat -er and -ir as near-twins - identical except at nós (comemos vs partimos). If you know one, you almost know the other.
  • Make the plain present your all-purpose “now and usually” tense, and save estar a + infinitivo (Lesson 9) for when you truly need to stress “right at this moment”.
  • Bank gosto de… and acho que… as ready-made openers - they let you say what you like and what you think from day one.
  • In Brazil: the ordinary way to say “I am doing” is the gerund (estou comendo, estou estudando), where European Portuguese uses estar a + infinitivo (estou a comer). The plain present forms in the tables above are the same in both varieties.

A1 7 / 55

Present indicative: irregular and vowel-alternation verbs

Presente do indicativo: verbos irregulares e com alternância vocálica

In short

The verbs you reach for most often - ser, estar, ter, ir, vir, fazer, poder - break the neat patterns of Lesson 6, so they have to be learned as whole forms rather than built from a stem. Between the fully regular verbs and these outright irregulars sits a large, well-behaved middle group: -ir verbs that are regular everywhere except the eu form, where the stem vowel shifts (prefiro, visto, durmo). Master the eu forms and you have tamed most of the difficulty, because that is exactly where Portuguese irregularity hides.

The rule

Vowel-alternation verbs: only the eu form changes

A big family of -ir verbs whose stem vowel is e or o raise that vowel in the eu form only: e -> i and o -> u. Every other person keeps the original vowel and the regular -ir endings from Lesson 6.

  • preferir (to prefer): prefiro, but preferes, prefere, preferimos, preferem.
  • vestir (to dress): visto, but vestes, veste…
  • sentir (to feel): sinto, but sentes, sente…
  • servir (to serve): sirvo, but serves, serve…
  • dormir (to sleep): durmo, but dormes, dorme…

So the trap is narrow: say prefiro and durmo for “I”, but never carry the shifted vowel into the other persons (preferes, not prefires; dormes, not durmes).

The high-frequency irregulars

A handful of extremely common verbs have present forms you simply memorise. Their eu forms are the least guessable of all, so drill those first:

  • ser “to be” (identity): sou, és, é, somos, são.
  • estar “to be” (state, location): estou, estás, está, estamos, estão.
  • ter “to have”: tenho, tens, tem, temos, têm.
  • ir “to go”: vou, vais, vai, vamos, vão.
  • vir “to come”: venho, vens, vem, vimos, vêm.
  • fazer “to do / make”: faço, fazes, faz, fazemos, fazem.
  • poder “can, to be able”: posso, podes, pode, podemos, podem.

Ser and estar both translate English “to be”; which one to use, and how ter and haver divide up “to have” and “there is”, is the whole of Lesson 8 - here just fix their forms in memory.

Watch the accented third persons

Two of these verbs mark the third-person plural with a circumflex to keep it apart from the singular, which is otherwise spelled the same:

  • ter: ele tem (singular) vs eles têm (plural).
  • vir: ela vem (singular) vs elas vêm (plural).

In speech the plural is a touch longer; in writing the accent is obligatory - dropping it changes the meaning from “they” to “he/she”.

saber vs conhecer: two ways to “know”

English “know” splits into two Portuguese verbs, and choosing the wrong one is a giveaway:

  • saber = to know a fact, or to know how to do something (saber + infinitive). Its eu form is irregular: sei, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabem. So Sei a resposta (“I know the answer”), Sabes nadar? (“Can you / do you know how to swim?”), Não sei (“I don’t know”).
  • conhecer = to be acquainted with a person, a place, or a thing. It is regular apart from the spelling of the eu form, which takes ç to keep its soft sound: conheço, conheces, conhece, conhecemos, conhecem. So Conheço a Maria, Conheces Lisboa?

Rule of thumb: if you could rephrase it as “I know that…” or “I know how to…”, use saber; if it is “I know this person / place”, use conhecer.

Giving an opinion, revisited

With saber and achar (Lesson 6) you can already qualify what you say: Acho que sim, mas não sei ao certo (“I think so, but I’m not sure”).

Forms & patterns

Vowel-alternation -ir verbs - note that only the eu column shifts:

Infinitiveeutuvocê / ele / elanósvocês / eles / elas
preferir (prefer)prefiropreferespreferepreferimospreferem
vestir (dress)vistovestesvestevestimosvestem
sentir (feel)sintosentessentesentimossentem
servir (serve)sirvoservesserveservimosservem
dormir (sleep)durmodormesdormedormimosdormem

The principal irregular verbs:

Infinitiveeutuvocê / ele / elanósvocês / eles / elas
ser (be - identity)souésésomossão
estar (be - state)estouestásestáestamosestão
ter (have)tenhotenstemtemostêm
ir (go)vouvaisvaivamosvão
vir (come)venhovensvemvimosvêm
fazer (do / make)façofazesfazfazemosfazem
poder (can)possopodespodepodemospodem
saber (know a fact)seisabessabesabemossabem

Choosing between the two “know” verbs:

You know…VerbExample
a factsaberSei que fica perto.
how to do somethingsaber + infinitiveSabes cozinhar?
a personconhecerConheço o teu irmão.
a place or thing (are familiar with it)conhecerConheces o Porto?

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Sou de Portugal e ela é do Brasil.I am from Portugal and she is from Brazil.
Estamos em casa.We are at home.
Eles têm dois filhos.They have two children.
Prefiro chá a café.I prefer tea to coffee.
Ao domingo durmo até tarde.On Sundays I sleep in late.
Sabes onde fica a estação?Do you know where the station is?
Conheço bem o Porto.I know Porto well.
Faço o jantar todos os dias.I make dinner every day.
Podemos falar mais devagar?Can we speak more slowly?
De onde vens?Where do you come from?

Common mistakes

  • eu prefero, eu dormo -> prefiro, durmo - the eu form of these -ir verbs raises the vowel (e -> i, o -> u); do not spread it to the other persons (preferes, dormes).
  • conheço que fica longe -> sei que fica longe - facts take saber, never conhecer. Use conhecer only for people, places and things.
  • sei a tua irmã -> conheço a tua irmã - people are known with conhecer, not saber.
  • conheço nadar -> sei nadar - “to know how to” is saber + infinitive.
  • eu fazo, eu sabo, eu podo -> faço, sei, posso - these eu forms are memorised irregulars, not built from the stem.
  • eles tem, elas vem -> eles têm, elas vêm - the third-person plural of ter and vir needs the circumflex; without it the word reads as “he/she”.
  • tu és used for polite address, e.g. o senhor és -> o senhor é - você and o senhor / a senhora take the third-person form (é, tem, vem), like ele / ela.

Tips

  • Attack the eu forms first - sou, estou, tenho, vou, venho, faço, posso, sei - since they are the most irregular part of each verb and the ones you say constantly.
  • For the vowel-alternation group, learn the pair “eu-form vs the-rest” (prefiro / preferes, durmo / dormes); everything after the eu form is regular.
  • Sort your “knows”: saber pairs with a fact or an infinitive, conhecer pairs with a name or a place. Test yourself by trying “I know that…” (saber) versus “I know this person” (conhecer).
  • Hear tem vs têm and vem vs vêm as singular vs plural; in writing, never leave off the plural circumflex.
  • These verbs carry most of your everyday speech, so the time you spend memorising them pays back faster than any regular verb would.
  • In Brazil: the forms above are the same, but speakers use você with the third-person endings far more than tu, so you will hear você tem, você vem, você sabe where Portugal often says tens, vens, sabes.

A1 8 / 55

Ser, estar, ter and haver: uses and contrasts

Ser, estar, ter e haver: usos e contrastes

In short

Four verbs carry an outsized share of everyday Portuguese: ser and estar, which English merges into the single verb “to be”, ter, which is “to have” but also the verb for your age and for feeling hungry or cold, and haver, whose one form “há” means “there is” and “there are”. Telling ser and estar apart is the biggest hurdle in this lesson: ser says what something fundamentally is, while estar says how or where it is right now. Learn these four verbs and you can already describe people, places, states and existence.

The rule

You met the present-tense forms of these irregular verbs in step 8. This lesson is about when to use each one.

ser: identity and essence

Use ser for what something is in a stable, defining way: identity and classification, origin and nationality, profession, the material a thing is made of, dates and clock time, and inherent qualities.

  • Identity and nationality: Eu sou o Pedro. Ela é portuguesa.
  • Profession: O meu pai é médico.
  • Material and origin: A mesa é de madeira. O vinho é do Douro.
  • Time and dates: Hoje é segunda-feira. São três horas.
  • Inherent quality: O gelo é frio. Ele é alto.

estar: state, condition and current location

Use estar for the state something is in at the moment: feelings and physical condition, the weather, the result of a change, and the current position of a movable person or thing.

  • Feeling and condition: Estou cansado. A sopa está quente.
  • Weather: Está frio hoje. Está a chover.
  • Result of a change: A porta está aberta. As luzes estão acesas.
  • Current position: O carro está na garagem. Nós estamos em casa.

ser vs estar with the same adjective

Many adjectives accept both verbs and change meaning. Ser gives a defining trait; estar gives a passing state or a fresh impression:

  • Ele é nervoso (a nervous person) vs Ele está nervoso (nervous right now).
  • A fruta é verde (a green-coloured fruit) vs A fruta está verde (unripe).
  • A Ana é bonita (she is beautiful) vs A Ana está bonita hoje (she looks lovely today).

Ask yourself: essence or condition? That question decides the verb.

ter: having, and the states English calls “being”

Ter is “to have” for possession: Tenho um carro. Tens irmãos? But Portuguese also uses ter for age and for a long list of bodily and mental states where English uses “to be”: you literally “have” hunger, thirst, cold, fear and years. This is a frequent English-speaker error, so learn the set as fixed phrases: Tenho fome, Tenho frio, Tenho vinte anos, Tens razão.

haver: “há” for there is and there are

The everyday job of haver is the impersonal form há, meaning “there is” and “there are”. It never changes for number: Há um problema and Há muitos problemas both use há. The negative is Não há: Não há pão. The other personal forms (hei, hás, hão) are rare on their own and belong to the periphrasis “haver de”, which you meet much later.

ficar: where fixed things are, and becoming

Ficar (a regular -ar verb) fills two gaps that estar does not cover well. First, the fixed position of a place or building: O banco fica na esquina. Onde fica a estação? Second, “to become” - a change of state: Ela ficou contente. A água ficou fria. It also means “to stay”: Hoje fico em casa.

Forms & patterns

Present indicative of the four verbs, plus ficar:

Personserestarterficar
eusouestoutenhofico
tuésestástensficas
você / ele / elaéestátemfica
nóssomosestamostemosficamos
vocês / eles / elassãoestãotêmficam

The archaic vós forms (sois, estais, tendes, ficais) are not used in modern European Portuguese and can be ignored.

The verb haver in the present - in practice you only need “há”:

PersonFormUse
você / ele / elathere is, there are (and “ago”, as in há dois anos)
eu, tu, nós, eleshei, hás, havemos, hãorare; only in “haver de” + infinitive

Ser versus estar at a glance:

VerbCoversExamples
seridentity, origin, profession, material, dates, inherent traitsSou médico. É de ouro. São cinco horas.
estarfeelings, weather, results of change, current positionEstou bem. Está frio. A loja está fechada.

States that use ter, not ser or estar:

PortugueseWord for wordEnglish
ter fome / sedeto have hunger / thirstto be hungry / thirsty
ter frio / calorto have cold / heatto be cold / hot
ter sonoto have sleepto be sleepy
ter medoto have fearto be afraid
ter razãoto have reasonto be right
ter … anosto have … yearsto be … years old

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Eu sou portuguesa e moro em Lisboa.I am Portuguese and I live in Lisbon.
A minha irmã está cansada hoje.My sister is tired today.
Tenho vinte e cinco anos.I am twenty-five years old.
muitos turistas no verão.There are many tourists in the summer.
O banco fica na esquina.The bank is on the corner.
A sopa está quente.The soup is hot.
Este anel é de ouro.This ring is made of gold.
As crianças têm fome.The children are hungry.
Hoje é segunda-feira.Today is Monday.
Nós estamos em casa.We are at home.

Common mistakes

  • Eu estou português -> Eu sou português - nationality and identity are defining, so they take ser, never estar.
  • Eu sou cansado (meaning tired now) -> Eu estou cansado - a passing state takes estar; “sou cansado” would mean you are a tiring person by nature.
  • Sou vinte anos, Estou vinte anos -> Tenho vinte anos - age is expressed with ter, not with ser or estar.
  • Estou fome, Sou fome -> Tenho fome - hunger, thirst, cold, fear and being right all use ter (Tenho fome, Tenho frio, Tens razão).
  • Tem um problema (meaning there is a problem) -> Há um problema - existence in European Portuguese is “há”; using “tem” for “there is” is Brazilian.
  • Hão muitas pessoas -> Há muitas pessoas - “há” is invariable and stays singular for both “there is” and “there are”.
  • A estação está no centro (as its permanent location) -> A estação fica no centro - the fixed location of a building or place normally uses ficar, while estar suits where a movable thing is right now.

Tips

  • Split “to be” in two: ser is what something IS (identity, origin, profession, material, dates, inherent traits); estar is the state it is IN right now (feelings, weather, results, current position). When unsure, ask “essence or condition?”.
  • Age and bodily states are ter, not “to be”: Tenho vinte anos, Tenho frio, Tenho sede, Tens razão. Treat English “I am hungry” as a false friend for “Tenho fome”.
  • Existence is one unchanging word: há. It does not agree in number (há um carro, há muitos carros), and it is the European way to say “there is” and “there are”.
  • Reach for ficar for the fixed position of places (O museu fica perto) and for “becoming” (ficar contente, A sopa ficou fria). It also means “to stay”: Fico em casa.
  • The same adjective can switch verbs and switch meaning: é verde (a green thing) vs está verde (unripe); é aberto (open by nature, an open person) vs está aberto (open at the moment).
  • In Brazil: “ter” is commonly used for existence in speech - “tem pão?” for “is there any bread?” - where European Portuguese keeps “há pão?”. Both are understood, but use “há” in EP.

A1 9 / 55

Estar a + infinitive and aspectual periphrases I

Estar a + infinitivo e perífrases aspetuais I (costumar, começar a, acabar de)

In short

The plain present of Lesson 6 already covers “I work” and “I am working”, so Portuguese does not need a progressive the way English does. But when you want to stress that something is happening right at this moment, European Portuguese has a dedicated shape: estar a + infinitivo - Estou a trabalhar, “I am (in the act of) working”. This is one of a family of aspectual periphrases: a conjugated helper verb plus a fixed little word plus an infinitive, together saying when in its life an action is - just starting, in progress, habitual, or just finished. This lesson gives you four you will use constantly: estar a (in progress now), costumar (habitually), começar a (starting), and acabar de (just finished). All of them work by conjugating only the first verb; the second verb stays in the infinitive.

The rule

estar a + infinitive - the “-ing right now” of European Portuguese

Take estar (Lesson 8: estou, estás, está, estamos, estão), add a, and add the infinitive of the action:

  • Estou a ler. - I am reading (right now).
  • A Ana está a dormir. - Ana is sleeping.
  • Estamos a aprender português. - We are learning Portuguese.
  • O que estás a fazer? - What are you doing?

Reach for it only when you genuinely mean “in progress at this instant”. For habits, schedules and general facts, the plain present is still correct and far more common: Trabalho num banco (I work in a bank), not Estou a trabalhar num banco. English “-ing” is not a reliable signal - I am learning Portuguese this year is a background situation, better said with the plain present Aprendo português este ano or with ando a aprender (see Lesson 43), not with estou a aprender.

Brazilian note: this is the single most visible Europe/Brazil difference in everyday verbs. Brazil uses estar + gerund - estou trabalhando, ela está dormindo - exactly where European Portuguese uses estar a + infinitivo (estou a trabalhar, ela está a dormir). Both are fully correct in their own norm; this path teaches the European estar a form. Lesson 10 maps the divide, and Lesson 47 covers the gerund.

costumar + infinitive - what you usually do

Costumar (a regular -ar verb: costumo, costumas, costuma, costumamos, costumam) plus the infinitive means “to usually / to be in the habit of”. It is the cleanest way to mark a habit without an adverb:

  • Costumo tomar café ao pequeno-almoço. - I usually have coffee at breakfast.
  • Costumamos jantar às oito. - We usually have dinner at eight.
  • Não costumo ver televisão. - I don’t usually watch television.

Note that costumar itself is almost always in the present for a current habit; do not add “usually” separately - costumo already carries it.

começar a + infinitive - the action starting up

Começar (regular -ar, with the ç kept before o and a: começo, começas, começa, começamos, começam) plus a plus the infinitive marks the beginning of an action - it is starting or about to be under way:

  • Começo a trabalhar às nove. - I start working at nine.
  • Está a começar a chover. - It’s starting to rain. (here começar is itself inside estar a)
  • As crianças começam a ler aos seis anos. - Children start reading at six.

The linking word is a, and it is obligatory: começar + infinitive without a is wrong.

acabar de + infinitive - the action just finished

Acabar (regular -ar: acabo, acabas, acaba, acabamos, acabam) plus de plus the infinitive means “to have just done” something - the action is barely over. Portuguese uses the present of acabar for this, where English uses “have just”:

  • Acabo de chegar. - I have just arrived.
  • Ela acaba de sair. - She has just left.
  • Acabamos de comer. - We have just eaten.

Mind the preposition: it is de here (just finished), against the a of começar a (just starting). Swapping them changes the meaning entirely.

Forms & patterns

Every periphrasis has the same skeleton - conjugate the first verb, keep the second as an infinitive - and each has its own fixed linking word:

PeriphrasisLinkMeaningExample
estar a + infinitiveain progress right nowEstou a estudar.
costumar + infinitive(none)habitually, usuallyCostumo estudar à noite.
começar a + infinitiveastarting toComeço a estudar às nove.
acabar de + infinitivedejust finishedAcabo de estudar.

The helper verb costumar conjugated in full, as the model -ar helper:

Personcostumarcomeçaracabar
eucostumocomeçoacabo
tucostumascomeçasacabas
você / ele / elacostumacomeçaacaba
nóscostumamoscomeçamosacabamos
vocês / eles / elascostumamcomeçamacabam

Only the first verb changes for person and tense; the infinitive after the link never changes.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Estou a falar com a minha mãe.I am talking to my mother (right now).
O comboio está a chegar.The train is arriving.
Costumas almoçar em casa?Do you usually have lunch at home?
Ao domingo costumamos ir à praia.On Sundays we usually go to the beach.
A aula começa a ficar difícil.The class is starting to get difficult.
Começo a entender o problema.I’m starting to understand the problem.
Acabo de falar com o médico.I have just spoken to the doctor.
Eles acabam de sair de casa.They have just left home.
Não estou a perceber nada.I’m not understanding anything.
Costumo deitar-me cedo.I usually go to bed early.

Common mistakes

  • Estou trabalhando -> Estou a trabalhar - the European progressive is estar a + infinitivo; estar + gerund is the Brazilian form.
  • Trabalho agora meaning “I’m working at this very moment” -> Estou a trabalhar - when you must stress “right now”, use estar a; the plain present alone reads as a habit or a general fact.
  • Estou a trabalhar num banco as your job in general -> Trabalho num banco - do not use estar a for permanent facts and routines; keep it for actions in progress.
  • Começo trabalhar às nove -> Começo a trabalhar às nove - começar needs the linking a before the infinitive.
  • Acabo a comer (meaning “I’ve just eaten”) -> Acabo de comer - “just finished” is acabar de; a would point the wrong way.
  • Costumo a fazer -> Costumo fazer - costumar takes the infinitive directly, with no linking word.
  • Uso costumar tomar café / adding “usually” twice -> Costumo tomar café - costumar already means “usually”; conjugate it and stop there.

Tips

  • Default to the plain present (Lesson 6). Only switch to estar a + infinitivo when you truly mean “in the act, this second”.
  • Learn each periphrasis with its glue word attached, as one chunk: estar a…, começar a…, acabar de…, costumar (no word)…. The wrong preposition is the most common slip.
  • Contrast the two edges of an action: começar a = it is just starting; acabar de = it has just finished. Practise them as a pair to keep a and de straight.
  • Only the first verb carries person and tense. Everything you learned about conjugating -ar verbs (Lesson 6) applies to costumar, começar and acabar, and the infinitive after them is fixed.
  • These four are “part I”. More aspectual periphrases - tenho feito, ando a fazer, voltar a fazer, deixar de fazer - come once you have the compound past, in Lesson 43.

A1 10 / 55

European vs Brazilian Portuguese

Português europeu e português do Brasil

In short

Portuguese is one language with two big written-and-spoken standards: European Portuguese (português europeu, pt-PT, spoken in Portugal) and Brazilian Portuguese (português do Brasil, pt-BR). They are as close as British and American English - a Lisbon speaker and a São Paulo speaker understand each other fully - but they differ in pronunciation, forms of address, where pronouns go, and a long list of everyday words. This path teaches the European norm, because the rest of this course’s material (phrases, vocabulary) uses it too. This one lesson is a map of the differences, placed early on purpose: most Portuguese you meet online, in music, and on streaming is Brazilian, so you need to recognise both while you learn to produce European. Nothing here is a rule to memorise - it is orientation, so that later lessons’ European forms (the estar a progressive, enclitic pronouns, for “there is”) do not surprise you.

The rule

Pronunciation: the fastest way to tell them apart

The clearest audible difference is what happens to unstressed vowels. European Portuguese reduces and often swallows them - telefone sounds close to “tlefon”, pequeno like “pqueno” - which makes EP sound clipped and consonant-heavy. Brazilian keeps vowels fuller and more open, so the same words sound more evenly syllable-timed and, to many learners, easier to catch at first.

Two more signposts:

  • Final and pre-consonant -s is a “sh” sound in EP (os livros = “ush livrush”), but a plain “s” in most of Brazil (“os livros”).
  • Brazilian palatalises di and ti: dia sounds like “djia”, tia like “tchia”. European keeps a plain d and t.

You do not need to do anything with this yet - just know that the same word can sound very different, so listening practice should include the accent you are targeting.

Address: tu vs você

You met the address system in Lesson 3. Here is where the two norms split hardest:

  • Portugal: tu is the normal informal “you” (friends, family, children), with its own second-person verb form (tu falas, tu tens). você and o senhor / a senhora are the polite/formal options.
  • Brazil: você is the default “you” for almost everyone, informal and neutral alike, and it takes the third-person verb (você fala, você tem). tu survives in some regions but is often used colloquially with a third-person verb (tu fala), which is non-standard in Portugal.

Both norms share vocês for plural “you”. The colloquial a gente (“we”, literally “the people”, taking a singular verb: a gente vai) exists in both but is extremely common in Brazil.

Where the pronoun goes: enclisis vs proclisis

This is a preview of Lessons 29-32, but the split is worth seeing now. Object pronouns like me, te, se attach after the verb in European Portuguese (enclisis: Chamo-me Ana, Dá-me isso), while Brazilian speech puts them before the verb (proclisis: Me chamo Ana, Me dá isso), and Brazilians freely begin a sentence with the pronoun - something European Portuguese avoids.

”There is”, the progressive, and other verb habits

Three high-frequency differences you have already touched or will soon:

  • Progressive (Lesson 9): EP estar a + infinitivo (Estou a comer) vs BR estar + gerúndio (Estou comendo).
  • “There is” (Lesson 8): EP uses (Há pão?); colloquial Brazil often uses tem (Tem pão?).
  • Prepositions of motion: EP tends to ir a / chegar a where Brazil often uses ir em / chegar em in speech.

Words: same object, different name

Vocabulary is where the two norms diverge most for daily life. A few you will meet constantly:

MeaningPortugal (this path)Brazil
busautocarroônibus
traincomboiotrem
mobile phonetelemóvelcelular
breakfastpequeno-almoçocafé da manhã
bathroomcasa de banhobanheiro
fridgefrigoríficogeladeira
ice creamgeladosorvete
suitfatoterno

Watch the false-friend traps, where the same word means different things: rapariga is simply “girl/young woman” in Portugal but is offensive slang in Brazil; propina is a university tuition fee in Portugal but a bribe in Brazil. When in doubt about such a word, choose a neutral synonym.

Spelling: mostly shared, a few accents apart

The 1990 Orthographic Agreement brought the two spellings much closer (both sides dropped most silent consonants: ação, ótimo). Residual differences are small and mostly in accents over vowels that the two norms pronounce differently: EP António, económico, ténis vs BR Antônio, econômico, tênis; EP keeps the audible c in facto where BR writes fato.

Forms & patterns

A one-glance contrast of the features that matter most for a learner:

FeatureEuropean (pt-PT)Brazilian (pt-BR)
default informal “you”tu (+ 2nd-person verb: tu tens)você (+ 3rd-person verb: você tem)
object pronoun positionafter the verb: Chamo-me Joãobefore the verb: Me chamo João
”-ing” right nowestar a + infinitive: Estou a lerestar + gerund: Estou lendo
”there is / there are”: Há muita genteoften tem: Tem muita gente
unstressed vowelsreduced, often droppedfuller, clearly pronounced
final/pre-consonant -s”sh""s”

Examples

The same sentence in each norm:

European (pt-PT)Brazilian (pt-BR)English
Tu tens o meu telemóvel?Você tem o meu celular?Do you have my mobile phone?
Estou a esperar o autocarro.Estou esperando o ônibus.I am waiting for the bus.
Chamo-me Sofia.Me chamo Sofia.My name is Sofia.
uma casa de banho aqui?Tem um banheiro aqui?Is there a bathroom here?
Dá-me um gelado, por favor.Me dá um sorvete, por favor.Give me an ice cream, please.

Common mistakes

These are the slips an EP learner makes by absorbing Brazilian input:

  • Defaulting to você with friends in Portugal -> use tu - in Portugal você can sound distant or even curt among equals; tu is the friendly norm.
  • Tem pão? for “Is there any bread?” in EP -> Há pão? - tem for existence is Brazilian; European Portuguese uses .
  • Estou comendo -> Estou a comer - the gerund progressive is Brazilian; EP uses estar a + infinitivo.
  • Me chamo Ana at the start of a sentence -> Chamo-me Ana - European Portuguese attaches the pronoun after the verb and does not open a sentence with a clitic.
  • Calling a young woman rapariga while thinking of the Brazilian meaning -> in Portugal rapariga is the ordinary, neutral word for “girl”; it is the Brazilian sense that is rude.
  • Mixing norms in one sentence (Você estás a trabalhar?) -> pick one system: você pairs with third-person verbs, tu with second-person - do not cross them.

Tips

  • Choose one norm and stay consistent. For this path that is European: tu, estar a + infinitivo, enclitic pronouns, . Consistency reads as fluent; mixing reads as unsure.
  • Understand both, produce one. Since most media is Brazilian, expect to hear proclisis, gerunds and você - map each back to its EP equivalent rather than adopting it.
  • Treat the vocabulary pairs as flashcards: knowing autocarro / ônibus, comboio / trem, telemóvel / celular prevents blank stares in either country.
  • Do not over-worry about accents (António vs Antônio): spelling is 90% shared and both sides will read you clearly. The differences that actually change comprehension are tu/você, pronoun position, and vocabulary.
  • Later lessons flag “In Brazil: …” exactly where a European form would trip you. This lesson is the master key to those notes.

A1 11 / 55

Near future (ir + infinitive) and modal verbs

Futuro próximo (ir + infinitivo) e verbos modais

In short

You can already talk about now (Lesson 6) and about what is happening this second (Lesson 9). This lesson gives you two more everyday tools, both built on the same simple shape - a conjugated helper verb plus an infinitive. The first is the near future: ir (“to go”) in the present plus an infinitive, Vou comer = “I am going to eat” - this is how Portuguese speakers actually talk about plans, far more than with the one-word future you meet later in Lesson 32. The second is the family of modal verbs - poder, dever, ter de, precisar de - which let you say what you can, should, have to and need to do. In every case you conjugate only the first verb; the action stays in the infinitive.

The rule

ir + infinitive - the near future

Take ir in the present (it is irregular - Lesson 7: vou, vais, vai, vamos, vão), then add the infinitive of the action. That is the whole recipe:

  • Vou estudar hoje à noite. - I’m going to study tonight.
  • Vais gostar deste livro. - You’re going to like this book.
  • Amanhã vamos visitar os meus pais. - Tomorrow we’re going to visit my parents.

There is no “a” between ir and the infinitive. Spanish says voy a comer; Portuguese says vou comer. Slipping an a in there is the most common single error with this structure. The near future covers plans, predictions and decisions just made (Vou ajudar-te = “I’ll help you”). For a genuine, distant, or more formal future, Portuguese also has a one-word future tense, but you do not need it yet - in speech ir + infinitivo does almost all the work.

Modal verbs - can, should, have to, need to

A modal is a verb that props up another verb to add a shade of meaning: possibility, obligation, advice. Portuguese modals work exactly like the periphrases you already know - conjugate the modal, leave the main verb in the infinitive. Four carry you a long way:

  • poder (can, may) - ability and permission: Posso entrar? (“May I come in?”), Não podes fumar aqui (“You can’t smoke here”).
  • dever (should, ought to) - advice and mild obligation: Deves descansar (“You should rest”). Dever also expresses probability: Ela deve estar em casa (“She must be at home”).
  • ter de (have to) - real obligation or necessity: Tenho de ir (“I have to go”). Note the linking de.
  • precisar de (to need to) - necessity, slightly softer than ter de: Preciso de dormir (“I need to sleep”). Note the linking de here too - and that precisar de also works before a noun: Preciso de ajuda.

The split to memorise: poder and dever take the infinitive directly, while ter and precisar need de before it.

Forms & patterns

The near future - ir (present) + infinitive, with no linking word:

PersonirNear futureEnglish
euvouvou sairI’m going to leave
tuvaisvais veryou’re going to see
você / ele / elavaivai choverit’s going to rain
nósvamosvamos comerwe’re going to eat
vocês / eles / elasvãovão chegarthey’re going to arrive

The four modals in the present, and the link each one takes before the infinitive:

Personpoder (-)dever (-)ter deprecisar de
eupossodevotenho depreciso de
tupodesdevestens deprecisas de
você / ele / elapodedevetem deprecisa de
nóspodemosdevemostemos deprecisamos de
vocês / eles / elaspodemdevemtêm deprecisam de

As with Lesson 9, only the first verb changes for person and tense; the infinitive after it never changes.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Vou telefonar ao médico amanhã.I’m going to phone the doctor tomorrow.
Vais sair esta noite?Are you going to go out tonight?
Acho que vai chover logo à tarde.I think it’s going to rain later this afternoon.
Vamos ver um filme depois do jantar.We’re going to watch a film after dinner.
Posso abrir a janela?May I open the window?
Não podes estacionar aqui.You can’t park here.
Deves beber mais água.You should drink more water.
Tenho de acordar cedo amanhã.I have to wake up early tomorrow.
Temos de apanhar o comboio das oito.We have to catch the eight o’clock train.
Preciso de descansar um pouco.I need to rest a little.

Common mistakes

  • Vou a comer -> Vou comer - the Portuguese near future is ir + infinitivo with NO “a”; the a belongs to Spanish, not Portuguese.
  • Nós vai comer -> Nós vamos comer - conjugate ir for the subject (vou, vais, vai, vamos, vão) before adding the infinitive.
  • Vou comerei -> Vou comer - after vou / vais / vai… the second verb is a plain infinitive, never itself conjugated.
  • Posso a entrar? -> Posso entrar? - poder takes the bare infinitive, with no linking word (the same goes for dever).
  • Tenho ir -> Tenho de ir - obligation is ter de + infinitivo; the de is not optional in European Portuguese.
  • Preciso estudar -> Preciso de estudar - in EP precisar keeps de before the infinitive; dropping it is Brazilian.
  • Devo de estudar meaning “I should study” -> Devo estudar - dever + bare infinitive is “should”; adding de pushes it toward “probably” and is best left alone for now.

Tips

  • For everyday plans, ir + infinitivo is your workhorse: Amanhã vou estudar is far more natural in speech than the formal one-word future Amanhã estudarei (Lesson 32).
  • These all follow the Lesson 9 pattern - “conjugate the first verb, keep the second in the infinitive.” Only the helper changes for the person.
  • Learn each modal with its glue word, or lack of one: poder + inf, dever + inf, ter de + inf, precisar de + inf. The two “de” verbs are the ones learners get wrong.
  • dever has a second job as “probably / must be”: Ela deve estar a dormir = “She must be sleeping.” Context separates the two uses.
  • To ask permission politely, reach for Posso + infinitivo?: Posso entrar?, Posso pagar com cartão?.
  • In Brazil: precisar usually drops the de before an infinitive (preciso estudar), and ter que is more common than ter de. Both are understood in Portugal, but keep precisar de and ter de in your own European Portuguese.

A1 12 / 55

Reflexive and pronominal verbs

Verbos pronominais e reflexos

In short

A reflexive verb carries a small extra pronoun that points back to the subject: in chamar-se (“to be called”) you say chamo-me, literally “I call myself”. Portuguese leans on this pattern far more than English does - for getting up, sitting down, feeling a certain way, remembering and forgetting - so the very first sentence you learn, “Como te chamas?”, is already a reflexive verb. The one thing to lock in from day one is where the little pronoun goes: in European Portuguese it normally follows the verb and hooks on with a hyphen (chamo-me), but it jumps in front of the verb after “não” and after question words.

The rule

The reflexive pronoun

A reflexive verb pairs each subject with a matching pronoun. You already conjugate the verb the normal way (steps 7-8); the pronoun is the only new piece. There is one pronoun per person:

  • eu -> me, tu -> te
  • você / ele / ela -> se
  • nós -> nos
  • vocês / eles / elas -> se

The form vos belongs to the old subject vós, which modern European Portuguese no longer uses, so in practice you need only me, te, se, nos, se. Notice that se does double duty: it covers the singular você / ele / ela and the whole plural vocês / eles / elas.

What “reflexive” means, and verbs that just come with a pronoun

Some verbs are reflexive in the true sense - the action falls back on the subject. Lavar-se is “to wash oneself”, vestir-se is “to get dressed” (to dress oneself), sentar-se is “to sit (oneself) down”. Compare lavo o carro (“I wash the car”, the action goes outward) with lavo-me (“I wash myself”).

Many other verbs simply come attached to the pronoun with no separate “self” meaning at all - you just have to memorise them with -se. The big ones are lembrar-se de (“to remember”), esquecer-se de (“to forget”), queixar-se de (“to complain about”) and divertir-se (“to have fun”). Treat the -se as part of the word: the dictionary lists chamar-se, lembrar-se de, and that final -se is your signal that a pronoun is compulsory.

Where the pronoun goes: a first look

This is the part English speakers get wrong, so learn the two rules now and the full detail comes in step 31.

Default - enclisis: in a plain affirmative statement the pronoun follows the verb and is joined by a hyphen.

  • Chamo-me Miguel. Ela levanta-se cedo. Nós sentamo-nos aqui.

Trigger - proclisis: two everyday things pull the pronoun in front of the verb, with no hyphen. First, negation (não, nunca, nada, ninguém). Second, a question word (como, quando, onde, quem, porque).

  • Não me chamo Miguel. Como te chamas? Ele nunca se levanta cedo.

There is one small spelling adjustment: the nós ending -mos drops its final -s before the pronoun nos, so chamamos + nos becomes chamamo-nos and levantamos + nos becomes levantamo-nos.

With ir + infinitive

When a reflexive verb rides on ir + infinitive (step 12), the pronoun attaches to the infinitive at the end: Vou deitar-me cedo (“I am going to bed early”), Vamos sentar-nos ali (“Let’s sit over there”).

Forms & patterns

The reflexive pronoun for each subject:

SubjectPronounExample with levantar-se
eumelevanto-me
tutelevantas-te
você / ele / elaselevanta-se
nósnoslevantamo-nos
vocês / eles / elasselevantam-se

Full present of chamar-se, in the default (enclitic) order:

PersonAffirmativeNegative (proclisis)
euchamo-menão me chamo
tuchamas-tenão te chamas
você / ele / elachama-senão se chama
nóschamamo-nosnão nos chamamos
vocês / eles / elaschamam-senão se chamam

Where the pronoun sits, at a glance:

SituationPlacementExample
plain affirmativeafter the verb, hyphen (enclisis)Ele deita-se cedo.
after não / nuncabefore the verb (proclisis)Ele não se deita cedo.
after a question wordbefore the verb (proclisis)A que horas te deitas?
ir + infinitiveattached to the infinitiveVou deitar-me cedo.

High-frequency reflexive and pronominal verbs to memorise with their pronoun:

VerbEnglishNote
chamar-seto be calledChamo-me…
levantar-seto get up
deitar-seto go to bed
sentar-seto sit down
vestir-seto get dressedvisto-me (vowel change, step 8)
sentir-seto feelsinto-me bem
lembrar-se deto remember+ de
esquecer-se deto forget+ de
divertir-seto enjoy oneselfdivirto-me
queixar-se deto complain about+ de

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Chamo-me Miguel e ela chama-se Rita.My name is Miguel and her name is Rita.
Como te chamas?What is your name? (lit. how do you call yourself)
Eu levanto-me às sete horas.I get up at seven o’clock.
Nós deitamo-nos tarde ao fim de semana.We go to bed late at the weekend.
Ele não se sente bem hoje.He does not feel well today.
Os miúdos divertem-se muito na praia.The kids have a lot of fun at the beach.
Eu lembro-me do teu nome.I remember your name.
Ela esquece-se sempre das chaves.She always forgets her keys.
Visto-me depois do pequeno-almoço.I get dressed after breakfast.
Vou deitar-me cedo porque estou cansado.I am going to bed early because I am tired.

Common mistakes

  • Chamo Miguel -> Chamo-me Miguel - chamar-se is reflexive; without the pronoun, “chamo” means “I call (someone else)”.
  • Me chamo Ana (as a plain statement) -> Chamo-me Ana - in a simple affirmative the pronoun follows the verb; opening with “me” is the Brazilian order.
  • Ele levanta se cedo -> Ele levanta-se cedo - the enclitic pronoun attaches with a hyphen, never as a separate word.
  • Ele não levanta-se cedo -> Ele não se levanta cedo - after “não” the pronoun moves in front of the verb.
  • Nós levantamos-nos -> Nós levantamo-nos - the nós ending loses its final -s before the pronoun nos.
  • Como chamas-te? -> Como te chamas? - a question word pulls the pronoun before the verb.
  • Eu lembro o teu nome -> Eu lembro-me do teu nome - lembrar-se needs both the pronoun and the preposition de (de + o = do).

Tips

  • Learn each verb with its pronoun and its preposition already attached: chamar-se, levantar-se, lembrar-se de. The trailing -se in the dictionary is your reminder that a pronoun is obligatory.
  • Default position is enclisis: pronoun after the verb, joined by a hyphen (deito-me, senta-se). This is the ordinary European Portuguese order for a plain statement.
  • Just two everyday triggers flip it to proclisis (pronoun in front, no hyphen): negation (não, nunca) and question words (como, quando, onde). Compare Ele veste-se / Ele não se veste / Onde se veste ele?
  • Remember the nós contraction: -mos loses its -s before nos, giving chamamo-nos, levantamo-nos, sentamo-nos.
  • A few of these verbs demand a preposition you must not drop: lembrar-se DE, esquecer-se DE, queixar-se DE. Lembro-me de ti, esqueço-me das horas.
  • In Brazil: the pronoun usually comes before the verb even in a plain statement (Ele se chama João, Me chamo Ana), and in casual speech the reflexive is often dropped (levantei cedo). European Portuguese keeps enclisis (Ele chama-se João) unless a trigger forces proclisis.

A1 13 / 55

Prepositions of place and movement

Preposições de lugar e de movimento

In short

This lesson gives you the small set of prepositions that say where something is and where it is going: em (in / on / at), a and para (to), de (from), por (through), plus phrases like ao lado de (beside) and em frente de (opposite). Two things make Portuguese different from English. First, most of these fuse with the following article into the contractions you met in Lesson 2 - em + o -> no, a + a -> à, de + o -> do - and the fusion is obligatory. Second, Portuguese splits “to” two ways: a for a place you go to and come back from, para for a place you head to and stay. Get the contractions automatic and the a / para split clear, and you can locate and move anything.

The rule

em - where something is (in, on, at)

Em is the all-purpose location preposition - English “in”, “on” and “at” all land on it. It contracts with the definite article: no, na, nos, nas.

Estou em casa (“I’m at home”), Moro no Porto, O livro está na mesa, Vivemos nos Açores. Use it with a static verb - estar, ficar, morar, viver - to say where someone or something is: A farmácia fica na avenida.

a and para - to (the two “to”s)

Both translate “to”, but they carry different journeys:

  • a points at a destination you will come back from - a trip, an errand, a visit. It contracts: ao, à, aos, às. Vou ao cinema, Vamos à praia, Ela foi aos Açores.
  • para points at a destination you are heading to and staying, or a general direction. It does not contract in writing: para o, para a. Vou para casa (“I’m going home”, to stay), Mudámo-nos para Lisboa (“We moved to Lisbon”).

Vou a Lisboa no sábado is a day trip; Vou para Lisboa is a move. When you are unsure, a is the safe everyday choice for outings.

de - from (origin), and por - through (route)

de marks where you come from; it contracts to do, da, dos, das. Sou de Coimbra, Venho do trabalho, O comboio parte da estação.

por marks the route travelled through or along; it contracts to pelo, pela, pelos, pelas. Passámos pela ponte, Andámos pelo parque.

até and entre

até = “as far as, up to” (it takes a + article, so it also contracts): Fomos até à estação, Anda até ao fim da rua. entre = “between, among” and does not contract: A escola fica entre a igreja e o café.

Location phrases: they all end in de

A large group of two- and three-word phrases pin down an exact position. Almost all of them end in de, which then contracts with the next article:

ao lado de, em frente de, atrás de, dentro de, em cima de, debaixo de, perto de, longe de, ao pé de (“next to”, colloquial EP).

So: ao lado do banco (“beside the bank”), em frente da igreja (“opposite the church”), dentro do carro, perto do rio. Never leave the de uncontracted.

Movement verbs carry a fixed preposition (and EP is strict here)

Some verbs demand a particular preposition, and European Portuguese is firm about which:

  • chegar a (“arrive at”) - Cheguei a casa, Chegámos ao aeroporto. EP uses a, never em.
  • ir a / ir para - as above.
  • entrar em (“go into”) - Entrámos no restaurante.
  • sair de (“leave, go out of”) - Saí de casa cedo.
  • vir de (“come from”) - Venho de Faro.

casa, and asking “where to?”

Your own home drops the article: em casa, a casa, para casa - Estou em casa, Vou para casa, Cheguei a casa. And Portuguese distinguishes the two “where” questions: Onde? asks about location, Aonde? / Para onde? ask about direction. Onde estás? - Na escola. / Aonde vais? - À praia.

Forms & patterns

The core prepositions and their contractions (from Lesson 2):

PrepositionCore meaning+ o / aExample
emin / on / at (location)no / naEstou na escola.
ato (there and back)ao / àVou ao cinema.
parato (to stay) / towardspara o / para aVou para casa.
defrom (origin)do / daVenho do Porto.
porthrough / along (route)pelo / pelaPasso pela praça.
atéas far as, up toaté ao / até àVou até à estação.
entrebetween, among(no contraction)entre a casa e o café

Location phrases (all take de, so they contract):

PhraseMeaningExample
ao lado debesideao lado do banco
em frente dein front of / oppositeem frente da igreja
atrás debehindatrás da porta
dentro deinsidedentro do carro
em cima deon top ofem cima da mesa
debaixo deunderdebaixo da cama
perto denearperto do rio
longe defar fromlonge da cidade

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Moro em Portugal, no Porto.I live in Portugal, in Porto.
Vou ao supermercado e depois para casa.I’m going to the supermarket and then home (to stay).
O gato está debaixo da mesa.The cat is under the table.
A farmácia fica em frente do banco.The pharmacy is opposite the bank.
Venho de Coimbra e vou para Lisboa.I come from Coimbra and I’m moving to Lisbon.
Chegámos ao aeroporto às oito.We arrived at the airport at eight.
Passeámos pela praia toda a tarde.We strolled along the beach all afternoon.
A escola fica entre a igreja e o parque.The school is between the church and the park.
Aonde vais? - Vou à praia.Where are you going? - To the beach.
Ela mora longe do centro, perto do rio.She lives far from the centre, near the river.

Common mistakes

  • cheguei em casa -> cheguei a casa - EP says chegar a; chegar em is Brazilian.
  • em o parque -> no parque - the contraction is obligatory (Lesson 2); the open form is simply wrong.
  • ao lado de o banco -> ao lado do banco - the de that ends a location phrase contracts too.
  • Estou em a escola -> na escola - same rule with em + a.
  • Mudei-me a Lisboa -> Mudei-me para Lisboa - a permanent move is para, not a.
  • na França, na Itália -> in EP usually em França, em Itália - EP drops the article with most European countries (but keeps no Brasil, nos Estados Unidos, no Japão).
  • Vou na praia -> Vou à praia - “go to” a place is a (or para), not em; em is for being there, not going there.
  • até a estação -> até à estação - até combines with a + a, so it contracts to à.

Tips

  • One line to memorise: em = where you are (no / na); a = go and come back (ao / à); para = go and stay; de = come from (do / da); por = go through (pelo / pela).
  • Every location phrase ends in de, so expect a contraction right after it: perto do…, em frente da…, ao lado dos. Train the fused form, not the open one.
  • Treat your own home as article-free: em casa, a casa, para casa - the same goes for ir para a cama only when you mean the specific bed, but plain “to bed” stays para a cama.
  • If a place is European and a country, try it without the article first (em França, em Espanha, em Inglaterra) - that is the EP default.
  • In Brazil: the clearest split is arrival and destination - BP says chegar em and often ir em / ir para (cheguei em casa, vou na praia) where EP insists on chegar a and ir a (cheguei a casa, vou à praia). BP also keeps the article on countries (na França, no Egito) and leans on para / pra for most “to”.

A1 14 / 55

Numbers, telling the time and dates

Numerais, horas e datas

In short

Numbers, the clock and the calendar are the machinery of everyday life - prices, times, ages, birthdays, appointments - so it pays to drill them until they are automatic. Portuguese numbers are mostly regular once you learn 0-20 and the tens, but three things surprise English speakers: a few numbers agree in gender (um/uma, dois/duas, and the hundreds), the word “e” (“and”) glues the parts of a number together, and telling the time uses the verb ser with the preposition-plus-article à / às you met in Lesson 2.

The rule

0 to 20

zero, um, dois, três, quatro, cinco, seis, sete, oito, nove, dez, onze, doze, treze, catorze, quinze, dezasseis, dezassete, dezoito, dezanove, vinte. Note the European spellings catorze (14) and dezasseis / dezassete / dezanove (16/17/19); Brazil writes quatorze, dezesseis, dezessete, dezenove.

Tens, hundreds, thousands - and the “e”

The tens: vinte, trinta, quarenta, cinquenta, sessenta, setenta, oitenta, noventa. Above twenty, join with e: vinte e um, trinta e cinco, noventa e nove.

The hundred is cem on its own (or straight before a noun: cem euros), but cento inside a bigger number: cento e um (101), cento e cinquenta (150). The higher hundreds: duzentos, trezentos, quatrocentos, quinhentos, seiscentos, setecentos, oitocentos, novecentos.

Then mil (1000, invariable) and um milhão (plural milhões). Milhão takes de before a noun: um milhão de pessoas.

The e links the groups down to the last piece: cento e vinte e três (123), mil e quinze (1015), dois mil e vinte e cinco (2025). After mil, drop the e when a full hundreds group follows: mil duzentos e trinta (1230).

Gender agreement

Most numbers never change, but these do:

  • um / uma, dois / duas: um livro / uma casa, dois cafés / duas cervejas.
  • the hundreds 200-900: duzentos euros / duzentas pessoas, trezentos e um / trezentas e uma.

Everything else (três, quatro, … vinte, trinta, cem, mil) is fixed.

Telling the time

Ask with Que horas são? (“What time is it?”) and answer with ser:

  • É with one: É uma hora. É meio-dia. É meia-noite.
  • São with more than one: São duas horas. São dez e vinte.

Minutes past use e; the half and the quarter have names: São três e meia (3:30), São três e um quarto (3:15). Minutes to the hour use para as: São dez para as quatro (3:50), um quarto para as sete (6:45). The plain 24-hour reading also works: catorze e trinta (14:30).

“At” a time is where Lesson 2 pays off - use à / às (from a + a / a + as):

  • à uma hora, ao meio-dia, à meia-noite
  • às três, às oito e meia, às quinze horas
  • add the part of day with da: às oito da manhã, às três da tarde, às dez da noite.

Days and months

The days (all lowercase): segunda-feira, terça-feira, quarta-feira, quinta-feira, sexta-feira, sábado, domingo. The weekdays are feminine (a segunda-feira), the weekend days are masculine (o sábado, o domingo); feira is often dropped in speech (segunda). Watch the two prepositions: à segunda-feira = “on Mondays” (habitual), na segunda-feira = “on (this) Monday” (one specific day).

The months (lowercase in EP): janeiro, fevereiro, março, abril, maio, junho, julho, agosto, setembro, outubro, novembro, dezembro. “In” a month is plain em, with no article: em janeiro, em agosto.

Giving a date

Days of the month are cardinal numbers (not ordinals as in English): doze de outubro, not “twelfth”. The pattern is (o dia) NUMBER de MONTH de YEAR, and “on” that date is a or no dia:

  • Hoje é (dia) doze de outubro.
  • a 25 de abril de 1974 / no dia 25 de abril
  • the first of the month may be read o dia um or o primeiro: a 1 de maio.

Years are read as plain numbers with em: em 2025 = em dois mil e vinte e cinco. Seasons take an article: no verão, no inverno, na primavera, no outono.

Ordinals (just the first few)

For order, floors and “the first”, use ordinals, which agree like adjectives: primeiro/a, segundo/a, terceiro/a, quarto/a, quinto/a … décimo/a. O primeiro andar (the first floor), a primeira vez (the first time). For dates and higher counts, EP prefers the cardinal (a página vinte, o dia doze).

Forms & patterns

NumberWordNumberWord
1um / uma20vinte
2dois / duas30trinta
3três40quarenta
4quatro50cinquenta
5cinco60sessenta
10dez70setenta
14catorze100cem / cento
16dezasseis200duzentos / duzentas
19dezanove1000mil

Telling the time:

ClockPortuguese
1:00É uma hora.
2:00São duas horas.
12:00 (noon)É meio-dia.
3:15São três e um quarto.
3:30São três e meia.
3:50São dez para as quatro.
at 8:30 a.m.às oito e meia da manhã

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Tenho vinte e cinco anos.I am twenty-five years old.
São duzentas pessoas.There are two hundred people.
O bilhete custa cem euros.The ticket costs a hundred euros.
Que horas são? - São três e meia.What time is it? - It’s half past three.
O comboio parte às catorze horas.The train leaves at 2 p.m.
Trabalho de segunda a sexta.I work Monday to Friday.
À segunda-feira tenho aulas.On Mondays I have classes.
O meu aniversário é a doze de outubro.My birthday is on the twelfth of October.
Estamos em dois mil e vinte e cinco.We are in twenty twenty-five.
Moro no primeiro andar.I live on the first floor.

Common mistakes

  • dois casas -> duas casas - dois/duas agrees; use duas before a feminine noun.
  • duzentos pessoas -> duzentas pessoas - the hundreds 200-900 agree in gender too.
  • cento euros -> cem euros - it is cem on its own, cento only inside a bigger number (cento e dez).
  • a doze de outubro read as an ordinal -> Portuguese uses the cardinal: doze de outubro, not “décimo segundo”.
  • São uma hora -> É uma hora - one o’clock is singular (é), only two and up take são.
  • a as três -> às três - remember the Lesson 2 contraction a + as = às.
  • no janeiro -> em janeiro - months take plain em with no article.

Tips

  • Learn 0-20 and the tens as solid blocks; everything else is just e gluing the pieces together.
  • Only four things ever change shape: um/uma, dois/duas, the hundreds, and the ordinals. Treat the rest as fixed.
  • Lock the time preposition to the article rule from Lesson 2: “at o’clock” is always à / às (plus ao meio-dia, à meia-noite).
  • For dates, keep the frame dia + NUMBER + de + MONTH: the number is always cardinal, the month always lowercase with em.
  • In Brazil: numbers and time work the same, but note the spellings quatorze, dezesseis, dezessete, dezenove, and that “quarter past/to” is often said with the full number (três e quinze, quinze para as quatro).

A1 15 / 55

The simple sentence: word order, negation and questions

A frase simples: ordem das palavras, negação e interrogação

In short

You now have nouns, articles, pronouns, adjectives and a working present tense - this lesson assembles them into whole sentences and asks questions with them. Three habits carry most of the load, and all three are simpler than English. Portuguese word order is Subject - Verb - Object, just like English, but the subject is usually dropped because the verb ending already names it (Lesson 3). Negation is one word, não, placed right before the verb - there is no “do/does” and nothing to invert. And a question is made by intonation or a question mark alone, with the words in their normal order and, very often, the little frame é que slipped in. Learn these and you can already state, deny, join and ask.

The rule

Default order: Subject - Verb - Object

The neutral order matches English: A Ana bebe café (Ana drinks coffee). Because the verb ending marks the person (Lesson 6), the subject pronoun is normally left out: Bebo café (I drink coffee), not Eu bebo café unless you are contrasting or emphasising. Adjectives follow their noun (Lesson 5: um carro vermelho), and short adverbs and time or place phrases sit at the end or, for emphasis, at the front: Estudo português em casa / Hoje trabalho muito.

Portuguese is more flexible than English about putting the subject after the verb, especially with a handful of common verbs of happening, arriving and existing: Chegou o comboio (The train arrived), Falta uma cadeira (There is a chair missing), Telefonou a tua mãe (Your mother phoned). This is natural, not a question and not an error - but SVO is always safe, so lead with it and simply recognise the inverted version when you meet it.

Negation: não before the verb

Put não directly in front of the conjugated verb, and that is the whole rule:

  • Falo inglês. -> Não falo inglês. (I don’t speak English.)
  • A Ana come carne. -> A Ana não come carne.

There is no auxiliary “do”, so never build não faço falar or the like - just não + verb. The one thing that may sit between não and the verb is an object pronoun (that is Lesson 29-31); until then, keep não glued to the verb. As a one-word reply, não also means “no”: - Vens? - Não.

Portuguese uses double negation, and it is required, not wrong. When a negative word such as nada (nothing), ninguém (nobody) or nunca (never) comes after the verb, you keep não before the verb; when the negative word comes before the verb, you drop não:

  • Não vejo nada. = I see nothing. (both negatives kept)
  • Não vem ninguém. / Ninguém vem. (Nobody is coming.)
  • Não como nunca fora. / Nunca como fora. (I never eat out.)

Yes/no questions: intonation, never inversion

To turn a statement into a yes/no question, change nothing about the word order - just raise your voice at the end (speech) or add a question mark (writing):

  • Falas português. -> Falas português?
  • O senhor quer um café?

There is no “do/does” and no swapping of subject and verb the way English does. Answering is where Portuguese surprises English speakers: instead of a bare “yes”, the natural reply echoes the verb:

  • - Falas inglês? - Falo. (Yes, I do.)
  • - Tens tempo? - Não tenho. (No, I don’t.)

You can add Sim (yes) or Não (no), but the verb-echo is what a native speaker reaches for first.

The é que frame

Portuguese very often reinforces a question with é que placed right after the question word (or a fronted element), with no change of meaning - it simply makes the question run more smoothly and is extremely common in speech:

  • Onde moras? = Onde é que moras? (Where do you live?)
  • O que fazes? = O que é que fazes?
  • Quando é que chega o comboio?

Learn it as one fixed chunk: [question word] + é que + [ordinary sentence]. The rest of the sentence keeps its normal order.

Information questions: the question words

An information question puts the question word at the front; if the subject is named, it usually follows the verb (Onde mora a Ana?).

  • quem - who; o que / que - what; onde - where; quando - when
  • como - how; quanto/-a/-os/-as - how much / how many (it agrees, Lesson 14); qual / quais - which
  • porquê? stands alone or ends the question (Porquê?), while porque introduces the reason - because - and, in European Portuguese, is also written as one word inside a direct question: Porque não vens? / Porque é que não vens? Answer with the same porque: Porque não tenho tempo.

Joining simple clauses

Link two short clauses with a coordinating word: e (and), mas (but), ou (or), porque (because), por isso (so / therefore).

  • Quero ir, mas não tenho tempo.
  • Estudo português porque gosto da cultura.
  • Está a chover, por isso fico em casa.

Forms & patterns

One sentence in its four shapes:

TypeExampleNote
StatementTu falas português.subject usually dropped: Falas português.
Negative(Tu) não falas português.não immediately before the verb
Yes/no questionFalas português?same words, rising intonation / ”?”
Information questionO que é que tu falas?question word first, optional é que

The core question words:

PortugueseEnglishExample
quemwhoQuem é?
o que / quewhatO que queres?
ondewhereOnde é que moras?
quandowhenQuando chegas?
comohowComo estás?
quanto/-a/-os/-ashow much/manyQuantos irmãos tens?
qual / quaiswhichQual preferes?
porque / porquêwhyPorquê? / Porque não vou.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Moro em Lisboa.I live in Lisbon.
A Maria não fala francês.Maria doesn’t speak French.
Nãoninguém em casa.There is nobody at home.
Queres um chá?Do you want a tea?
Onde é que fica a estação?Where is the station?
O que é que vocês fazem ao domingo?What do you do on Sundays?
Porque é que não comes carne?Why don’t you eat meat?
Gosto de café, mas prefiro chá.I like coffee, but I prefer tea.
Chegou o autocarro.The bus has arrived.
- Tens tempo? - Não tenho.- Do you have time? - No, I don’t.

Common mistakes

  • Você faz gostar de café? / Fazes tu falar inglês? -> Gostas de café?, Falas inglês? - Portuguese has no “do/does” auxiliary; make a yes/no question with intonation and a question mark, nothing else.
  • Eu não gosto de café, eu bebo chá (every clause with eu) -> Não gosto de café, bebo chá - drop the subject pronoun (Lesson 3); the ending already carries it.
  • Não vejo alguma coisa -> Não vejo nada - a negative sentence takes the negative word, and the double negative (não … nada / ninguém / nunca) is correct, not “wrong grammar”.
  • Ninguém não vem -> Ninguém vem / Não vem ninguém - use não only when the negative word follows the verb; if it comes first, drop não.
  • Onde tu moras? with English rhythm -> Onde é que moras? or Onde moras? - after a question word the natural European Portuguese frame is é que, or the subject simply follows the verb.
  • Por que? / Porque? as a standalone “why?” -> Porquê? - the stressed one-word question is porquê; porque (one word, unstressed) introduces the reason.

Tips

  • Make SVO with a dropped subject your default sentence, and only add the pronoun for contrast or emphasis (Eu pago, tu escolhes).
  • To negate, slide não in front of the verb and stop; there is nothing else to change.
  • Build questions with your voice or a ”?” - never with “do”. If it helps, imagine every English “do you / does he” simply vanishing.
  • Treat é que as a single ready-made piece that clips onto a question word; it makes you sound immediately more natural and changes no meaning.
  • Practise answering yes/no questions by echoing the verb (- Podes? - Posso.); it is the reflex a native speaker expects.
  • In Brazil the same order, negation and intonation questions apply; the main everyday difference is that você is the default “you”, so the second-person verb forms above are heard less and the third-person forms carry more of the conversation.

A2 16 / 55

Indefinites and quantifiers

Indefinidos e quantificadores

In short

Indefinites are the words that say how much, how many, and which unspecified one - algum livro (“some book”), muita gente (“a lot of people”), nada (“nothing”). Portuguese splits them into two families you must keep apart. Most are adjective-like and agree with their noun in gender and number, exactly like the adjectives of Lesson 5: muito -> muita -> muitos -> muitas. A handful are invariable neuter pronouns that stand alone and never change: tudo, nada, algo, alguém, ninguém. And the single biggest thing for an English speaker: Portuguese is a double-negative language. “I don’t want anything” is Não quero nada - literally “I don’t want nothing” - and that stacked negation is correct, obligatory, and everywhere.

The rule

Two families

  1. Variable (agree in gender and number): algum, nenhum, todo, muito, pouco, tanto, outro, certo, vário(s). These sit before a noun like adjectives (alguns dias, muitas casas) and can also stand alone as pronouns (Quero outra).
  2. Invariable neuter pronouns (one fixed form, no noun attached): tudo (everything), nada (nothing), algo (something), alguém (someone), ninguém (nobody). They point at unspecified people or things in the abstract, and they are always grammatically third-person singular.

Agreement, and the muito trap

A variable indefinite copies its noun’s gender and number: muito tempo, muita água, muitos amigos, muitas amigas. But the very same word muito / pouco is also an adverb, and as an adverb it is frozen - it never agrees. So when muito quantifies a noun it agrees (muitos erros), but when it modifies an adjective or a verb it does not: ela é muito simpática (not muita simpática), elas trabalham muito. Getting this one distinction right removes the most common A2 slip in the whole topic.

The affirmative/negative pairs and where não goes

Each affirmative indefinite has a negative partner: algum <-> nenhum, alguém <-> ninguém, algo / alguma coisa <-> nada, sempre <-> nunca, também <-> também não / nem. The placement of the negative word decides whether you also need não:

  • Negative word after the verb -> keep não before the verb: Não conheço ninguém. / Não tenho nenhum. / Não há nada.
  • Negative word before the verb -> drop não (one negation is enough): Ninguém veio. / Nunca fumei. / Nada mudou.

Both patterns are single grammatical negatives in Portuguese; the “double” you see in Não quero nada is required, not a mistake to be corrected out.

todo vs tudo

todo is the variable adjective “all / every / whole” and agrees; tudo is the invariable pronoun “everything.” English “all/everything” collapses the two, so learners mix them. Also keep these apart:

  • todo o dia = “the whole day”; todos os dias = “every day.” Singular noun with article = whole; plural noun with article = every.
  • EP says toda a gente for “everybody” (Brazilian Portuguese prefers todo mundo).

cada, qualquer, ambos

  • cada (“each”) is invariable and always takes a singular noun: cada dia, cada pessoa; “each one” is cada um / cada uma.
  • qualquer (“any / whichever”) has the irregular plural quaisquer: qualquer pergunta -> quaisquer perguntas.
  • ambos os / ambas as = “both”: ambos os irmãos, ambas as mãos.

algo vs alguma coisa

Both mean “something.” In European Portuguese alguma coisa is the everyday spoken choice (Queres alguma coisa?), while algo is slightly more formal or written. The negative of both is nada.

Forms & patterns

Variable indefinites - the four agreement forms:

Masc. sgFem. sgMasc. plFem. plMeaning
algumalgumaalgunsalgumassome / any
nenhumnenhuma(nenhuns)(nenhumas)no / none
todotodatodostodasall / every / whole
muitomuitamuitosmuitasmuch / many
poucopoucapoucospoucaslittle / few
tantotantatantostantasso much / so many
outrooutraoutrosoutras(an)other

nenhum is almost always used in the singular; the plurals nenhuns / nenhumas exist but are rare.

Invariable words:

WordTypeMeaning
tudopronoun (thing)everything
nadapronoun (thing)nothing
algopronoun (thing)something
alguémpronoun (person)someone
ninguémpronoun (person)nobody
cadadeterminer (+ sg. noun)each
qualquer / quaisquerdeterminerany / whichever

Affirmative and negative partners:

AffirmativeNegative
alguémninguém
algo / alguma coisanada
algumnenhum
semprenunca
tambémtambém não / nem

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
algum problema?Is there any problem?
Não tenho nenhuma dúvida.I have no doubt at all.
Muitas pessoas muito cansadas esperavam.Many very tired people were waiting.
Comi tudo.I ate everything.
Toda a cidade estava fechada.The whole city was closed.
Estudo todos os dias.I study every day.
Não vi ninguém na rua.I didn’t see anybody in the street.
Ninguém sabe a resposta.Nobody knows the answer.
Cada aluno tem um cacifo.Each student has a locker.
Podes ligar a qualquer hora.You can call at any time.
Ambas as propostas são boas.Both proposals are good.
Queres alguma coisa para beber?Do you want something to drink?

Common mistakes

  • Quero nada. -> Não quero nada. - when the negative word follows the verb, EP keeps não; the double negative is obligatory, not an error to remove.
  • Ela é muita simpática. -> Ela é muito simpática. - before an adjective muito is an adverb and stays invariable; it agrees only when it quantifies a noun (muitas casas).
  • Comi todo. -> Comi tudo. - “everything” is the invariable pronoun tudo; todo is the agreeing adjective (todo o bolo = the whole cake).
  • Todos os dia / cada dias -> todos os dias / cada dia - todos takes a plural noun, cada always a singular one.
  • qualquer perguntas -> quaisquer perguntas (or qualquer pergunta) - the plural of qualquer is the irregular quaisquer.
  • Não tenho nenhuns livros. -> Não tenho nenhum livro. - nenhum is normally singular even where English says “any” with a plural.
  • Alguém sabem -> Alguém sabe - alguém, ninguém, tudo, nada are third-person singular and take a singular verb, however plural the meaning feels.

Tips

  • Sort every indefinite on sight into one of two bins: it either agrees (algum, nenhum, todo, muito, pouco, outro…) or it is a frozen neuter pronoun (tudo, nada, algo, alguém, ninguém). That single split settles most agreement questions.
  • The muito test: is it in front of a noun (agree: muitos) or in front of an adjective / verb (freeze: muito)? One word, two jobs.
  • Learn the negatives as pairs with their affirmatives (alguém/ninguém, algo/nada, sempre/nunca), then apply the placement rule: a negative word after the verb keeps não; before the verb, drop it.
  • Keep tudo (everything) apart from todo (all / every / whole), and todo o dia (the whole day) apart from todos os dias (every day).
  • alguém, ninguém, tudo, nada are all singular - the verb stays singular, and their negatives feed straight into the negation you met in Lesson 15.

A2 17 / 55

Adverbs and adverbial phrases

Advérbios e locuções adverbiais

In short

An adverb tells you how, when, where, how much or how certain: Ela conduz bem (“She drives well”), Chegámos ontem (“We arrived yesterday”), Está aqui (“It’s here”), É muito caro (“It’s very expensive”). The single fact to hold on to is that adverbs are invariable - they never agree with anything. This is the mirror image of the adjectives in Lesson 5: an adjective copies the noun’s gender and number (uma casa bonita), but the adverb attached to a verb or adjective is frozen (ela canta bem, eles cantam bem). English blurs the line because “fast”, “hard” and “early” work as both parts of speech; Portuguese keeps them apart, and the commonest A2 slip is using an adjective (which agrees) where an adverb (which cannot) belongs. Portuguese also leans heavily on locuções adverbiais - fixed multi-word phrases like às vezes and de repente - which in everyday speech are often more frequent than the single-word forms.

The rule

Adverbs of manner in -mente

The productive way to make a “how” adverb is the suffix -mente, the equivalent of English “-ly”. The recipe is exact:

  1. Take the adjective’s feminine singular form.
  2. Add -mente.

So rápido -> feminine rápida -> rapidamente; lento -> lenta -> lentamente; claro -> clara -> claramente. Adjectives with a single form for both genders just add the suffix directly: feliz -> felizmente, fácil -> facilmente, normal -> normalmente, frequente -> frequentemente.

Two things English speakers must not miss. First, the base adjective drops its own written accent when it takes -mente, because the stress moves onto the suffix: rápido -> rapidamente (no á), fácil -> facilmente, -> somente, único -> unicamente, cortês -> cortesmente. Second, when you string two or more -mente adverbs together, only the last one keeps the suffix; the earlier ones stay as bare feminine adjectives: Falou clara e pausadamente (“He spoke clearly and slowly”), lenta mas seguramente (“slowly but surely”).

Not every adjective builds a -mente adverb. The two most important - bom and mau - do not: their adverbs are the irregular bem (“well”) and mal (“badly”), which is the next point.

bem / mal are adverbs; bom / mau are adjectives

This pair is the “good vs well” trap, and Portuguese is strict about it. Use the adjective (bom/boa, mau/má, agreeing) to describe a noun, and the adverb (bem, mal, invariable) to describe a verb:

  • É um bom livro (a good book) but Ela escreve bem (she writes well).
  • Foi uma má ideia (a bad idea) but Ele portou-se mal (he behaved badly).

Never say Ela escreve boa or Ele fala bom português - the verb takes bem: Ele fala bem português. As you saw in Lesson 5, bom/mau also have one-word comparatives (melhor, pior), and those same forms are the comparatives of bem/mal too (Lesson 18).

The classes of adverb

Adverbs sort into a handful of meaning groups. You already met most of these words in earlier lessons; here they are gathered by function:

  • Manner (modo): bem, mal, assim (“like this”), depressa (“fast”), devagar (“slowly”), and all the -mente adverbs.
  • Time (tempo): hoje, ontem, amanhã, agora, já (“already / now”), ainda (“still / yet”), sempre, nunca, cedo (“early”), tarde (“late”), logo (“soon / later”).
  • Place (lugar): aqui / cá (“here”), (“there, by you”), ali / lá (“there”), perto, longe, dentro, fora, atrás, à frente, em cima, em baixo.
  • Quantity / degree (quantidade): muito, pouco, bastante (“quite / enough”), demasiado (“too”), quase (“almost”), tão (“so”), mais, menos, and the colloquial EP intensifier imenso (“a lot”).
  • Affirmation / negation / doubt: sim, também (“also”); não, nunca, também não (“not either”); talvez (“perhaps”), provavelmente, se calhar (“maybe”, very common in Portugal).

Degree adverbs, and the muito recap

Degree adverbs sit in front of the word they scale and stay invariable: muito caro, bastante longe, demasiado tarde, quase pronto. This is the muito distinction from Lesson 16: scaling an adjective or verb, muito freezes (elas são muito simpáticas, trabalham muito); it agrees only in front of a noun (muitas casas). The EP flavour word imenso works the same way - as an adverb it means “a lot” and never agrees: Gostei imenso do filme.

Adverbial phrases (locuções adverbiais)

A locução adverbial is a fixed group of words that works as one adverb. Portuguese uses these constantly, and many everyday meanings have no single-word adverb at all - you must learn the phrase. They very often replace a -mente form: com frequência = frequentemente, de certeza = certamente. A high-value starter set:

às vezes (sometimes), de vez em quando (from time to time), de repente (suddenly), por acaso (by chance), de propósito (on purpose), ao mesmo tempo (at the same time), de novo (again), em breve (soon), à vontade (freely, at ease), pouco a pouco (little by little), com certeza / de certeza (certainly), se calhar (maybe). Note that the EP se calhar takes an ordinary indicative verb - Se calhar vou (“Maybe I’ll go”) - which makes it the easy, everyday alternative to talvez.

Where the adverb goes

Word order is freer than in English, but the defaults are:

  • Manner adverbs come after the verb (and after its object): Ela fala português fluentemente, Ele conduz bem.
  • Degree adverbs come immediately before the word they scale: muito rápido, quase sempre, demasiado cedo.
  • Sentence adverbs (a comment on the whole clause) go at the front, set off by a comma: Felizmente, ninguém se magoou (“Fortunately, nobody got hurt”), Provavelmente, está fechado.
  • Time and place adverbs are flexible - front or end: Hoje não trabalho or Não trabalho hoje. The negation adverb não is the fixed exception: it always sits directly before the verb (Lesson 15) - Não sei, Ainda não chegaram.

Forms & patterns

Building -mente adverbs (from the feminine, dropping any written accent):

AdjectiveFeminineAdverb
rápidorápidarapidamente
lentolentalentamente
claroclaraclaramente
fácilfácilfacilmente
felizfelizfelizmente
frequentefrequentefrequentemente
somente
bom(boa)bem (irregular, no -mente)
mau(má)mal (irregular, no -mente)

The adverb classes, with core members:

ClassSample adverbs
Mannerbem, mal, assim, depressa, devagar, + -mente forms
Timehoje, ontem, amanhã, agora, já, ainda, sempre, nunca, cedo, tarde, logo
Placeaqui, cá, aí, ali, lá, perto, longe, dentro, fora, atrás
Degreemuito, pouco, bastante, demasiado, quase, tão, mais, menos, imenso
Doubt / negationtalvez, provavelmente, se calhar, não, nunca, também não

High-frequency adverbial phrases:

LocuçãoMeaning
às vezes / por vezessometimes
de vez em quandofrom time to time
de repentesuddenly
ao mesmo tempoat the same time
de novoagain
com frequênciafrequently
de certeza / com certezacertainly
se calharmaybe (EP, + indicative)
pouco a poucolittle by little
à vontadefreely, at ease

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Ela fala bem francês.She speaks French well.
Felizmente, encontrámos lugares.Fortunately, we found seats.
Este restaurante é demasiado caro.This restaurant is too expensive.
Às vezes trabalho ao sábado.Sometimes I work on Saturdays.
Falou clara e pausadamente.He spoke clearly and slowly.
Ainda não sei a resposta.I don’t know the answer yet.
Se calhar vou ao cinema logo.Maybe I’ll go to the cinema later.
Gostei imenso da viagem.I liked the trip a lot.
Portou-se mal na festa.He behaved badly at the party.
De repente, começou a chover.Suddenly, it started to rain.

Common mistakes

  • Ele fala bom português. -> Ele fala bem português. - a verb takes the adverb bem, not the adjective bom; bom/mau describe nouns, bem/mal describe actions.
  • Ela escreve boa. -> Ela escreve bem. - the adverb is invariable and cannot agree; there is no feminine “boa” of an action.
  • rápidamente, facilmente with the accent kept -> rapidamente, facilmente - the base adjective loses its written accent when -mente is added.
  • claramente e pausadamente -> clara e pausadamente - with two coordinated adverbs, only the last keeps -mente.
  • Elas trabalham muitas. -> Elas trabalham muito. - modifying a verb, muito is a frozen adverb; it agrees only in front of a noun (muitas horas).
  • de repentemente -> de repente (or repentinamente) - it is a fixed phrase; do not glue -mente onto it.
  • Talvez sim. is fine, but Talvez vou with an ordinary verb is shaky - EP prefers either Se calhar vou (indicative) or talvez with the mood you meet in Lesson 34; at this stage, reach for se calhar.
  • Não também gosto. -> Também não gosto. (“I don’t like it either”) - the negative pair is também não, in that order.

Tips

  • Build every -mente adverb from the feminine adjective and then erase the base’s accent: rápida -> rapidamente, fácil -> facilmente. Do it in two steps and you will never misspell one.
  • Tattoo the pair bem / mal for verbs and bom / mau for nouns. “How does she sing?” -> Canta bem, never canta boa.
  • Memorize a dozen locuções adverbiais early (às vezes, de vez em quando, de repente, ao mesmo tempo, se calhar) - in real EP speech they come up more than the tidy -mente forms.
  • Default placement: manner after the verb, degree before the word, sentence comment at the front with a comma. When in doubt, put a time or place adverb at either end - both are fine.
  • For “maybe” in everyday European Portuguese, use se calhar with a normal verb and sidestep the subjunctive until Lesson 34.
  • Adverbs compare just like adjectives (Lesson 18): mais depressa (do) que, tão bem como, and the irregular melhor / pior double as the comparatives of bem / mal - Ela cozinha melhor do que eu.

A2 18 / 55

Comparatives and superlatives

Graus dos adjetivos: comparativo e superlativo

In short

Portuguese has no “-er / -est” endings. Every comparison is built with a little word in front of the adjective and, where needed, one after it: mais … (do) que for “more … than”, menos … (do) que for “less … than”, and tão … como for “as … as”. The relative superlative - “the most / least … in” - is just the definite article plus mais / menos plus de: a cidade mais bonita de Portugal. Four everyday adjectives - bom, mau, grande, pequeno - have one-word comparatives (melhor, pior, maior, menor) that you must never build with mais. And “very / extremely”, with nothing to compare against, is the absolute superlative: muito caro or, in a single word, caríssimo.

The rule

More, less, and as … as

Three frames cover almost everything, and the adjective in the middle still agrees with its noun (Lesson 5):

  • Superiority - mais + adjective + (do) que: Ela é mais alta do que o irmão (“She is taller than her brother”). The do is optional - mais alta que o irmão is equally correct - but do que is the fuller, very common European form.
  • Inferiority - menos + adjective + (do) que: Este telemóvel é menos caro do que aquele.
  • Equality - tão + adjective + como: O João é tão alto como o pai (“as tall as”). (quanto can replace como: tão alto quanto o pai.)

To compare quantities of a noun, swap tão for tanto, which then agrees: tanto / tanta / tantos / tantas … como - Tenho tanto trabalho como tu, Não há tantas casas como antes. To compare how much two people do something, use tanto como after the verb: Ele trabalha tanto como eu.

The four irregular comparatives

These are the ones that trip everyone. Never say mais bom or mais grande:

  • bom -> melhor (“better”), mau -> pior (“worse”)
  • grande -> maior (“bigger”), pequeno -> menor (“smaller”)

The same melhor / pior also serve as the comparatives of the adverbs bem and mal: Ela canta melhor do que eu, Hoje sinto-me pior.

Two European-Portuguese points. First, grande has only maior - there is no mais grande at all. But pequeno has two accepted comparatives: menor and, commonly in Portugal, mais pequeno - Este quarto é mais pequeno do que o outro is perfectly standard EP. Second, muito and pouco shorten too: their comparatives are simply mais and menos (mais dinheiro, menos tempo).

The relative superlative: the most … in

To say something is the most or least within a group, put the definite article before mais / menos, and introduce the group with de - not em and not que:

  • Lisboa é a cidade mais bonita de Portugal.
  • É o aluno menos aplicado da turma. (de + a = da, Lesson 2.)

When a noun is present, the adjective keeps its normal after-the-noun slot and the article does the superlative work: o rapaz mais alto da turma, os dias mais curtos do ano. The four irregulars use their one-word forms here too: o melhor restaurante da cidade, a pior nota da turma, o maior país da Europa.

The absolute superlative: very / extremely

This one makes no comparison - it just cranks the adjective up. Two routes:

  1. muito + adjective: muito caro, muito interessante.
  2. The suffix -íssimo, which agrees like any -o adjective (-íssimo / -íssima / -íssimos / -íssimas). Drop the final vowel and add it: caro -> caríssimo, bonito -> bonitíssimo, lento -> lentíssimo. Words ending in a consonant just take it: feliz -> felicíssimo, fácil -> facílimo. Watch the c/qu spelling reflex from the reading & pronunciation guide: rico -> riquíssimo (c -> qu keeps the /k/ sound), and muito itself -> muitíssimo.

A handful of high-frequency adjectives borrow a learned (Latin-based) absolute superlative instead of taking -íssimo: bom -> ótimo, mau -> péssimo, grande -> máximo, pequeno -> mínimo. The full -íssimo system (and the affectionate -inho diminutive alongside it) is drilled in Lesson 41.

Comparing amounts: multiples and fractions

  • Multiples: o dobro (double), o triplo (triple), o quádruplo - joined with de: Paguei o dobro do preço normal, Ganha o triplo do que eu ganho.
  • Fractions: metade (half), um terço (a third), um quarto (a quarter), dois terços: Comi metade do bolo, Um terço dos alunos faltou.
  • Two handy patterns: cada vez mais / menos (“more and more / less and less”) - Está cada vez mais frio - and quanto mais …, mais … (“the more …, the more …”) - Quanto mais estudo, mais aprendo.

Forms & patterns

The comparative frames:

SenseFrameExample
more … thanmais + adj + (do) quemais rápido do que o outro
less … thanmenos + adj + (do) quemenos caro do que aquele
as … as (adjective)tão + adj + comotão alto como o pai
as much / many … astanto/-a/-os/-as + noun + comotanta paciência como tu

The irregular set, across the degrees:

AdjectiveComparativeRelative superlativeAbsolute (learned)
bom (good)melhoro melhorótimo
mau (bad)pioro piorpéssimo
grande (big)maioro maiormáximo
pequeno (small)menor / mais pequenoo menor / o mais pequenomínimo

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
O Porto é mais pequeno do que Lisboa.Porto is smaller than Lisbon.
Este exercício é tão difícil como o outro.This exercise is as hard as the other one.
Ela fala melhor inglês do que eu.She speaks better English than I do.
É o maior parque da cidade.It is the biggest park in the city.
Comprei o telemóvel menos caro da loja.I bought the least expensive phone in the shop.
Este vinho é caríssimo!This wine is extremely expensive!
Tenho tanto trabalho como tu.I have as much work as you.
O António é o aluno mais aplicado da turma.António is the most hard-working student in the class.
Paguei o dobro do preço normal.I paid double the normal price.
Quanto mais o ouço, menos o compreendo.The more I listen to him, the less I understand him.

Common mistakes

  • mais bom, mais grande -> melhor, maior - these four adjectives (bom, mau, grande, pequeno) have one-word comparatives; never build them with mais. (mais pequeno, though, IS correct in Portugal.)
  • o mais alto na turma / o mais alto que a turma -> o mais alto da turma - the group after a superlative is introduced by de (da, do, dos, das), never em or que.
  • tão alto que o pai -> tão alto como o pai - “as … as” is tão … como, not tão … que; the que frame belongs only to mais / menos.
  • tão dinheiro como tu -> tanto dinheiro como tu - before a noun you compare with tanto (which agrees), not tão, which only modifies adjectives and adverbs.
  • mais melhor, mais pior -> melhor, pior - the one-word form is already comparative; to intensify it, say muito melhor, bastante pior.
  • o mais bom restaurante -> o melhor restaurante - the irregular form carries into the superlative too.
  • muito caríssimo -> caríssimo (or muito caro) - pick one route to “extremely”; do not stack muito on top of an -íssimo.

Tips

  • Think analytically: Portuguese never welds an ending onto the adjective the way English adds “-er / -est”. It puts mais or menos in front and, when needed, (do) que behind.
  • Burn the four irregulars into memory as a block - melhor, pior, maior, menor - because they are among the commonest words you will say, and mais bom sounds badly wrong to a native ear.
  • Keep the two little words apart: comparison takes (do) que (“than”); the superlative group takes de (“in / of”). Mais alto do que ele, but o mais alto da turma.
  • -íssimo is your one-word “very”: filme ótimo, cansadíssimo, caríssimo. Use it for emphasis in speech, and remember it always agrees with the noun.
  • In Brazil: the grammar is identical, but usage leans the other way on one point - Brazilians strongly prefer menor and rarely say mais pequeno, which is the everyday form in Portugal. Both are correct; match the norm you are learning.
  • The -íssimo absolute superlative and the -inho / -ão size-and-affect suffixes form one system - see Lesson 41 for the full picture.

A2 19 / 55

Affirmative imperative

Imperativo afirmativo

In short

The imperative is how you tell someone to do something - give an order, an instruction, an invitation, a piece of advice: Fala mais devagar (“Speak more slowly”), Entre, por favor (“Come in, please”), Vira à direita (“Turn right”). Which form you use depends on who you are talking to - the informal tu or the polite você / o senhor - exactly the address split of Lesson 3. The good news is that both forms are built from verbs you already know: the tu command is just the “he/she” present-tense form with nothing added (ele fala -> fala!), and the você command is the eu present form with its ending swapped. This lesson covers only the affirmative (“do it!”); the negative (“don’t do it!”) and its full system are built in Lesson 33.

The rule

Two commands for two ways of addressing people

Portuguese has no single “you”-command. You pick the form that matches how you address the person (Lesson 3):

  • tu - informal, one person you are close to (a friend, a child, family).
  • você / o senhor / a senhora - polite or respectful, one person. It uses the third-person verb form, so grammatically it looks like “he/she”.
  • vocês - the plural of both, for any group (EP has dropped the old vós command falai / comei outside prayers and set phrases).

The tu command: the “he/she” present form

To give an informal command, take the third-person singular present indicative (the ele / ela form from Lessons 6-8) and use it as is - drop the final -s of the tu form:

  • tu falas -> Fala! , tu comes -> Come! , tu abres -> Abre!

That single rule also delivers most irregular commands, because they are simply the ele present form: ter -> tem, fazer -> faz, dizer -> diz (also dize), vir -> vem, pôr -> põe, ver -> , dar -> , ler -> . Two must be memorised: ser -> and ir -> vai.

The você command: eu form, swap the ending

For the polite command, start from the eu present form (Lessons 6-8), drop the -o, and add the opposite theme vowel:

  • -ar verbs add -e: falo -> fale, entro -> entre, espero -> espere. Plural: -em (falem).
  • -er / -ir verbs add -a: como -> coma, abro -> abra, parto -> parta. Plural: -am (comam, abram).

Because you start from eu, every irregular eu-stem is carried automatically: faço -> faça, digo -> diga, venho -> venha, ponho -> ponha, saio -> saia, peço -> peça, durmo -> durma, ouço -> ouça. Only a handful of verbs whose eu form does not end in -o are irregular and must be learned: ser -> seja, estar -> esteja, ir -> , dar -> , saber -> saiba, querer -> queira.

Saying “let’s”: vamos + infinitive

The everyday EP way to say “let’s do X” is vamos + infinitive - no special form needed: Vamos comer! (“Let’s eat!”), Vamos embora! (“Let’s go!”), Vamos ver. (“Let’s see.”). A one-word nós command exists (comamos, partamos) but it is formal and rare in speech; vamos + infinitive is what people actually say.

Where the pronoun goes: attached after the verb

With an affirmative command the object or reflexive pronoun (Lesson 12) comes after the verb, joined by a hyphen - this is ênclise, the default position you will study fully in Lessons 29-31:

  • Senta*-te**!* (“Sit down!”), Levanta*-te***, Diz*-me***, *-me***, Chama*-lhe***.
  • With você / vocês: Sente*-se***, Levantem*-se***, Diga*-me***, *-me***.

Never front the pronoun in an affirmative EP command: it is Diga-me, not Me diga.

Softening the order: invitations and politeness

A bare imperative can sound blunt, so EP wraps it in courtesy words - por favor, se faz favor, faça (o) favor de + infinitivo - or uses set polite imperatives: Faça favor (“Please, go ahead”), Tenha um bom dia, Desculpe, Diga (“Yes? / Go on”). The imperative is also the normal mood for written instructions and recipes, where EP uses the você form: Descasque as batatas, corte-as e junte o sal.

Forms & patterns

Regular verbs, the two everyday address forms plus the plural:

Verbtuvocê / o senhorvocês
falarfalafalefalem
comercomecomacomam
abrirabreabraabram
fecharfechafechefechem
beberbebebebabebam

The high-frequency irregulars:

Infinitivetuvocê
serseja
estarestáesteja
irvai
tertemtenha
fazerfazfaça
dizerdiz (dize)diga
virvemvenha
pôrpõeponha
dar
verveja
saber(sabe)saiba
querer(quer)queira

Reflexive and object pronouns attach after the verb:

Meaningtuvocê
Sit downSenta-te!Sente-se!
Tell meDiz-me!Diga-me!
Give meDá-me!Dê-me!
Stand up (pl.)-Levantem-se!

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Fala mais devagar, por favor.Speak more slowly, please.
Entre e sente-se.Come in and sit down.
Faz-me um favor: fecha a janela.Do me a favour: close the window.
Tem cuidado com o degrau!Watch out for the step!
Diga-me o seu nome, se faz favor.Tell me your name, please.
Vira à direita e segue em frente.Turn right and go straight on.
Vamos embora, já é tarde.Let’s go, it’s late already.
paciente, ele já vem.Be patient, he’s coming.
Ponha o casaco, está frio.Put on your coat, it’s cold.
Descasque as batatas e corte-as aos cubos.Peel the potatoes and cut them into cubes.

Common mistakes

  • Comes a sopa! -> Come a sopa! - the tu command is the ele form; drop the -s of the present tu form.
  • Fale mais devagar said to a friend -> Fala mais devagar - use the tu command for someone you address as tu; fale is the você form.
  • Me diga / Te senta -> Diga-me / Senta-te - in an affirmative EP command the pronoun attaches after the verb with a hyphen, never before it.
  • said to a friend -> Vai - vai is the tu command of ir; is the você form (and vs seja work the same way).
  • Falar mais alto! as a spoken order -> Fala / Fale mais alto! - the plain infinitive is not the normal spoken command; use the imperative form.
  • Faça a janela (meaning “close”) -> Feche a janela - build the você command from the right verb’s eu form (fecho -> feche), not from fazer.
  • Sente-te / Senta-se mixing forms -> keep one address: Senta-te (tu) or Sente-se (você), not a blend of the verb of one and the pronoun of the other.

Tips

  • Two recipes cover almost everything: tu = the ele present form (fala, come, abre); você = the eu present form with the ending flipped (falo -> fale, como -> coma). Learn those and the short irregular list, and you can command any verb.
  • Because the você form starts from eu, every stem-changing eu form comes along for free: faço -> faça, digo -> diga, venho -> venha, durmo -> durma. You are not learning new stems, just a new ending.
  • For “let’s”, reach for vamos + infinitivo (Vamos ver, Vamos comer) - it is the natural EP choice and avoids the rare one-word form.
  • Keep the pronoun after the affirmative verb: Senta-te, Diga-me, Levantem-se. This is the enclisis you will formalise in Lessons 29-31.
  • Soften commands with por favor, se faz favor, or faça favor de + infinitivo so they do not sound abrupt - the imperative alone can feel curt.
  • In Brazil the picture shifts: você is the default even among friends, so Brazilians use the tu-form words (fala, come) with você-level familiarity, and they place pronouns before the verb (Me diz, Se senta). European Portuguese keeps tu forms for tu and attaches the pronoun after - stick with the EP pattern here.

A2 20 / 55

Pretérito perfeito simples: regular verbs

Pretérito perfeito simples: verbos regulares

In short

The pretérito perfeito simples is the tense of what happened: a single, finished action, seen as a whole and done with. It is the past you reach for to tell a story or report your day - Ontem falei com o médico (“Yesterday I spoke to the doctor”). Building it from a regular verb is the same two-step move you learned for the present (Lesson 6): take the stem, add the ending. There are only three sets of endings, one per conjugation, and just two things trip English speakers up - the tu form has no final -s, and in European Portuguese the nós form of -ar verbs carries a written accent (falámos) that keeps it apart from the present.

The rule

The endings

Drop the infinitive ending to get the stem (falar -> fal-, comer -> com-, partir -> part-), then add:

  • -ar verbs: -ei, -aste, -ou, -ámos, -aram
  • -er verbs: -i, -este, -eu, -emos, -eram
  • -ir verbs: -i, -iste, -iu, -imos, -iram

Unlike the present, the -er and -ir groups are not near-twins here: they share only the eu form (-i: comi, parti) and differ in every other person (comeste vs partiste, comeu vs partiu, comemos vs partimos, comeram vs partiram). And as always in European Portuguese, você, o senhor and ele/ela take the third-person singular form (falou, comeu, partiu), while vocês and eles/elas take the third-person plural (falaram, comeram, partiram).

Two forms that look like the present

This tense overlaps the present indicative in two spots, so context does the disambiguating:

  • The nós form of -er and -ir verbs is spelled the same in both tenses: comemos and partimos are present and past. Only the time frame tells you which - Todos os dias comemos sopa (present) vs Ontem comemos sopa (past).
  • For -ar verbs, European Portuguese avoids the clash with a written accent: the past nós form is falámos, chegámos, estudámos (open, stressed á), while the present is falamos, chegamos, estudamos. The accent is not decoration - it reflects the open vowel EP actually pronounces in the past, and the accented form is the European-Portuguese standard for marking the tense in writing. (Strictly, the Acordo Ortográfico of 1990 makes this accent optional, so falamos for the past is also permitted; but in EP the accented falámos is the recommended and near-universal written form, so write it.)

Verbs in -car, -gar, -çar

A small set of -ar verbs change their spelling in the eu form only, so that the consonant keeps its sound before the -ei ending (a spelling rule from the reading & pronunciation guide, not a real irregularity): c becomes qu, g becomes gu, and ç becomes c. Every other person is completely regular.

  • ficar -> fiquei (but ficaste, ficou, ficámos, ficaram)
  • chegar -> cheguei
  • começar -> comecei
  • pagar -> paguei, explicar -> expliquei, jogar -> joguei

What it is for

Use the pretérito perfeito simples for a completed action or event, however long it lasted, as long as you view it as finished: a single moment (Fechei a porta), a bounded stretch (Vivi cinco anos em Faro), or a chain of events in a narrative (Cheguei, paguei a conta e saí). It pairs naturally with time markers that close the action off: ontem, anteontem, na semana passada, no ano passado, em 2015, há dois dias, de repente.

Two boundaries worth flagging now. For description and background in the past - what things were like, what you used to do, an action still in progress - Portuguese uses a different past tense, the pretérito imperfeito (Lesson 22); the contrast between the two is drilled in Lesson 23. And note that this simple past also does the job of the English present perfect: “I have already eaten” is Já comi, not a ter + participle construction (that form exists but means something else - Lesson 43).

Forms & patterns

The endings, side by side:

Person-ar-er-ir
eu-ei-i-i
tu-aste-este-iste
ele / você-ou-eu-iu
nós-ámos-emos-imos
eles / vocês-aram-eram-iram

The three model verbs in full:

falar (speak)comer (eat)partir (leave)
eufaleicomiparti
tufalastecomestepartiste
ele / vocêfaloucomeupartiu
nósfalámoscomemospartimos
eles / vocêsfalaramcomerampartiram

The eu-form spelling shift of -car / -gar / -çar verbs:

Infinitiveeu formChange
ficarfiqueic -> qu (keeps /k/)
chegarchegueig -> gu (keeps hard /g/)
começarcomeceiç -> c (before e)
pagarpagueig -> gu
explicarexpliqueic -> qu

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Ontem falei com o médico.Yesterday I spoke to the doctor.
Comeste o bolo todo?Did you eat the whole cake?
A reunião começou às nove.The meeting started at nine.
Nós chegámos tarde a casa.We got home late.
Eles partiram na semana passada.They left last week.
Estudei dois anos em Coimbra.I studied for two years in Coimbra.
O João vendeu o carro.João sold the car.
Já bebi o meu café.I have already drunk my coffee.
Paguei a conta e saí.I paid the bill and left.
Vocês abriram as janelas?Did you open the windows?

Common mistakes

  • Tu falastes / comestes / partistes -> falaste / comeste / partiste - the tu preterite ends in -ste with no final -s; adding one is a very common slip (and a Spanish habit).
  • Nós falamos ontem. -> Nós falámos ontem. - in European Portuguese the past nós of an -ar verb is written with the acute (falámos, chegámos); drop it and the form is spelled exactly like the present falamos.
  • eu ficei / começei -> fiquei / comecei - verbs in -car, -gar, -çar change their spelling in the eu form only, to keep the consonant sound before -ei.
  • Eu tenho falado com ele ontem. -> Falei com ele ontem. - English “I have spoken (yesterday)” is the simple preterite in Portuguese; tenho falado is a different tense (Lesson 43) meaning a repeated or continuing action.
  • eu comí / partí -> comi / parti - the eu form of -er and -ir verbs is a plain -i with no written accent.
  • Quando era criança, comi muita sopa. -> … comia muita sopa. - a repeated or habitual past (“used to eat”) is the imperfeito (Lesson 22), not this tense; the pretérito perfeito simples is for a bounded, completed event.

Tips

  • This is the tense of “what happened” - single finished actions and the events that move a story along. Anchor it with markers like ontem, na semana passada, em 2015, há dois dias, de repente.
  • Learn the eu endings first (-ei for -ar, -i for -er/-ir), and watch the spelling of -car/-gar/-çar there: fiquei, cheguei, comecei, paguei.
  • Two forms clash with the present, so read the time frame: -er/-ir nós (comemos, partimos) is identical in both tenses, and only the accent separates -ar falámos (past) from falamos (present).
  • Never put a final -s on the tu form. Beyond that one trap and the spelling shifts, regular preterites have no stem changes at all.
  • Portuguese uses this simple past where English often uses the present perfect: Já almoçaste? (“Have you had lunch?”), Perdi as chaves (“I’ve lost my keys”). Do not build a ter + participle form for these.
  • The next lesson (22) covers the high-frequency irregular preterites (fui, fiz, tive, disse); everything here is the predictable majority.

A2 21 / 55

Pretérito perfeito simples: irregular verbs

Pretérito perfeito simples: verbos irregulares

In short

The regular preterite from Lesson 20 is the predictable majority; this lesson is the short list of verbs that break the mould - and they break it precisely because they are the ones you use most. Ser, ir, ter, estar, fazer, dizer, poder, querer, ver, vir, dar, saber, trazer, pôr, haver: you cannot tell a story about yesterday without them. The good news is that there are only about a dozen, they fall into a couple of tight patterns, and the endings on the tu, nós and eles forms are almost the same across the whole group. What you really have to memorise is the eu and the ele form of each - short, root-stressed shapes like fiz / fez, tive / teve, pude / pôde - and the rest of the row falls into place.

The rule

The strong-preterite pattern

Most of these verbs are “strong”: the stress sits on the stem, not on the ending, which is why the eu and ele forms come out short and usually carry no written accent. Take a special preterite stem and add:

  • eu -e, tu -este, ele -e, nós -emos, eles -eram

Look at ter (stem tiv-): tive, tiveste, teve, tivemos, tiveram. The tu, nós and eles rows are perfectly regular on that stem (tiv-este, tiv-emos, tiv-eram); only the eu and ele forms need learning by heart (note the vowel flip tive -> teve). The same skeleton runs through estar (estive, esteve…), poder (pude, pôde…), saber (soube, soube…), haver (houve…), dizer (disse…) and trazer (trouxe…). Learn the pattern once and you have unlocked the tu/nós/eles forms of the entire family.

The verbs whose eu form does not end in -e

Three high-frequency verbs keep the strong tu/nós/eles endings but have an eu form ending in a consonant, and an ele form that either changes only the vowel (fez), matches the eu form exactly (quis), or adds an accent (pôs):

  • fazer -> fiz / fez (fizeste, fizemos, fizeram)
  • querer -> quis / quis (quiseste, quisemos, quiseram)
  • pôr -> pus / pôs (puseste, pusemos, puseram)

The suppletive verbs: ser, ir, dar, ver, vir

A handful of the commonest verbs use forms that come from a different root entirely, so there is nothing to derive - just memorise them.

  • ser and ir share one and the same preterite: fui, foste, foi, fomos, foram. Context alone tells the two apart: Fui médico (“I was a doctor”) vs Fui ao médico (“I went to the doctor”).
  • dar borrows -er/-ir-style endings: dei, deste, deu, demos, deram.
  • ver: vi, viste, viu, vimos, viram.
  • vir: vim, vieste, veio, viemos, vieram.

Written accents that mark the past

Two third-person-singular forms carry a circumflex that is not decoration - for pôde it is the only thing separating the past from the present in writing, so it is obligatory:

  • poder: pôde (past) vs pode (present) - Ontem não pôde vir / Hoje não pode vir.
  • pôr: pôs (past) vs põe (present); the infinitive itself keeps its accent (pôr) to stay apart from the preposition por.

Everything else in the paradigm is accent-free: fez, fui, foi, quis, disse, veio take no written accent at all.

Forms that overlap - let context decide

Because the eu and ele endings are both a bare -e, five verbs have an identical eu and ele form: disse, soube, quis, trouxe, houve. The subject (or the pronoun eu / ele) is what tells you who. And one preterite form clashes with a present one, exactly as in Lesson 20: vimos is both “we saw” (the preterite of ver) and “we come” (the present of vir) - only context, and which verb it belongs to, tells them apart.

Forms & patterns

The core irregulars in full (European Portuguese; você / o senhor / ele share the third-person singular, vocês / eles the plural):

Infinitiveeutuele / vocênóseles / vocês
ser / irfuifostefoifomosforam
estarestiveestivesteesteveestivemosestiveram
tertivetivestetevetivemostiveram
fazerfizfizestefezfizemosfizeram
dizerdissedissestedissedissemosdisseram
poderpudepudestepôdepudemospuderam
pôrpuspusestepôspusemospuseram
quererquisquisestequisquisemosquiseram
sabersoubesoubestesoubesoubemossouberam
trazertrouxetrouxestetrouxetrouxemostrouxeram
haverhouvehouvestehouvehouvemoshouveram
virvimviesteveioviemosvieram
vervivisteviuvimosviram
dardeidestedeudemosderam

Two quick meaning notes on the table. Haver in the preterite is almost only used in the third person singular houve = “there was / there were” (Houve um problema). And saber in this tense often means “found out / learned”, not “knew”: Soube ontem que ele casou (“I found out yesterday that he got married”).

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Ontem fui ao dentista.Yesterday I went to the dentist.
A viagem foi cansativa.The trip was tiring.
Tive de sair mais cedo do trabalho.I had to leave work earlier.
Nós estivemos em Braga no fim de semana.We were in Braga at the weekend.
Quem fez este bolo?Who made this cake?
Eles disseram que já pagaram.They said they had already paid.
Não pude ir à reunião de manhã.I couldn’t go to the morning meeting.
Houve um acidente na autoestrada.There was an accident on the motorway.
A Ana veio de comboio de Coimbra.Ana came by train from Coimbra.
Trouxeste o guarda-chuva?Did you bring the umbrella?
Pusemos as malas no carro e partimos.We put the bags in the car and left.

Common mistakes

  • tu fizestes / tivestes / fostes -> fizeste / tiveste / foste - as with regular verbs (Lesson 20), the tu preterite never ends in -s; adding one is a persistent Spanish-influenced slip.
  • ontem ele pode vir -> ontem ele pôde vir - the past third-person of poder takes a circumflex; without it you have written the present pode. The same holds for pôs vs põe.
  • Mixing up vir and ver: vim / veio mean “came”, vi / viu mean “saw”. Vi-o na estação (“I saw him at the station”) is not Vim-no.
  • eu fazi / dizi / tivi / sabi -> fiz / disse / tive / soube - these are strong preterites, so they do not take the regular -er endings; there is nothing to build, only to remember.
  • Reading fui as only “went”: it is equally ser (“was”). A reunião fui longa is wrong for “the meeting was long” only because the subject is third person - it must be A reunião foi longa; but Eu fui professor (“I was a teacher”) is perfectly correct.
  • trazi / trouxi -> trouxe - spelled with x, ending in -e, and identical in the eu and ele forms (Eu trouxe / Ele trouxe); the subject shows who brought what.
  • nós fomos vs nós formos: the nós preterite of ser/ir is fomos (one r-less, short form); formos is a different tense you meet much later.

Tips

  • Drill the eu + ele pair of each verb first (tive/teve, fiz/fez, pude/pôde, pus/pôs, vim/veio, fui/foi). Once those are automatic, the tu/nós/eles rows are the same -este / -emos / -eram endings on the same stem.
  • Ser and ir have one preterite between them (fui, foste, foi, fomos, foram) - one of the highest-frequency verb forms in the language, and always sorted out by context.
  • The only written accents in the whole set are pôde, pôs (and the infinitive pôr). Everything else - fez, quis, disse, veio, fui - is accent-free.
  • Five verbs collapse their eu and ele forms into one shape (disse, soube, quis, trouxe, houve); do not hunt for a separate “he” form - let the subject carry the meaning.
  • These fourteen or so verbs cover the overwhelming majority of irregular past forms you will ever need; there is no long tail to fear here, unlike the present tense.
  • Watch the look-alike vimos: it is the preterite of ver (“we saw”) but the present of vir (“we come”); the form is identical, so context and the surrounding verb are what disambiguate.

A2 22 / 55

Pretérito imperfeito

Pretérito imperfeito do indicativo

In short

The pretérito imperfeito is the past tense of describing rather than reporting. The pretérito perfeito simples of Lessons 20-22 tells you what happened once and finished (li o livro, “I read the book”; ela chegou, “she arrived”). The imperfeito instead paints the scene around such events: what things were like, what used to happen, and what was going on at the time (chovia, “it was raining”; tinha dez anos, “I was ten”; íamos sempre à praia, “we always used to go to the beach”). English spreads this job over three shapes - “was/were doing”, “used to do”, and habitual “would do” - and Portuguese folds all of them into this single tense. Better still, it is almost entirely regular: two ending patterns and just four irregular verbs.

The rule

What the imperfeito is for

Four jobs cover nearly everything you will need at this level.

  1. Habits and repeated actions in the past - English “used to” or habitual “would”:
    • Quando era criança, brincava na rua. - When I was a child, I used to play in the street.
    • Ao domingo levantávamo-nos tarde. - On Sundays we would get up late.
  2. Description and background - states, weather, the time, age, looks, feelings:
    • A casa era grande e tinha um jardim. - The house was big and had a garden.
    • Estava sol e não havia ninguém na praia. - It was sunny and there was nobody on the beach.
    • Eram três horas. - It was three o’clock.
  3. An action in progress, either interrupted by a completed event or running beside another:
    • Eu jantava quando o telefone tocou. - I was having dinner when the phone rang.
    • Enquanto ela lia, eu cozinhava. - While she was reading, I was cooking.
  4. Two softer uses you will hear constantly in Portugal:
    • Polite requests, where the imperfeito replaces a blunt present: Queria um café, se faz favor. - I’d like a coffee, please.
    • Informal hypotheticals, where speech uses it instead of the conditional: Eu, no teu lugar, não dizia nada. - In your place, I wouldn’t say anything.

Rule of thumb: if English can say “used to X” or “was Xing”, the imperfeito is almost always right; if it says a plain “X-ed” that reports one finished event, you want the perfeito simples instead.

Building it - regular verbs

Take the infinitive, drop -ar / -er / -ir, and add one of just two ending sets. Crucially, -er and -ir share the same endings (-ia), so there are really only two patterns to learn:

  • -ar verbs (falar): stem fal- + -ava, -avas, -ava, -ávamos, -avam.
  • -er and -ir verbs (comer, partir): stem + -ia, -ias, -ia, -íamos, -iam.

The nós form always carries a written accent on the stressed vowel - falávamos, comíamos, partíamos (recall the stress-and-accent rules from the reading & pronunciation guide). Forget it and you have misspelt the word.

The four irregular verbs

Only ser, ter, vir and pôr are irregular in the imperfeito - learn these four and you are done:

  • ser -> era, eras, era, éramos, eram
  • ter -> tinha, tinhas, tinha, tínhamos, tinham
  • vir -> vinha, vinhas, vinha, vínhamos, vinham
  • pôr -> punha, punhas, punha, púnhamos, punham

Note that ir is perfectly regular here (ia, ias, ia, íamos, iam), even though it was wildly irregular in the perfeito simples (fui, foi). Verbs built on the irregular four inherit their pattern: manter -> mantinha, conter -> continha, provir -> provinha, compor -> compunha, supor -> supunha.

Past progressive: estava a + infinitivo

To say “was doing” with extra stress on the action being under way, put estar into the imperfeito and keep the estar a + infinitivo frame from Lesson 9:

  • Estava a ler quando chegaste. - I was (in the act of) reading when you arrived.
  • O que estavas a fazer às oito? - What were you doing at eight?

The plain imperfeito (lia, fazia) already means “was reading / was doing”, so this longer form is optional emphasis, not a requirement.

Forms & patterns

Regular endings, side by side - notice the -er and -ir columns are identical:

Pessoafalar (-ar)comer (-er)partir (-ir)
eufalavacomiapartia
tufalavascomiaspartias
você / ele / elafalavacomiapartia
nósfalávamoscomíamospartíamos
vocês / eles / elasfalavamcomiampartiam

The four irregular verbs in full:

Pessoasertervirpôr
eueratinhavinhapunha
tuerastinhasvinhaspunhas
você / ele / elaeratinhavinhapunha
nóséramostínhamosvínhamospúnhamos
vocês / eles / elaseramtinhamvinhampunham

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Antigamente morávamos no Porto.We used to live in Porto.
Quando era pequena, tinha medo do escuro.When I was little, I was afraid of the dark.
Estava a chover e fazia frio.It was raining and it was cold.
Todas as manhãs bebia um chá antes de sair.Every morning I would have a tea before leaving.
Ele lia o jornal enquanto eu fazia o almoço.He was reading the paper while I made lunch.
Íamos à praia sempre que havia sol.We used to go to the beach whenever it was sunny.
Estava a dormir quando eles chegaram.I was sleeping when they arrived.
Queria falar com o senhor Costa, por favor.I would like to speak to Mr Costa, please.
No teu lugar, eu ficava em casa.In your place, I would stay at home.
A menina dizia: “Eu era a rainha e tu eras o rei.”The girl said: “I was the queen and you were the king.”

Common mistakes

  • A casa foi grande e teve um jardim -> A casa era grande e tinha um jardim - description of a past state takes the imperfeito, not the perfeito simples.
  • Quando era criança, brinquei na rua (meaning a habit) -> brincava na rua - a repeated childhood habit is the imperfeito; brinquei would mean “I played once”.
  • falavamos, comiamos, iamos -> falávamos, comíamos, íamos - the nós imperfeito always carries the written accent; dropping it is a spelling error.
  • eu era built as seava/erava -> eu era - ser is irregular; there is no regular -ava form for it.
  • eu tinha rendered as tia/tinhava -> eu tinha - ter is irregular too; the stem is tinh-, never ti- or tinhav-.
  • punhava / ponhia -> punha - the imperfeito of pôr is punha, and compounds follow it (compunha, supunha).
  • Quero um café as a polite order -> Queria um café - to sound courteous, swap the present for the imperfeito; the bare present can come across as abrupt.

Tips

  • Test with English: if you can reword the sentence as “used to…” or “was …-ing”, the imperfeito fits; if it is a single finished event (”…-ed, and that was that”), use the perfeito simples of Lessons 20-22.
  • You only ever memorise two regular patterns (-ava for -ar, -ia for both -er and -ir) and four irregular verbs (ser, ter, vir, pôr). Everything else is predictable.
  • Keep the perfeito simples and the imperfeito as a team: the perfeito moves the story forward (a porta abriu-se), the imperfeito holds the backdrop still (estava escuro, ninguém falava). Lesson 23 drills the choice between them.
  • For a softer, more Portuguese-sounding request, reach for queria, gostava de, podia, importava-se de rather than the present: Gostava de ver o menu., Podia abrir a janela?
  • Say the nós forms out loud with the stress where the accent sits - fa--va-mos, co--a-mos - so the written accent becomes automatic.
  • In Brazil: the past progressive is estar + gerund in the imperfeito - estava fazendo, estava lendo - exactly where European Portuguese uses estava a fazer, estava a ler.

A2 23 / 55

Pretérito perfeito simples vs imperfeito

Pretérito perfeito simples e imperfeito em contraste

In short

You now know how to build both past tenses: the pretérito perfeito simples of Lessons 20-22 (comi, fui, disse) and the pretérito imperfeito of Lesson 22 (comia, ia, dizia). The hard part is not forming them - it is choosing between them, because English uses one shape, the plain past (“ate”, “went”, “said”), for both. Portuguese splits that single English past into two jobs. The perfeito simples reports an event: something that happened and finished, a step that moves the story forward. The imperfeito paints the frame around events: what things were like, what used to happen, and what was going on. A typical past sentence needs both at once - Quando cheguei, estava a chover (“When I arrived, it was raining”): the arrival is perfeito, the rain is imperfeito. Get that division of labour right and your Portuguese past stops sounding translated.

The rule

The core opposition: event vs frame

Ask one question of every past verb: is this a single finished event, or the background around events?

  • Perfeito simples = the camera clicks. A completed, bounded action, however long it lasted, seen as one whole: Ontem li um livro (“Yesterday I read a book” - start to finish). It answers “what happened (next)?”.
  • Imperfeito = the camera pans. An ongoing state, a description, a habit, or an action still in progress, with no eye on where it ends: Naquele tempo lia muito (“Back then I used to read a lot”). It answers “what was it like?” or “what was going on?”.

The two work as a team. In a story, the imperfeito holds the scene still and the perfeito delivers the events that happen against it:

  • Estava sol e as pessoas passeavam quando, de repente, um cão atravessou a estrada.
    • It was sunny and people were strolling when, suddenly, a dog crossed the road.
  • The weather (estava), the strolling (passeavam) are the frame - imperfeito. The dog crossing (atravessou) is the event - perfeito.

The two English tests

Because English hides the split, translate it back into these two shapes:

  1. If you can reword the English as “used to X” or “was Xing”, use the imperfeito.
  2. If it is a single “X-ed, and that was that” - one finished event, often with “then”, “suddenly”, “finally” - use the perfeito simples.
  • Every summer we went to Faro = “used to go” -> íamos (imperfeito, habit).
  • That summer we went to Faro = one trip, done -> fomos (perfeito, event).

The interruption pattern

The commonest place both tenses meet in one sentence: a longer action in progress (imperfeito) is cut across by a completed event (perfeito).

  • Eu dormia quando o alarme tocou. - I was sleeping when the alarm went off.
  • O que fazias quando te telefonei? - What were you doing when I called you?

The background can be the plain imperfeito (dormia) or, for extra stress on “in the act of”, the estava a + infinitivo frame of Lesson 9 in the imperfeito (estava a dormir); either way, the interrupting event stays perfeito.

Sequence vs simultaneity

  • A chain of completed events = perfeito after perfeito. Each verb pushes the story on:
    • Entrei, sentei-me e pedi um café. - I went in, sat down and ordered a coffee.
  • Two ongoing actions side by side = imperfeito with enquanto (“while”):
    • Enquanto ela cozinhava, eu punha a mesa. - While she cooked, I set the table.

Same verb, two tenses, two meanings

A small group of very common verbs shift meaning with the tense - the imperfeito gives the ongoing state, the perfeito the moment it changed. These are worth memorising as pairs:

VerbImperfeito = statePerfeito = event
sabersabia = knew (already)soube = found out
conhecerconhecia = knew (a person)conheci = met (first time)
poderpodia = was able to (general)pude = managed to / não pude = couldn’t (that once)
quererqueria = wantedquis = decided to / não quis = refused
tertinha = had (owned)teve = got / had (an event: teve um filho)
  • Eu já a conhecia, mas só ontem soube o nome dela. - I already knew her, but only yesterday did I find out her name.
  • Ele não quis assinar. - He refused to sign. (a decision, not a lingering wish)

Words that tip you off

Certain time expressions almost always call one tense:

  • Perfeito (a point or a closed stretch): ontem, no ano passado, de repente, então, finalmente, uma vez, durante três anos. A counted, closed period is still perfeito: Vivi em Lisboa cinco anos (“I lived in Lisbon for five years” - and no longer).
  • Imperfeito (repetition or no boundary): sempre, normalmente, todos os dias, às vezes, antigamente, naquele tempo, enquanto.

Forms & patterns

A decision table for the past verb in front of you:

The action is…TenseExample
a single finished eventperfeitoA reunião começou às nove.
the next step in a sequenceperfeitoLevantei-me e saí.
a bounded, counted durationperfeitoEstudei duas horas.
a description or stateimperfeitoA sala estava fria.
a past habit (“used to”)imperfeitoÍamos à missa ao domingo.
in progress (“was doing”)imperfeitoEla lia no sofá.
the frame, interrupted by an eventimperfeito + perfeitoLia quando bateram à porta.

The very same verb can flip: começar is perfeito when it names one moment (começou às nove) but imperfeito as a habit (começava sempre tarde, “it always used to start late”).

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Cheguei a casa e a luz estava acesa.I got home and the light was on.
Enquanto esperávamos, começou a chover.While we were waiting, it started to rain.
Antigamente fumava, mas no ano passado deixei.I used to smoke, but last year I quit.
Sabíamos que ele estava doente; só ontem soubemos que foi para o hospital.We knew he was ill; only yesterday did we find out he went to hospital.
Conheci o Rui numa festa; ele já conhecia a minha irmã.I met Rui at a party; he already knew my sister.
Vivi no Porto três anos e depois mudei-me para Braga.I lived in Porto for three years and then moved to Braga.
Quando era pequeno, ia à escola a pé todos os dias.When I was little, I walked to school every day.
Ele não quis ajudar, mas podia.He refused to help, but he could have.

Common mistakes

  • A casa foi grande e teve um jardim -> A casa era grande e tinha um jardim - a past description is the imperfeito, never the perfeito.
  • Todos os dias comprei pão (a habit) -> Todos os dias comprava pão - “used to” is the imperfeito; comprei means “I bought (once)”.
  • Ontem lia um livro (meaning “I read one, finished”) -> Ontem li um livro - a single completed event is the perfeito; lia would mean “was reading / used to read”.
  • Eu conhecia o Rui na festa -> Eu conheci o Rui na festa - meeting someone for the first time is the event conheci; conhecia means you already knew him.
  • Sabia a notícia ontem for “I found out” -> Soube a notícia ontem - the moment of learning is soube; sabia is the ongoing “already knew”.
  • Quando cheguei, chovia wrongly “fixed” to choveu -> keep chovia - the rain is the frame around your arrival, not a new event; the arrival (cheguei) is the perfeito.

Tips

  • Do the English test first, then choose: “used to / was -ing” -> imperfeito; “did once, done” -> perfeito. It resolves the great majority of cases before you touch the endings.
  • Think of a film: the imperfeito is the set (weather, mood, setting); the perfeito is each action that advances the plot. A narrative alternates between the two.
  • Length does not decide it: Estudei dez anos is still perfeito, one closed block. What counts is whether the action is seen as finished/bounded (perfeito) or open/ongoing (imperfeito).
  • Memorise the meaning-shift pairs (sabia/soube, conhecia/conheci, queria/quis, podia/pude, tinha/teve); English speakers lose the most marks here, because English keeps the same word for both.
  • Joined by quando, the usual split is imperfeito (background) + perfeito (event): Jantávamos quando eles chegaram. Swap the tenses and the meaning changes, so check which verb is the frame.

A2 24 / 55

Past participle and the adjectival passive

Particípio passado e a passiva adjetival (estar + particípio)

In short

The past participle is the -ed form of a verb - fechado (“closed”), escrito (“written”), feito (“done”). Portuguese builds it regularly for most verbs and irregularly for a short, high-frequency list you simply memorise. Its first job, the one this lesson teaches, is to work as an adjective of result: it describes the state a thing is in after something happened to it. Used that way it agrees in gender and number, exactly like the adjectives of Lesson 5 - a porta fechada, as janelas abertas. The one contrast to master is estar + participle (a state: A loja está fechada) against ser + participle (an action done to the subject: A loja foi fechada). English hides this behind a single “is closed”; Portuguese makes you choose.

The rule

Forming the participle

  • -ar verbs take -ado: falar -> falado, fechar -> fechado, comprar -> comprado.
  • -er and -ir verbs take -ido: comer -> comido, vender -> vendido, partir -> partido, dormir -> dormido.

A number of common verbs have an irregular participle that you must learn as a unit (they do not follow -ado / -ido): aberto, dito, escrito, feito, visto, posto, coberto, vindo, and a handful more in the table below. There is no shortcut - these are all everyday verbs, so they pay for themselves fast.

The participle as an adjective: it agrees

When the participle describes a noun’s state, it behaves like any adjective and takes the noun’s gender and number: um livro vendido, uma carta escrita, os documentos assinados, as portas fechadas. This is why the endings move: -o / -a / -os / -as.

estar + participle (state) vs ser + participle (action)

Both patterns pair a form of ser or estar with an agreeing participle, but they say different things:

  • estar + participle = the resulting state, the condition something is in now. A loja está fechada. = the shop is (in a) closed (state). Nothing is said about who closed it.
  • ser + participle = the action, the true passive - something is done to the subject. A loja foi fechada. = the shop was closed (someone closed it).

You already have the tenses you need for this from Lessons 8, 21 and 23. Match the verb to the moment:

  • A porta está fechada. - it is closed right now (present of estar, a state).
  • A porta estava fechada. - it was closed / stood closed (imperfeito of estar, an ongoing past state).
  • A porta foi fechada. - the closing happened (PPS of ser, a completed event).

The full passive with an agent (foi fechada pela polícia) and the passive se belong to Lesson 39; here, just fix the estar-state versus ser-event split, because that is what English speakers get wrong.

Short vs long participles - a first look

A few verbs have two participles: a regular long one and a short irregular one. The short form is the one you use with estar and ser: A conta está paga (not pagada), A roupa está limpa (not limpada), A encomenda foi entregue (not entregada). The long form (limpado, entregado) goes with the auxiliary ter, which is the next lesson - though the very common pagar, ganhar and gastar use their short form (pago, ganho, gasto) with ter too in modern European Portuguese. Rule of thumb for now: with estar/ser, use the short form.

Forms & patterns

Regular participles:

InfinitiveEndingParticiple
falar (to speak)-adofalado
fechar (to close)-adofechado
comer (to eat)-idocomido
vender (to sell)-idovendido
partir (to leave/break)-idopartido

Common irregular participles:

VerbParticipleVerbParticiple
abrirabertopôrposto
dizerditovervisto
escreverescritovirvindo
fazerfeitocobrircoberto
morrermortoaceitaraceite
pagarpagoentregarentregue
gastargastolimparlimpo

Agreement, and the state / action contrast:

Estar + participle (state)Ser + participle (action)
A janela está aberta.A janela foi aberta.
Os testes estão corrigidos.Os testes foram corrigidos.
O trabalho está feito.O trabalho foi feito.
As cartas estão escritas.As cartas foram escritas.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
O restaurante está fechado ao domingo.The restaurant is closed on Sundays.
A carta já está escrita.The letter is already written.
As lojas foram abertas às nove.The shops were opened at nine.
O bolo está feito, só falta o café.The cake is done, only the coffee is left.
A conta já está paga.The bill is already paid.
A encomenda foi entregue ontem.The parcel was delivered yesterday.
Estas palavras são muito usadas.These words are very commonly used.
A casa estava coberta de neve.The house was covered in snow.
Os documentos estão assinados e enviados.The documents are signed and sent.
O quadro foi pintado por um amigo.The painting was done by a friend.

Common mistakes

  • A porta é fechada. -> A porta está fechada. - a current state uses estar; ser / foi describes the action of closing, not the condition.
  • As janelas está abertas. -> As janelas estão abertas. - both the verb and the participle agree with the plural subject: estão + abertas.
  • A janela está aberto. -> A janela está aberta. - the participle agrees in gender too; a feminine noun takes aberta.
  • O trabalho está fazido. -> O trabalho está feito. - fazer has the irregular participle feito; there is no fazido.
  • A conta está pagada. -> A conta está paga. - the short participle is pago / paga, and pagar uses it throughout, including with ter (tinha pago, Lesson 25).
  • A encomenda foi entregada. -> A encomenda foi entregue. - same short-form rule: entregue, not entregada, after ser.
  • A casa foi coberta de neve (for the state) -> A casa estava coberta de neve. - an ongoing state in the past is estava + participle, not the eventive foi.

Tips

  • Build regular participles by ear: -ar verbs give -ado, -er / -ir verbs give -ido. Then drill the short irregular set (feito, dito, visto, posto, aberto, escrito) - they are all high-frequency.
  • As an adjective the participle agrees: a porta fechada, as portas fechadas. If you can put an article and a noun around it, treat it like any adjective from Lesson 5.
  • Decide estar vs ser by asking “state or event?”: está fechada = it is closed (condition); foi fechada = it got closed (something happened).
  • Pick the tense from the moment: está (state now), estava (state in the past, imperfeito), foi (the event, PPS).
  • When a verb has two participles, use the short one with estar / ser (está limpo, foi pago, foi entregue); the long form waits for ter in the next lesson.
  • In Brazil: several short participles differ - EP says aceite where Brazil says aceito, and Brazilian usage leans more on the regular forms; keep aceite, entregue, ganho, gasto for European Portuguese.

A2 25 / 55

Pretérito mais-que-perfeito composto

Pretérito mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha feito)

In short

The pretérito mais-que-perfeito composto is the past before the past: an action already finished by the time another past event happened. It is English’s “had done” - Quando cheguei, o filme já tinha começado (“When I arrived, the film had already started”): my arrival is one past point, and the film’s starting sits before it. You build it exactly the way English does, with a two-part recipe: the auxiliary ter in the imperfeito (the tinha, tinhas, tinha… you met in Lesson 22) plus the past participle you just learned in Lesson 24. This is the first of several compound tenses, and they all follow the same shape - ter + participle - so the machinery you set up here is reused for the rest of the course.

The rule

How it is built

Two pieces, in this order:

ter in the imperfeito + past participle (the fixed -o form).

  • Eu tinha falado. - I had spoken.
  • Nós tínhamos partido. - We had left.
  • Eles tinham feito tudo. - They had done everything.

The auxiliary carries all the grammatical work - person, number, and the past-of-the-past meaning - while the participle names the action and never changes: it stays in the masculine singular (feito, not feita/feitos), because with ter the participle is a frozen building block, not an agreeing adjective (Lesson 24). So Ela tinha escrito a carta, Elas tinham escrito as cartas - escrito throughout.

The irregular participles from Lesson 24 come straight back: tinha feito, tinha dito, tinha visto, tinha aberto, tinha posto, tinha escrito, tinha ganho, tinha pago.

A more formal variant: haver

Instead of ter you may use haver in the imperfeito (havia, havias, havia, havíamos, haviam) + participle: Eu havia falado, A cidade havia mudado muito. The meaning is identical; haver is simply more formal and more written. In everyday European Portuguese, ter is the default - use it unless you are writing in a deliberately literary register.

The auxiliary is always ter, never ser

English speakers rarely trip here, but speakers of French or Italian do: Portuguese has noser + participle” perfect. Movement and change verbs still take ter:

  • Ela tinha ido embora. - She had gone away. (not era ida)
  • O comboio já tinha saído. - The train had already left.
  • Nós tínhamos chegado cedo. - We had arrived early.

Every compound tense in Portuguese is ter (or, formally, haver) + participle. There is no auxiliary choice to worry about.

What it is for

Use it for an action completed before a past reference point that is already in play - the “past behind the past”. It leans on words like (“already”), ainda não (“not yet”), quando, antes, and it is the natural tense inside reported statements about earlier events:

  • Quando o médico chegou, o doente já tinha adormecido. - When the doctor arrived, the patient had already fallen asleep.
  • Ainda não tínhamos jantado quando eles telefonaram. - We hadn’t had dinner yet when they called.
  • Ela contou-me que tinha vivido dois anos em Paris. - She told me she had lived in Paris for two years.

The reference point can be a verb in the perfeito simples (chegou, telefonaram) or just a time already understood from context; either way, the tinha action happened earlier.

Two neighbours not to confuse

  • tinha feito vs fizera. There is a one-word, synthetic version of this tense - fizera, dissera, chegara - but in modern speech it is literary only; the compound tinha feito is what you say and write day to day. The simple form is a C1 topic (Lesson 55); learn the compound now and just recognise the other.
  • tinha feito vs tenho feito. Tinha feito is “had done” (finished before another past). Tenho feito (Lesson 43) is “have been doing” - a repeated or continuing action up to now. Different auxiliary tense, different meaning: Ontem, às oito, já tinha comido (“by eight I had eaten”) vs Ultimamente tenho comido pouco (“lately I’ve been eating little”).

Forms & patterns

The auxiliary ter in the imperfeito:

Personterhaver (formal)
eutinhahavia
tutinhashavias
ele / vocêtinhahavia
nóstínhamoshavíamos
eles / vocêstinhamhaviam

A model verb in full - chegar (to arrive):

Personmais-que-perfeito composto
eutinha chegado
tutinhas chegado
ele / vocêtinha chegado
nóstínhamos chegado
eles / vocêstinham chegado

The participle stays fixed while only the auxiliary changes - the same pattern for every verb, regular or irregular:

VerbParticipleExample
falarfaladotinha falado
comercomidotinhas comido
partirpartidotínhamos partido
fazerfeitotinham feito
vervistotinha visto
dizerditotinha dito

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Quando saímos, já tinha parado de chover.When we left, it had already stopped raining.
Ela percebeu que tinha deixado o telemóvel em casa.She realised she had left her phone at home.
Nós nunca tínhamos estado em Lisboa antes daquele verão.We had never been to Lisbon before that summer.
O João disse que tinha visto o filme duas vezes.João said he had seen the film twice.
Ainda não tinham aberto a loja quando cheguei.They hadn’t opened the shop yet when I arrived.
Em 2010 eles já tinham comprado a casa.By 2010 they had already bought the house.
Eu havia escrito a carta, mas perdi-a.I had written the letter, but I lost it.

Common mistakes

  • Eu era chegado tarde. -> Eu tinha chegado tarde - Portuguese perfects use ter (or formal haver), never ser, even for verbs of movement.
  • Elas tinham chegadas. -> Elas tinham chegado - with ter the participle is invariable; it never agrees in gender or number.
  • Quando cheguei, o filme já começou. -> … já tinha começado - if one past event precedes another, the earlier one takes the mais-que-perfeito, not a second perfeito simples.
  • Eu tive feito o trabalho. -> Eu tinha feito o trabalho - the auxiliary is ter in the imperfeito (tinha), not in the perfeito simples (tive).
  • Ela tinha fazido tudo. -> Ela tinha feito tudo - the participle keeps its Lesson 24 shape; irregulars stay irregular (feito, dito, visto, aberto, posto).
  • Ontem tenho ido ao médico. (for a single past-before-past) -> … tinha ido ao médico - tenho ido is the continuing/repeated perfect (Lesson 43); the “had gone” idea is tinha ido.

Tips

  • Memorise the frame tinha + participle = “had done”. Once the tinha, tinhas, tinha, tínhamos, tinham auxiliary is automatic, every verb slots straight in.
  • The participle is the same -o form you drilled in Lesson 24 and it never moves - all the changing happens on ter.
  • Reach for this tense whenever a story doubles back: you are telling the past (perfeito / imperfeito) and need to mention something that had happened even earlier. That earlier layer is tinha + participle.
  • and ainda não are its natural partners: já tinha saído (“had already left”), ainda não tinha comido (“hadn’t eaten yet”).
  • Keep haver (havia feito) for formal writing; in speech tinha feito is the norm, and the one-word fizera (Lesson 55) is literary - you only need to recognise it for now.

A2 26 / 55

Subordination with the indicative

Subordinação com o indicativo

In short

Lesson 15 joined clauses as equals - e, mas, ou line up two independent statements side by side (coordination). Subordination does something different: it puts one clause inside another. A main clause carries the sentence, and a subordinate clause, opened by a subordinating conjunction, hangs off it and says when, why, how much or with what result. Fiquei em casa is complete on its own; porque estava a chover cannot stand alone - it depends on the main clause and explains it: Fiquei em casa porque estava a chover. This lesson covers the four families of adverbial subordinate clause that keep the indicative - time, cause, comparison and result - so every verb stays in a tense you already know (present, pretérito perfeito simples, imperfeito, tinha + participle). The conjunctions that force the subjunctive - wishes, purpose, concession, and future time - are a separate world that waits for Lessons 33-37.

The rule

The shape of a subordinate sentence

Two clauses, one conjunction, and free order. The subordinate clause can follow the main clause or open the sentence; when it opens, put a comma after it.

  • Não saí porque estava a nevar. - I didn’t go out because it was snowing. (main first, no comma)
  • Porque estava a nevar, não saí. - Because it was snowing, I didn’t go out. (subordinate first, comma)

The conjunction belongs to the subordinate clause and never moves: it is always the first word of the clause it introduces.

Temporal clauses - locating in time

These answer when? and stay in the indicative whenever the time is real - present, habitual, or already past:

  • Quando (when): Quando cheguei, eles já tinham saído. - When I arrived, they had already left.
  • Enquanto (while, as long as): Enquanto tu cozinhas, eu ponho a mesa. - While you cook, I set the table.
  • Sempre que (whenever): Sempre que ia ao Porto, ficava em casa dela. - Whenever I went to Porto, I would stay at her place.
  • Depois que (after), desde que (ever since), à medida que (as, gradually): Desde que mudou de emprego, anda muito mais feliz. - Ever since he changed jobs, he has been much happier.

Heads-up: when the time points at the future, quando, assim que (as soon as) and logo que switch to the future subjunctive - Quando chegar, aviso-te (“When I arrive, I’ll let you know”). That is Lesson 36. Here every temporal clause describes something real or past, so the indicative is correct.

Causal clauses - giving the reason

These answer why? and are all indicative:

  • porque (because) - the everyday one, and the only one that can answer a direct Porquê?
  • como (as, since) - must open the sentence: Como não tinha dinheiro, não comprei nada. - Since I had no money, I bought nothing.
  • já que, visto que, uma vez que (since, given that) - slightly more formal, interchangeable: Já que estás aqui, ajuda-me. - Since you’re here, help me.
  • pois (for, since) - bookish, follows the main clause: Deve estar em casa, pois a luz está acesa. - He must be home, for the light is on.

Keep porque (one word, “because”) apart from porquê (the bare question “Why?” and the noun o porquê, “the reason”) - see the mistakes below.

Comparative clauses - measuring against something

The degree words of Lesson 18 open a subordinate clause with a verb of their own, all indicative:

  • mais / menos … (do) que: Ele trabalha mais do que eu pensava. - He works more than I thought.
  • tão / tanto … como: Não é tão difícil como parecia. - It isn’t as hard as it seemed.
  • Manner and conformity - como, tal como, conforme, consoante (“as, like, according to”): Fiz tudo tal como me disseste. - I did everything just as you told me.

Before a full clause European Portuguese prefers do que to a bare que: mais alto do que o irmão.

Consecutive clauses - stating the result

An intensifier in the main clause (tão, tanto) sets up a que clause that reports the result - a real outcome, so indicative:

  • tão + adjective/adverb + que: Estava tão cansado que adormeci no sofá. - I was so tired that I fell asleep on the sofa.
  • tanto + verb + que: Riu-se tanto que começou a chorar. - She laughed so much that she started to cry.
  • tanto/tanta/tantos/tantas + noun + que: Havia tanta gente que não entrámos. - There were so many people that we didn’t go in.
  • de tal modo / maneira / forma que: Explicou de tal maneira que todos entenderam. - He explained in such a way that everyone understood.

Do not confuse this with purpose (para que…, “so that / in order that”), which takes the subjunctive and belongs to Lesson 36. Result = something that actually happened = indicative; purpose = an aim not yet reached = subjunctive.

Forms & patterns

The four families and their conjunctions:

FamilyConjunctionsAnswers
Temporalquando, enquanto, sempre que, depois que, desde que, à medida que, assim que*, logo que*when?
Causalporque, como, já que, visto que, uma vez que, poiswhy?
Comparativemais/menos/tão/tanto … (do) que / como, como, tal como, conforme, consoantehow (much)?
Consecutivetão … que, tanto … que, de tal modo/maneira/forma quewith what result?

* assim que and logo que pointing at the future take the future subjunctive (Lesson 36).

The consecutive pattern in detail:

PatternExampleEnglish
tão + adj/adv + queFalou tão depressa que ninguém percebeu.He spoke so fast that nobody understood.
tanto + verb + queChorou tanto que adormeceu.She cried so much that she fell asleep.
tanto/tanta/tantos/tantas + noun + queComeu tantos bolos que ficou maldisposto.He ate so many cakes that he felt sick.
de tal modo/maneira/forma queGritou de tal forma que os vizinhos ouviram.She shouted in such a way that the neighbours heard.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Quando cheguei a casa, o jantar já estava pronto.When I got home, dinner was already ready.
Enquanto ouço música, não consigo estudar.While I listen to music, I can’t study.
Não fui à festa porque estava muito cansado.I didn’t go to the party because I was very tired.
Como estava a chover, ficámos em casa.As it was raining, we stayed home.
Já que estás aqui, ajuda-me com isto.Since you’re here, help me with this.
Como já tinham jantado, só beberam um café.Since they had already had dinner, they only had a coffee.
Ela fala português melhor do que eu pensava.She speaks Portuguese better than I thought.
O bebé é tão pequeno que cabe nos meus braços.The baby is so small that he fits in my arms.
Estudei tanto que passei no exame.I studied so much that I passed the exam.
Sempre que ia ao Porto, visitava os meus tios.Whenever I went to Porto, I used to visit my aunt and uncle.

Common mistakes

  • Fiquei em casa por causa que chovia. -> Fiquei em casa porque chovia. (or … por causa da chuva.) - por causa que does not exist; use porque before a clause and por causa de before a noun.
  • Não vim porquê estava doente. -> Não vim porque estava doente. - “because” is always porque (one word); porquê is only the bare question Porquê? and the noun o porquê (“the reason”).
  • Ficámos em casa como estava a chover. -> Como estava a chover, ficámos em casa. - causal como must open the sentence; placed after the main clause it reads as “like/how”, not “because”.
  • Ele é mais alto que eu era. -> Ele é mais alto do que eu era. - before a full clause EP prefers do que to a bare que.
  • Quando chego amanhã, ligo-te. -> Quando chegar amanhã, ligo-te. - a quando clause about the future takes the future subjunctive (Lesson 36); the present indicative here means a habit, not tomorrow.
  • Enquanto que tu falas, eu escrevo. -> Enquanto tu falas, eu escrevo. - the temporal conjunction is enquanto; enquanto que is better avoided in careful European Portuguese.
  • Estava tão cansado para que adormeci. -> Estava tão cansado que adormeci. - a real result uses plain que (indicative); para que means purpose and takes the subjunctive.

Tips

  • The indicative is the mood of facts. These four families report real time, real reasons, real comparisons and real results, so the verb simply stays in the tenses of Lessons 6-8, 21-23 and 26 - nothing new to conjugate.
  • Sort any connector by the question it answers: when? (temporal), why? (causal), how much / like what? (comparative), so what happened? (consecutive). That tells you the family and confirms the indicative.
  • Front the subordinate clause for emphasis and add a comma; leave it after the main clause and you usually need none: Como choveu, não saí. / Não saí porque choveu.
  • porque is one solid word meaning “because”; keep porquê for the standalone Porquê? and for o porquê (“the reason, the why”).
  • Watch the trapdoor into the subjunctive: the instant a clause looks to the future, or expresses a purpose, wish or doubt, the verb leaves the indicative. That whole territory is Lessons 33-37; everything in this lesson is settled fact.
  • In Brazil: the interrogative “why” is written as two words - Por que não veio? - and the sentence-final form as por quê?, alongside porque (because) and o porquê (the reason); European Portuguese uses porque for the question too and only splits off porquê.

A2 27 / 55

Time markers: distance and duration

Marcadores temporais: distância e duração (há, desde, daqui a, já, ainda)

In short

Once you can build past and present sentences, the next job is to anchor them in time: how long ago something happened, since when it has been going on, how long it lasted, and how far off the next thing is. Portuguese does this with a small kit of markers - (“ago” / “for”), desde (“since”), daqui a and dentro de (“in / from now”), durante (“for / during”), plus the two little adverbs (“already / yet”) and ainda (“still / yet”). None of them needs a new tense: they attach to the present, perfeito and imperfeito you already have. The catch is that they do not line up one-to-one with English, so this lesson is about matching each English idea to the right Portuguese marker.

The rule

- “ago” and “for” (up to now)

is the impersonal verb haver (Lesson 8), and it measures a stretch of time back from now. It does two English jobs, and the tense of the other verb decides which:

  • With a past verb it means “ago”: Cheguei dois anos. - I arrived two years ago.
  • With a present verb it means “for” (an action still going on): Moro aqui dois anos. - I’ve lived here for two years.

That second pattern is a classic trap: English uses the present perfect (“I have lived”), but Portuguese uses the present - Estudo português há seis meses, not a compound tense. Colloquially you may also hear the span followed by atrás for “ago”: dois anos atrás.

Ask about it with há quanto tempo? (“how long (ago)?”): Há quanto tempo esperas? - How long have you been waiting?

desde - “since” (a starting point)

Desde needs a point where something began - a date, a day, an hour, an event - not a length:

  • Trabalho aqui desde 2019. - I’ve worked here since 2019.
  • Não o vejo desde segunda-feira. - I haven’t seen him since Monday.
  • **Desde que cheguei, tem chovido. - Since I arrived, it’s been raining.

Pair it with até for a span with both ends: **Desde as nove até ao meio-dia. And note the contrast with : takes a length (“two years”), desde takes a start (“since 2019”). The formal blend desde há muito tempo (“for a long time now”) exists but you can ignore it for now.

daqui a / dentro de - “in / from now” (forward distance)

To measure forward from now to a future point, European Portuguese uses daqui a (“from now”) or dentro de (“within”):

  • Volto daqui a cinco minutos. - I’ll be back in five minutes.
  • O comboio parte dentro de meia hora. - The train leaves in half an hour.

Do not use for the future - only looks back. Keep em for “the time it takes to complete”, not the distance to a point: Faço isto em cinco minutos (“I’ll get it done in five minutes”) is fine, but “back in five minutes” is daqui a cinco minutos. (Brazilian Portuguese happily says em cinco minutos for both; EP keeps daqui a.)

durante - “for / during” (a finished span)

For a completed stretch, use durante (or often nothing at all):

  • Estudei durante duas horas. - I studied for two hours.
  • Vivemos em Faro durante três anos. - We lived in Faro for three years.

This differs from + present, which runs up to now; durante frames a block that is over.

and ainda - already, still, not yet, no longer

These two adverbs, plus negation, cover four everyday meanings. Learn them as a square:

  • = “already” (it has happened): ** acabei. - I’ve already finished. In a question it is “yet”: ** comeste? - Have you eaten yet? On its own já vou means “I’m coming right now”.
  • ainda = “still” (it continues): **Ainda estou a trabalhar. - I’m still working.
  • ainda não = “not yet”: **Ainda não acabei. - I haven’t finished yet.
  • já não = “no longer” (it stopped): **Já não moro lá. - I don’t live there any more.

points at a change that has happened; ainda points at a state that has not changed. Flip each with negation to get “no longer” and “not yet”.

Forms & patterns

The distance-and-duration markers:

MarkerMeaningLooksExample
há + span”ago” (with a past verb)backwardSaí há uma hora.
há + span”for” (with a present verb)up to nowEspero há uma hora.
desde + point”since”from a startEspero desde as três.
durante + span”for / during” (finished)a closed blockEsperei durante uma hora.
daqui a + span”in / from now”forwardChego daqui a uma hora.
dentro de + span”within / in”forwardChego dentro de uma hora.

The já / ainda square:

positivenegative
change happenedjá (already)já não (no longer)
state continuesainda (still)ainda não (not yet)

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Conheço-a muitos anos.I’ve known her for many years.
O filme começou dez minutos.The film started ten minutes ago.
Estou de férias desde sexta-feira.I’ve been on holiday since Friday.
Trabalhei durante toda a tarde.I worked for the whole afternoon.
O autocarro chega daqui a um quarto de hora.The bus arrives in a quarter of an hour.
Fica pronto dentro de dois dias.It’ll be ready within two days.
falei com o médico.I’ve already spoken to the doctor.
Ela ainda mora com os pais.She still lives with her parents.
Ainda não recebi a resposta.I haven’t received the reply yet.
Já não fumo.I don’t smoke any more.

Common mistakes

  • Spelling as à: **À dois anos que estudo. -> Há dois anos que estudo - “ago / for” is the verb haver (), never the preposition à.
  • A compound tense for “for … up to now”: **Tenho morado aqui há três anos. -> Moro aqui há três anos - Portuguese uses the plain present with ; tenho morado is a different idea (Lesson 43).
  • desde with a length: **Espero desde duas horas. -> Espero há duas horas (length) / Espero desde as duas (start point) - desde needs a point in time, needs a span.
  • for the future: **Volto há cinco minutos. -> Volto daqui a cinco minutos - only looks back; forward distance is daqui a / dentro de.
  • Mixing up “not yet” and “no longer”: **Já não cheguei (for “I haven’t arrived yet”) -> Ainda não cheguei - ainda não = not yet; já não = no longer.
  • “yet” as bare ainda: **Ainda acabei (for “I haven’t finished yet”) -> Ainda não acabei - the “not yet” meaning always needs the negative ainda não.

Tips

  • Sort the marker by the arrow: backward = (“ago”) or desde (“since”); a closed block = durante; forward = daqui a / dentro de. Point the arrow first, then the word chooses itself.
  • wants a length, desde wants a start. “for two years” = há dois anos; “since 2019” = desde 2019.
  • When English says “have + verb + for/since” about something still true, drop into the present in Portuguese: Namoramos há um ano = “We’ve been together for a year.”
  • Fix the já / ainda square in your head: (done) / ainda não (not done) / ainda (still on) / já não (stopped). Two words plus negation, four meanings.
  • Brazilian note: the split is the same, but Brazil often says em for a future distance (volto em cinco minutos) where European Portuguese keeps daqui a cinco minutos; and Brazil frequently puts the span with faz (faz dois anos) alongside .

A2 28 / 55

Por vs para

Por e para

In short

Por and para both land on English “for”, which is exactly why they blur together - but Portuguese keeps them apart with one clean idea. Para looks forward: it points at a destination, a goal, a recipient or a deadline - where the action is heading. Por looks at what is behind the action: the cause, the means, the route travelled through, the price paid or the length of time. On top of that, por never stands next to an article on its own: por + o/a always fuses into pelo/pela. Learn the small set of fixed frames for each preposition, run every “for” through a quick “forward or behind?” test, and the choice stops being a guess.

The rule

Para - destination, goal, recipient, deadline

Use para whenever the sense points ahead of the verb:

  • Destination / direction: Vou para o Porto. (I’m going to Porto.) Este comboio vai para Lisboa.
  • Recipient - who gets it: Este presente é para ti. (This present is for you.) Comprei flores para a minha mãe.
  • Purpose - “in order to”: this is always para + infinitive. Estudo para passar no exame. (I study (in order) to pass the exam.) Uma faca para cortar pão. (A knife for cutting bread.)
  • Deadline / a point in the future: O trabalho é para segunda-feira. (The work is due Monday.) Preciso disto para amanhã.
  • Opinion - “for / to my mind”: **Para mim, está bom. (For me / in my view, it’s fine.)
  • “Work for” an employer: Trabalho para uma empresa alemã.

Por - cause, means, route, exchange, rate, duration, agent

Use por when the sense reaches back to why or through what:

  • Cause / reason / motive: Fechado por férias. (Closed for holidays.) Obrigado por tudo. (Thanks for everything.) Faço isto por ti. (I do this for your sake / because of you.)
  • Means / how: Falámos por telefone. Mando o ficheiro por email. Paguei por cartão.
  • Route - through / along / by way of: Passo por tua casa. (I’ll come by your place.) Entrou pela janela. Viajámos pela Espanha.
  • Exchange / price: Comprei o carro por dez mil euros. Troquei o azul pelo verde.
  • Rate / distribution: duas vezes por semana, cinquenta quilómetros por hora, dez euros por pessoa.
  • Duration of a stretch of time: Ficámos por uma semana.
  • Agent of a passive (“by”): O livro foi escrito por Saramago. (You meet the passive fully in step 40 - just note here that the doer takes por.)

Por + article always contracts

Por is the one preposition that never sits beside a bare definite article: it fuses into pelo, pela, pelos, pelas.

  • por + o -> pelo: Passámos pelo centro.
  • por + a -> pela: Obrigado pela ajuda. / **Pela manhã está frio.
  • por + os / as -> pelos / pelas: Andámos pelas ruas velhas.

You will never write por o or por a - that is always a spelling error for pelo / pela.

The minimal pairs that decide it

The clearest way to feel the split is to hold the same sentence and swap the preposition:

  • Fui à loja para comprar pão. (purpose - why I went) vs Fui castigado por chegar tarde. (cause - what I got punished for).
  • Este autocarro vai para o aeroporto. (destination - it ends there) vs Este autocarro passa pelo aeroporto. (route - it goes through).
  • É para ti. (recipient - you receive it) vs Fi-lo por ti. (motive - for your sake).
  • Estudo para o exame. (goal ahead) vs Troco isto por aquilo. (exchange).

Forms & patterns

When each preposition is the right one:

SensePrepositionExample
destination / directionparaVou para o Porto.
recipientparaÉ para ti.
purpose (in order to)para + infinitiveEstudo para passar.
deadline / future pointparaÉ para amanhã.
cause / reasonporObrigado por tudo.
means (how)porpor email, por telefone
route (through)porPasso pela cidade.
exchange / priceporComprei-o por 10 euros.
rate / perporduas vezes por semana
agent of passive (by)porescrito por Saramago

The contractions of por (obligatory):

por +ContractionExample
opelopelo centro
apelapela manhã
ospelospelos campos
aspelaspelas ruas

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Este presente é para a Ana.This present is for Ana.
Trabalho muito para ter férias.I work hard (in order) to have a holiday.
Obrigado pela boleia.Thanks for the lift.
Vou para casa pela ponte.I’m going home over the bridge.
Ligo-te por telefone amanhã.I’ll phone you tomorrow.
Paguei vinte euros pelo bilhete.I paid twenty euros for the ticket.
Corremos pela praia por uma hora.We ran along the beach for an hour.
O relatório é para sexta-feira.The report is due Friday.
A carta foi enviada por engano.The letter was sent by mistake.
Vamos para o sul para descansar.We’re going south to rest.

Common mistakes

  • Thanking with para: Obrigado para a ajuda -> Obrigado pela ajuda - gratitude is a cause, so it takes por, and por + a contracts to pela.
  • Purpose with por: Estudo por passar no exame -> Estudo para passar - purpose (“in order to”) is always para + infinitive; por fazer would mean “still to be done”.
  • Not contracting: Passámos por o centro / **por a manhã -> pelo centro, pela manhã - por must fuse with the article.
  • Recipient with por: Este presente é por ti -> é para ti - the person who receives something takes para; por ti means “for your sake”.
  • Passive agent with para: escrito para Saramago -> escrito por Saramago - the doer of a passive action takes por (para Saramago would mean the book was destined for him).
  • Rate with para: duas vezes para semana -> por semana - “per / a” (frequency and rate) is always por.

Tips

  • Run every English “for” through a two-way test. If you can reword it as “heading to / meant for / in order to”, use para. If it fits “because of / by means of / through / in exchange for / per”, use por.
  • Purpose is a hard rule: para + infinitive = in order to (para comer = to eat). Por + infinitive is a different animal - está tudo por fazer means “it’s all still to be done” - so never reach for por to say a goal.
  • Por hides its article. The moment a definite article would follow it, write pelo / pela / pelos / pelas, never por o / por a.
  • Keep one anchor pair in your head - vou para o aeroporto (I end up there) vs passo pelo aeroporto (I go through) - and route everything else to whichever side it resembles.
  • In Brazil: the split works exactly the same way. The only thing you will notice is that spoken Brazilian Portuguese often reduces para to pra (vou pra casa); it is fine in casual speech but you should keep para in writing and in European Portuguese.

A2 29 / 55

Object pronouns: unstressed and stressed forms

Pronomes pessoais complemento: formas átonas e tónicas

In short

Once you know who does something (the subject, Lesson 3), you need a short way to say whom or to whom it is done, so you are not forced to repeat the noun: not Vejo o Pedro. Conheço o Pedro há anos, but Vejo o Pedro. Conheço-o há anos - “I see Pedro. I have known him for years.” Portuguese does this with object pronouns, and it keeps two separate sets of them:

  • unstressed (formas átonas, also called clitics) - little words that lean on the verb: me, te, o, a, lhe, nos, vos, os, as, lhes;
  • stressed (formas tónicas) - stand-alone words that appear after a preposition: mim, ti, si, ele/ela, nós, vós, eles/elas.

This lesson teaches you which form to reach for. Where the clitic sits next to the verb (attached after it, conheço-o, or pulled in front, não o conheço) is a whole skill of its own - that is the next lesson, #31 - and the -lo/-no shapes that o/a take after certain endings are Lesson 31. Here, just learn the forms and the direct-vs-indirect split.

The rule

Direct object clitics - the thing acted on

The direct object (complemento direto) is what the verb hits with no preposition in between: you see something, buy something, know someone. Replace it with:

me, te, o/a, nos, vos, os/as

Only the third person carries gender and number: o (him / it, masc.), a (her / it, fem.), os / as (them). They agree with the noun they replace:

  • Vejo o Pedro. -> Vejo-o. (I see him.)
  • Comprei as flores. -> Comprei-as. (I bought them.)

After a verb form ending in -r, -s or -z, o/a/os/as change to -lo/-la/-los/-las (comprá-las, fá-lo). That is Lesson 31 - for now just recognise it.

Indirect object clitics - the person you give/say/send to

The indirect object (complemento indireto) is reached through the preposition a (“to / for”): you give a book to someone, say something to someone. Replace it with:

me, te, lhe, nos, vos, lhes

Here the third person is lhe (to him / to her / to you-formal) and lhes (to them) - and unlike the direct set, lhe/lhes do not show gender:

  • Dou o livro ao João. -> Dou-lhe o livro. (I give him the book.)
  • Escrevi aos meus pais. -> Escrevi-lhes. (I wrote to them.)

Notice the useful overlap: me, te, nos, vos are the same whether direct or indirect. Only the third person forces you to choose - o/a/os/as (direct) versus lhe/lhes (indirect).

Stressed forms - after a preposition

After any preposition (a, de, para, por, com, em, sem, entre…) you cannot use a clitic. You use the stressed set:

mim, ti, si, ele/ela, nós, vós, eles/elas

  • Este café é para mim. (This coffee is for me.)
  • Não vou sem ti. (I’m not going without you.)
  • Falaram de nós. (They talked about us.)

si is the stressed form for the polite você / o senhor and for a reflexive “himself/herself/yourself”. Because si is ambiguous, EP speakers often prefer the explicit com o senhor, para você.

The preposition com (“with”) fuses with four of these into one word - learn them as fixed:

com + mim = comigo, com + ti = contigo, com + si = consigo, com + nós = connosco, com + vós = convosco.

For the rest, com stays separate: com ele, com ela, com eles, com elas.

Doubling for emphasis or clarity

Because lhe can mean “to him” or “to her”, and because you may want to stress who, EP often doubles the object - a stressed phrase alongside (or instead of) the clitic:

  • Deu-lhe o livro a ela. (He gave the book to her - the a ela disambiguates.)
  • A mim, ninguém me avisou. (Me, nobody warned - fronted for emphasis.)

Forms & patterns

Direct and indirect clitics side by side (only the 3rd person differs):

PersonDirect (complemento direto)Indirect (complemento indireto)
eumeme
tutete
você / ele / elao / alhe
nósnosnos
vocês / eles / elasos / aslhes

Stressed forms used after prepositions, and the com-fusions:

PersonAfter a prepositionWith com
eumimcomigo
tuticontigo
você / ele / elasi / ele / elaconsigo / com ele / com ela
nósnósconnosco
vocês / eles / elassi / eles / elasconsigo / com eles / com elas

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Conheces a Ana? Sim, conheço-a bem.Do you know Ana? Yes, I know her well.
Onde estão as chaves? Não as encontro.Where are the keys? I can’t find them.
Telefonei-lhe ontem, mas não atendeu.I phoned him/her yesterday, but they didn’t answer.
Os miúdos têm fome; vou fazer-lhes o jantar.The kids are hungry; I’ll make them dinner.
Muito prazer em conhecê-lo, senhor Costa.Very pleased to meet you, Mr Costa.
Este presente é para ti.This present is for you.
Queres vir connosco ao cinema?Do you want to come with us to the cinema?
Falou comigo durante uma hora.He talked to me for an hour.
A mim, ele nunca me diz nada.Me, he never tells me anything.
Comprei os bilhetes e dei-os ao Rui.I bought the tickets and gave them to Rui.

Common mistakes

  • Vejo ele -> Vejo-o - in European Portuguese a direct object is a clitic (o/a), not the subject pronoun ele/ela; “vejo ele” is Brazilian colloquial and sounds wrong in EP.
  • Dou-o um livro (meaning “I give him a book”) -> Dou-lhe um livro - the person you give to is the indirect object, so lhe, not o.
  • Escrevi-lhe meaning “I wrote to them” -> Escrevi-lhes - lhe is singular; the plural “to them” is lhes.
  • Comprei-o for “I bought them (as flores)” -> Comprei-as - the direct clitic must agree in gender and number with the noun it replaces.
  • Este café é para eu -> Este café é para mim - after a preposition use the stressed object form mim/ti, never the subject eu/tu.
  • Vem com mim -> Vem comigo - com fuses with these pronouns: comigo, contigo, consigo, connosco, convosco.
  • Falou com nós -> Falou connosco - same rule; note EP spells it with a double n (Brazilian: conosco).

Tips

  • Two quick questions pick the pronoun. Does the verb reach this object through the preposition “a”? If yes -> indirect (lhe/lhes). If it hits it directly -> direct (o/a/os/as). And is there a preposition right before the pronoun? If yes -> stressed (mim, ti, si…).
  • The direct set carries gender (o/a, os/as); the indirect set only number (lhe/lhes). That single contrast is 90% of the work at A2.
  • Learn the four fused forms as vocabulary: comigo, contigo, consigo, connosco (and formal-ish convosco). Learners who translate “with me” word for word produce com mim every time.
  • Reach for a doubled a ele / a ela whenever lhe would be ambiguous: Dei-lhe o recado a ela leaves no doubt it was to her.
  • To be polite to o senhor / a senhora, the direct object is still o/a (conhecê-lo, ajudá-la) and the indirect is lhe - the same third-person forms.
  • In Brazil the clitics behave very differently in practice: subject pronouns turn up as objects (vi ele), te mixes with você, and the clitic usually sits before the verb. Keep the European forms and, for placement, wait for the next lesson.

A2 30 / 55

Clitic placement: enclisis and proclisis

Colocação dos clíticos: ênclise e próclise

In short

You now have the unstressed object pronouns of Lesson 29 (me, te, o, a, lhe, nos, vos, os, as, lhes) and the reflexive se. The hard part in European Portuguese is not their forms - it is where they go, and EP is the strictest of all the Romance languages about this. There are two everyday positions (a third, mesoclisis, is Lesson 51). The default is enclisis: the pronoun sits after the verb, tied on with a hyphen - Dou-te o livro, Chamo-me Ana, Levantei-me cedo. But a specific list of words, when they come before the verb, drag the pronoun in front of it - proclisis, with no hyphen: Não te dou, Já me levantei, que te viu. Learn the default, then learn the trigger list, and you have the whole skill. And one iron rule frames everything: in European Portuguese a clause never begins with an unstressed pronoun.

The rule

Enclisis is the default

In a plain affirmative main clause with nothing special in front of the verb, the pronoun follows the verb and is joined by a hyphen:

  • Vejo-te amanhã. (“I’ll see you tomorrow.”)
  • Ela deu-me a chave. (“She gave me the key.”)
  • Sentámo-nos à janela. (“We sat down by the window.”)
  • O Pedro chama-se Pedro.

This is the position you fall back to whenever no trigger is present. Because a clause cannot start with a clitic, enclisis is in fact obligatory at the head of a sentence: you must say Chamo-me Ana, never Me chamo Ana (that front position is normal in Brazil, but ungrammatical in the European standard).

Proclisis: the attractors that pull the pronoun forward

Certain words, when they precede the verb in the same clause, attract the pronoun to the front. It then sits immediately before the verb with no hyphen. The high-frequency triggers, grouped:

  1. Negation - não, nunca, jamais, nada, ninguém, nem: Não te vejo. / Nunca me ligou. / Ninguém o sabe.
  2. Subordinating conjunctions (a subordinate clause) - que, porque, quando, se, como, embora, para que, logo que, enquanto: Sei que te viu. / Quando me chamou… / Fico se me pedires.
  3. Relative pronouns - que, quem, onde, o qual: O homem que me ajudou. / A casa onde nos conhecemos.
  4. Interrogative words (wh-questions) - quem, o que, quando, onde, porque, como, quanto: Quem te disse? / Onde os puseste? / Porque se riu?
  5. A short set of adverbs - já, ainda, sempre, também, só, talvez, apenas, bem, mal, lá: te disse. / Também o vi. / me resta esperar. / Talvez o faça.
  6. Quantifier / indefinite subjects - todos, alguém, ninguém, tudo, poucos, muitos, ambos, cada um: Todos me viram. / Alguém te chamou.

When two clauses join, each clause is judged on its own: Ela levantou-se (enclisis, nothing in front) e não me viu (proclisis, pulled by não).

Compound tenses: the clitic rides the auxiliary

With a ter + particípio compound tense, the pronoun attaches to the auxiliary (ter), never to the participle. The participle is an unchanging block:

  • Tinha-me visto. (“He had seen me.”) - not Tinha visto-me.
  • With a trigger: Não me tinha visto.

With an auxiliary + infinitive or gerund - the ir + infinitivo of Lesson 11, the estar a + infinitivo of Lesson 9, or querer / poder + infinitivo - the pronoun may attach to either verb, your choice:

  • Vou ligar-te. or Vou-te ligar. (“I’m going to call you.”)
  • Estou a fazê-lo. or Estou-o a fazer.
  • With a trigger, it goes to the front of the whole group: Não te vou ligar. / Ainda o estou a fazer.

This freedom - often called clitic climbing - is genuinely useful: when in doubt, hang the pronoun on the infinitive (vou ligar-te), which is always safe.

Other verb forms in one line

  • Affirmative imperative: enclisis (Diz-me, Senta-te) - Lesson 19. But a negative command has não, so proclisis: Não me digas.
  • Bare infinitive: normally enclisis (É melhor esperá-lo), switching to proclisis after não or another attractor (para não o perder).
  • Future and conditional: their own middle position, mesoclisis (dar-te-ei, dar-te-ia) - unless a trigger is present, which cancels it and gives plain proclisis (não te darei). This is Lesson 51.

A note on the spelling of the attached pronoun

When o, a, os, as attach after a verb, the pronoun and the verb ending often reshape each other - o becomes -lo after an -r/-s/-z, and -no after a nasal (vê-lo, dão-no). That mechanical spelling change is the whole of Lesson 31; here, just know the placement, and let Lesson 31 handle the surface form.

Forms & patterns

The two positions, minimal pairs:

Enclisis (default)Proclisis (attractor in front)
Vejo-te.Não te vejo.
Deu-me a chave.Quem me deu a chave?
Chamo-me Ana.Já me chamo assim há anos.
Levantou-se cedo.Ela disse que se levantou cedo.
Fá-lo agora.Só o faz agora.

The main proclisis triggers at a glance:

Trigger typeAttractorsExample
Negationnão, nunca, ninguém, nada, nemNunca me viu.
Subordinationque, porque, quando, se, emboraSei que te viu.
Relativeque, quem, onde, o qualO carro que me vendeu.
Wh-questionquem, onde, quando, porque, comoOnde os puseste?
Adverbsjá, ainda, sempre, também, só, talvezTambém o vi.
Quantifier subjecttodos, alguém, tudo, poucosTodos me viram.

Placement across verb forms:

Verb formDefault positionExample
simple tense, no triggerenclisisDeu-me.
any trigger presentproclisisNão me deu.
ter + particípioon the auxiliaryTinha-me dado.
aux + infinitiveeither verbVou dar-te / Vou-te dar.
affirmative imperativeenclisisDá-me.
future / conditional, no triggermesoclisis (L52)dar-me-á

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Chamo-me Rita e sento-me aqui.My name is Rita and I sit here.
Não me disseste nada!You didn’t tell me anything!
Sei que te conhece bem.I know he knows you well.
Quem te deu esta ideia?Who gave you this idea?
Já lhe escrevi ontem.I already wrote to him yesterday.
Ela tinha-se esquecido da chave.She had forgotten the key.
Vou-te ajudar. / Vou ajudar-te.I’m going to help you.
Todos o cumprimentaram.Everybody greeted him.
Talvez os encontre logo.Maybe I’ll find them later.
Levanta-te e veste-te!Get up and get dressed!

Common mistakes

  • Me chamo Ana. -> Chamo-me Ana. - a European clause cannot begin with an unstressed pronoun; with nothing in front, use enclisis. (Front placement here is the Brazilian norm.)
  • Não vejo-te. -> Não te vejo. - negation is the commonest attractor; it forces the pronoun before the verb, with no hyphen.
  • Sei que viu-me. / o homem que ajudou-me -> que me viu / que me ajudou - a conjunction or relative que opens a subordinate clause and pulls the pronoun forward.
  • Onde puseste-o? -> Onde o puseste? - a wh-question word is an attractor; the pronoun goes in front of the verb.
  • Tinha visto-me. -> Tinha-me visto. - in a ter + particípio compound the pronoun rides the auxiliary, never the participle.
  • Também vi-o. / Já disse-te. -> Também o vi. / Já te disse. - também, já, só, ainda, sempre are on the small adverb trigger list.
  • Ela deu-me e não viu-me. -> Ela deu-me e não me viu. - judge each clause separately; the second has não, so it takes proclisis.

Tips

  • Two-step decision: is there an attractor before the verb in this clause? No -> enclisis (after the verb, hyphen). Yes -> proclisis (before the verb, no hyphen). Everything else is detail.
  • Memorise the trigger families as one block: negation, subordination, relatives, wh-questions, the adverbs já/ainda/sempre/também/só/talvez, and quantifier subjects. If none is present, default to enclisis.
  • The unbreakable European rule: a clause never starts with a clitic. Whenever the verb is the first meaningful word, enclisis is not a choice, it is required.
  • In ter + particípio, attach to ter (tinha-me dito); in aux + infinitivo you may attach to either verb, so when unsure put it on the infinitive (vou dar-te) - always safe.
  • Treat each clause on its own after e, mas, porque: the trigger only reaches inside its own clause.
  • The reshaping of o/a into -lo/-no when it attaches after the verb is a separate, purely spelling matter - see Lesson 31; the future/conditional middle slot is Lesson 51.

B1 31 / 55

Clitic allomorphs: -lo/-la and -no/-na

As formas -lo, -la, -no e -na do pronome clítico

In short

Lesson 30 committed you to enclisis: in a plain affirmative clause the pronoun hangs after the verb, tied on with a hyphen. That is fine for me, te, se, lhe - they never change. But the direct-object clitics o, a, os, as are fussy about what sits in front of them. Attach one to a verb form ending in -r, -s or -z, and that consonant drops and the pronoun turns into -lo, -la, -los, -las: comprar + o -> comprá-lo, fez + o -> fê-lo. Attach one to a verb ending in a nasal sound (-am, -em, -ão, -õe), and the pronoun grows an n: -no, -na, -nos, -nas - compram + o -> compram-no, põe + a -> põe-na. This is not a new pronoun and not a new rule of placement - it is a spelling reshaping at the join, and once you see the two triggers you can produce it on the spot. It only ever happens in enclisis; the moment a proclisis trigger from Lesson 30 pulls the pronoun in front, the plain o/a comes straight back.

The rule

One trigger: the last sound of the verb

Before you attach o, a, os or as, look at how the verb form ends. That single fact decides the shape:

  • ends in -r, -s, -z -> the consonant drops, clitic becomes -lo / -la / -los / -las;
  • ends in a nasal (-m, or the nasal diphthongs -ão, -õe, -ãe) -> clitic becomes -no / -na / -nos / -nas;
  • ends in a plain vowel -> nothing changes, keep -o / -a / -os / -as (dá-o, vê-a).

The direct clitic still carries the gender and number of the noun it replaces, exactly as in Lesson 29 - only its outer shape is reshaped.

-lo/-la after -r, -s, -z

The final consonant of the verb is deleted and the clitic gains an l-. When the deletion leaves the verb ending in a stressed -a, -e or -o, that vowel takes a written accent (a stressed -i stays plain):

  • After -r (infinitives) - the workhorse case, because the pronoun so often lands on an infinitive (vou…, quero…, para…). An -ar stem takes an acute á, an -er stem a circumflex ê, an -ir stem keeps a plain stressed -i:
    • comprar + o -> comprá-lo, falar + as -> falá-las
    • comer + a -> comê-la, vender + os -> vendê-los, pôr + o -> pô-lo
    • abrir + a -> abri-la, conduzir + o -> conduzi-lo
  • After -s - most often a nós form in -mos, whose -s drops (the same drop you already make in sentámo-nos, Lesson 12): comprámos + os -> comprámo-los, fazemos + o -> fazemo-lo, pusemos + a -> pusemo-la.
  • After -z - a third-person or imperative form in -z: faz + o -> fá-lo, fez + o -> fê-lo, diz + a -> di-la, traz + os -> trá-los.

-no/-na after a nasal ending

Here the verb keeps its full spelling and it is the clitic that changes, gaining an n-. This is the easier of the two: add nothing to the verb, just start the pronoun with n:

  • 3rd person plural in -am / -em / -ão: compram + o -> compram-no, fazem + a -> fazem-na, dão + o -> dão-no, viram + a -> viram-na.
  • Singular forms ending in a nasal diphthong -ão / -õe / -ãe, or in -m: põe + a -> põe-na, tem + a -> tem-na, têm + o -> têm-no.

It only happens in enclisis

These allomorphs are purely a join effect. Nothing reshapes when the clitic is not glued to the end of the verb. So the instant a proclisis trigger from Lesson 30 appears - negation, a conjunction, a question word, an adverb like já / também / só - the pronoun jumps in front and reverts to the plain form:

  • fá-lo -> não o faz / quem o fez?
  • comprá-las -> as comprei / que as compres
  • compram-no -> nunca o compram

Forms & patterns

The two reshapings side by side:

Verb ends inThe join changes…o / a / os / as becomeExample
-r (infinitive)drop -r, accent the stem vowel-lo / -la / -los / -lascomer + a -> comê-la
-s (e.g. nós -mos)drop -s-lo / -la / -los / -lascomprámos + os -> comprámo-los
-z (3rd sg, imperative)drop -z, accent the stem vowel-lo / -la / -los / -lasfaz + o -> fá-lo
nasal (-m, -ão, -õe, -ãe)verb unchanged-no / -na / -nos / -naspõe + a -> põe-na
plain vowelnothing changes-o / -a / -os / -asdá + o -> dá-o

The infinitive accent, by conjugation (the pattern you will use most):

Infinitive+ oReads
comprar (-ar)comprá-loacute á
comer (-er)comê-locircumflex ê
abrir (-ir)abri-loplain -i, no accent
pôrpô-locircumflex ô kept

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Este livro é ótimo - tens de lê-lo.This book is great - you have to read it.
Não tenho troco para pagá-lo agora.I don’t have change to pay for it now.
A encomenda chegou; vou abri-la já.The parcel arrived; I’ll open it right now.
Onde puseste as chaves? Perdi-as? Não, encontrámo-las.Where did you put the keys? Did I lose them? No, we found them.
Ele prometeu o relatório e fê-lo a tempo.He promised the report and did it on time.
Fá-lo tu, que eu não consigo.You do it, because I can’t.
Eles compram-no todas as manhãs no quiosque.They buy it every morning at the kiosk.
A mãe pega no bebé e põe-na no berço.The mother picks up the baby and puts her in the crib.
Os miúdos viram o cão e chamaram-no.The kids saw the dog and called it.
Se precisas do carro, posso emprestá-lo.If you need the car, I can lend it.

Common mistakes

  • quero comer-o -> quero comê-lo - after an infinitive’s -r the pronoun is never plain -o; the -r drops and the clitic becomes -lo (with an accent on the stem, here ê).
  • vou fazer-lo -> vou fazê-lo - you cannot keep the -r and add -lo; the whole point is that the -r disappears (fazer -> fazê-lo).
  • comê-la written comela or come-lo -> comê-la - the reshaping is not optional and the stem accent is part of the spelling: -ar -> á, -er -> ê.
  • compram-o / dão-o -> compram-no / dão-no - after a nasal ending the clitic must take the -no/-na shape; plain -o after -m or -ão is wrong.
  • comprámos-los / comprámos-os -> comprámo-los - the -s of the nós ending drops first, then -los attaches: comprámo-los.
  • faz-o / fê-o -> fá-lo / fê-lo - a form ending in -z drops it and takes -lo; faz + o is fá-lo, fez + o is fê-lo.
  • não fá-lo / que compram-no -> não o faz / que o compram - the allomorphs live only in enclisis; once a trigger forces proclisis, the plain o/a returns in front of the verb.

Tips

  • Decide the shape from the verb’s last sound before you attach: -r/-s/-z -> -lo; nasal (-m/-ão/-õe) -> -no; plain vowel -> plain -o. That one check settles every case.
  • The -lo side does two things at once - drop the consonant and (for -ar/-er infinitives) accent the stem vowel: falá-lo, vendê-lo. The -ir verbs are gentler: just a plain -i, as in abri-lo.
  • The -no side is the easy one: change nothing on the verb, simply start the pronoun with n-. If the verb ends in -m or a nasal -ão/-õe, reach for -no/-na.
  • Say the result as a single word - co-mê-lo, com-pram-no - and you will hear why the reshaping exists: it just makes the join pronounceable. It is spelling following sound, not a rule to memorise cold.
  • When you are unsure, remember you can always dodge: rephrase with a proclisis trigger (não o compro) or repeat the noun (compro o pão), and the plain o/a comes back untouched.
  • In Brazil: these enclitic -lo/-no forms survive in careful writing but are rare in speech - Brazilians lean on proclisis or simply drop the third-person object (vou comprar, já comprei), so comprá-lo and compram-no sound markedly formal there.

B1 32 / 55

Future and conditional

Futuro simples e condicional do indicativo

In short

Portuguese has two tenses built by bolting endings onto the whole infinitive: the futuro simples (falarei - “I will speak”) and the condicional (falaria - “I would speak”). In real speech the synthetic future is less about plans - those go to ir + infinitivo from Lesson 11 - and more about prediction and guesswork (Serão dez horas - “It must be ten”), while the conditional is your politeness and “would” gear (Gostaria de…). Both are wonderfully regular: only dizer, fazer and trazer are irregular, and even those three share one short stem across both tenses.

The rule

Building the futuro simples

Take the full infinitive and add one set of endings - the same endings for all three conjugations (-ar, -er, -ir):

-ei, -ás, -á, -emos, -ão

So falar gives falarei, falarás, falará, falaremos, falarão; comer gives comerei…; partir gives partirei…. Notice the written accents: the tu, ele and eles forms carry them (-ás, -á, -ão), and they are obligatory - the accent is the only thing separating falará (“he will speak”) from other forms.

What the future is really for

Everyday plans in European Portuguese use the near future ir + infinitivo (Vou telefonar-te logo), not the synthetic future. Keep falarei for three jobs:

  • Prediction and formal statements, mostly in writing: O comboio partirá às oito. - “The train will leave at eight.”
  • Promises and firm intentions: Farei tudo o que puder. - “I’ll do everything I can.”
  • Conjecture about the present - a guess dressed as a future. This is where the synthetic future shines in speech: Onde está o João? - Estará no escritório. (“Where’s João? - He’s probably at the office.”); Terá uns quarenta anos. (“He must be about forty.”).

Building the condicional

Same recipe: the whole infinitive plus a single set of endings for all conjugations:

-ia, -ias, -ia, -íamos, -iam

falar gives falaria, falarias, falaria, falaríamos, falariam. Only the nós form takes a written accent (-íamos). Because the eu and ele endings are identical (-ia), context or a stated pronoun tells them apart.

What the conditional is for

  • Politeness - softening a request or a wish: Gostaria de reservar uma mesa.; Poderia ajudar-me?; Seria possível…?
  • “Would” from a past viewpoint (future-in-the-past): Ela disse que voltaria mais tarde. - “She said she would come back later.”
  • Conjecture about the past: Seriam três horas quando ele chegou. - “It must have been about three when he arrived.”

The full “if… then…” pattern (se + imperfect subjunctive -> conditional) needs a tense you meet later, so this lesson stays with the uses above.

The three irregular verbs

Only dizer, fazer and trazer (and compounds like desfazer, predizer) are irregular. They drop to a short stem, identical in both tenses:

  • dizer -> dir-: direi… / diria…
  • fazer -> far-: farei… / faria…
  • trazer -> trar-: trarei… / traria…

A note on pronoun placement

When an object pronoun (Lesson 29) attaches to a future or conditional with no proclisis trigger, EP writing tucks it inside the verb: dar-lhe-ei (“I will give him”), dir-te-ia (“I would tell you”). That inside placement is mesoclisis, saved for Lesson 51. After a trigger such as não, it is ordinary proclisis: não te direi.

Forms & patterns

Futuro simples - the one ending set on the whole infinitive:

falarcomerpartir
eufalareicomereipartirei
tufalaráscomeráspartirás
ele / vocêfalarácomerápartirá
nósfalaremoscomeremospartiremos
eles / vocêsfalarãocomerãopartirão

Condicional - same method, different endings:

falarcomerpartir
eufalariacomeriapartiria
tufalariascomeriaspartirias
ele / vocêfalariacomeriapartiria
nósfalaríamoscomeríamospartiríamos
eles / vocêsfalariamcomeriampartiriam

The only irregular stems (both tenses):

VerbStemFuture (eu)Conditional (eu)
dizerdir-direidiria
fazerfar-fareifaria
trazertrar-trareitraria

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Amanhã choverá em todo o país.Tomorrow it will rain across the whole country.
Farei os possíveis para chegar a horas.I’ll do my best to arrive on time.
Não sei onde ele está; estará no trabalho.I don’t know where he is; he’s probably at work.
Que horas são? Serão umas dez.What time is it? It must be around ten.
Gostaria de reservar uma mesa para dois.I would like to book a table for two.
Poderia repetir, por favor?Could you repeat that, please?
Ela disse que voltaria mais tarde.She said she would come back later.
Nós partiríamos já, mas está a chover.We would leave right now, but it’s raining.
Teria uns cinquenta anos na altura.He must have been about fifty at the time.
Direi tudo o que sei.I will tell everything I know.

Common mistakes

  • Vou comprarei o bilhete. -> Comprarei o bilhete. (or Vou comprar…) - choose one future, the near future ir + infinitivo or the synthetic form; never stack the two.
  • dizerei, fazerei, trazerei -> direi, farei, trarei - only dizer, fazer, trazer are irregular, and they cut to the short stems dir-, far-, trar-.
  • falara muito, comerao logo -> falará muito, comerão logo - the future accents are obligatory; unaccented falara is even a different, older past-tense form, so dropping the accent changes the word.
  • Ela disse que chegará tarde. -> Ela disse que chegaria tarde. - after a past main verb, “would” is the conditional (chegaria), not the future.
  • Te direi a verdade. -> Dir-te-ei a verdade. - with no proclisis trigger, the pronoun goes inside the future/conditional (mesoclisis, Lesson 51), not loose before it.
  • Poderias me ajudar? -> Poderias ajudar-me? - in neutral EP the pronoun follows the verb (enclisis); placing me before it without a trigger is Brazilian.

Tips

  • Reach for ir + infinitivo for plans in speech (Vou telefonar-lhe); save the synthetic future for writing and for conjecture - Serão nove horas (“It must be nine o’clock”) is where it truly earns its place out loud.
  • The conditional is the polite gear: Gostaria de…, Poderia…, Seria melhor… soften almost anything into good manners.
  • Even more colloquially, EP swaps the polite conditional for the imperfeito do indicativo (Lesson 22): in a cafe you will hear Queria um café and Gostava de ir far more than Quereria / Gostaria. Both are correct; the imperfeito just sounds warmer and more spoken.
  • Build both tenses the same lazy way: keep the whole infinitive and add the future endings (-ei, -ás, -á, -emos, -ão) or the conditional endings (-ia, -ias, -ia, -íamos, -iam). Memorize the accents, then the only exceptions left are dizer, fazer, trazer.
  • Use the conditional for “would / was going to” seen from the past: Eu sabia que eles não chegariam a tempo (“I knew they wouldn’t arrive in time”).
  • In Brazil: mesoclisis (dir-te-ei) is felt as bookish and avoided; a pronoun with the future or conditional is simply placed before the verb (te direi, te diria), whereas neutral EP writing keeps it inside.

B1 33 / 55

Present subjunctive: forms, and the negative and formal imperative

Presente do conjuntivo: formação e o imperativo negativo e formal

In short

The present subjunctive (presente do conjuntivo) is the mood Portuguese uses for wishes, doubts, and things that are wanted rather than stated as fact - you will drill where it is required in the next lesson. This lesson teaches you to build it, and it is mechanical: take the eu-form of the present indicative (Lessons 6-8), drop the -o, and add the “opposite” set of endings. Learn it once and you get two more tools for free, because the negative imperative (não fales) and the formal / plural imperative (fale, falem) are simply the subjunctive in disguise. So a single paradigm powers your commands, your requests, and every subjunctive you will meet from here on.

The rule

Building it from the eu-form

The recipe never changes:

  1. Take the 1st-person singular of the present indicative - the eu form.
  2. Drop the final -o.
  3. Add the endings that “swap conjugation”: -ar verbs take e-endings, -er / -ir verbs take a-endings.
  • falar -> falo -> fal- -> fale, fales, fale, falemos, faleis, falem.
  • comer -> como -> com- -> coma, comas, coma, comamos, comais, comam.
  • partir -> parto -> part- -> parta, partas, parta, partamos, partais, partam.

The huge payoff of the eu-form rule: any irregularity in the eu-form is carried straight into the subjunctive. If you know tenho, faço, digo, posso, venho, ponho, vejo, trago, saio, ouço, peço, perco, you already know the subjunctive stems:

Verbeu-formSubjunctive (eu)
tertenhotenha
fazerfaçofaça
dizerdigodiga
poderpossopossa
virvenhovenha
pôrponhoponha
vervejoveja
trazertragotraga
pedirpeçopeça
ouvirouçoouça

Spelling changes that protect the sound

When the swapped ending would change how the stem sounds, the spelling adjusts to keep the original consonant sound (recall the hard/soft spelling reflexes from the reading & pronunciation guide):

  • -car -> -que: ficar -> fique, tocar -> toque.
  • -gar -> -gue: chegar -> chegue, pagar -> pague.
  • -çar -> -ce: começar -> comece, almoçar -> almoce.
  • -cer -> -ça: conhecer -> conheça, parecer -> pareça.
  • -ger / -gir -> -ja: proteger -> proteja, dirigir -> dirija.
  • -guir -> -ga: seguir -> siga, conseguir -> consiga.

These are not new irregulars - the sound is identical, only the letter changes to hold it.

The genuinely irregular subjunctives

A short list does not come from the eu-form and must be memorised. There are only seven common ones:

VerbPresent subjunctive
serseja, sejas, seja, sejamos, sejais, sejam
estaresteja, estejas, esteja, estejamos, estejais, estejam
irvá, vás, vá, vamos, vades, vão
haverhaja
sabersaiba
dardê, dês, dê, demos, deis, deem
quererqueira, queiras, queira, queiramos, queirais, queiram

The negative and formal imperative come from the subjunctive

Here is why this lesson bundles the imperative. In Lesson 19 you learned the affirmative tu command, which is special (fala!, come!, parte!). Everything else in the command system is just the present subjunctive:

  • Negative commands, all persons: não fales (tu), não fale (você), não falem (vocês). Even tu, whose affirmative is irregular, uses the subjunctive when negated.
  • Affirmative commands to você / o senhor / vocês, and “let’s”: (o senhor) fale, (vocês) falem, (nós) falemos (“let’s speak”).

So the only command form that is not the subjunctive is the bare affirmative tu (and the archaic vós falai). Learn the subjunctive and your polite requests, your prohibitions, and your “let’s…” are all done.

Forms & patterns

Regular present subjunctive endings:

-ar (falar)-er (comer)-ir (partir)
eufalecomaparta
tufalescomaspartas
você / ele / elafalecomaparta
nósfalemoscomamospartamos
vocês / elesfalemcomampartam

The command system for falar, showing where the subjunctive takes over:

PersonAffirmativeNegative
tufala (special, Lesson 19)não fales (subjunctive)
você / o senhorfale (subjunctive)não fale (subjunctive)
nósfalemos (subjunctive)não falemos (subjunctive)
vocêsfalem (subjunctive)não falem (subjunctive)

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Espero que tenhas razão.I hope you are right.
Talvez ele venha amanhã.Maybe he will come tomorrow.
Não fales tão alto.Do not talk so loudly.
Por favor, feche a porta.Please close the door. (formal)
Comecemos pelo princípio.Let’s start from the beginning.
Não cheguem atrasados.Do not arrive late. (to a group)
É possível que haja greve.It is possible there is a strike.
Quero que sejas feliz.I want you to be happy.
Siga em frente e vire à direita.Go straight on and turn right. (formal)
Não percas a esperança.Do not lose hope.

Common mistakes

  • Building the subjunctive from the infinitive stem -> build it from the eu-form: ter gives tenho -> tenha, never ter- -> teia.
  • ficar -> fice -> fique - keep the hard k sound: -car -> -que, -gar -> -gue, -çar -> -ce.
  • não fala tão alto -> não fales tão alto - the negative tu command uses the subjunctive, even though the affirmative tu (fala!) does not.
  • Using the indicative for a polite command: Fecha a porta to a stranger -> Feche a porta - the você / o senhor command is the subjunctive.
  • que ele vai after espero que -> que ele vá - ir has a fully irregular subjunctive (vá, vás, vá…); do not reuse the indicative.
  • sejamos, sejais, sejam misapplied to estar -> esteja, estejamos, estejam - ser and estar have separate irregular subjunctives; keep them apart.
  • written de -> - the dar subjunctive carries a circumflex to mark the closed vowel and separate it from the preposition de.

Tips

  • Chant the recipe: “eu-form, drop the -o, swap the vowel.” It converts almost every verb, regular or irregular, in one step.
  • The spelling changes (-que, -gue, -ce, -ça, -ja, -ga) are sound-preservers, not exceptions - say the word aloud and you will hear that nothing changed.
  • Memorise the seven true irregulars as a block: seja, esteja, vá, haja, saiba, dê, queira - they cover a huge share of real speech.
  • Think of the imperative as “subjunctive minus tu-affirmative”: once the subjunctive is automatic, every prohibition (não faças) and every polite command (faça, façam) falls out for free.
  • The nós subjunctive doubles as “let’s…”: Vamos! aside, façamos, comecemos, saiamos all mean “let’s do / start / leave”.
  • In Brazil, because você is the default “you”, the everyday command is usually this subjunctive form (fala heard in speech is colloquial); the European tu affirmative (fala! vs não fales) split is sharper in EP - see Lesson 10.

B1 34 / 55

Present subjunctive: uses

Presente do conjuntivo: usos

In short

In Lesson 33 you learned to build the present subjunctive; now you learn when it is required. The core idea: the subjunctive lives in the subordinate clause after que, and it is triggered by what the main clause does. When the main clause states a fact, you keep the indicative (Sei que ele vem, “I know he is coming”). When the main clause expresses a wish, an emotion, an attempt to influence someone, or wraps the idea in an impersonal judgement, the que clause flips to the subjunctive (Quero que ele venha, “I want him to come”). Two conditions must hold together: there is a que clause, and the two clauses have different subjects. Same subject, and Portuguese uses a plain infinitive instead - a distinction English does not force you to make, so it is the thing to watch.

The rule

Think of four trigger families in the main clause. If the verb or expression before que belongs to one of them, the verb after que is subjunctive.

1. Wish and hope (volition)

Verbs of wanting, hoping, and preferring: querer, desejar, esperar, preferir, gostar (que), and the wish-word oxalá (“I hope / God willing”, which takes the subjunctive with no que).

  • Quero que fiques aqui. - I want you to stay here.
  • Espero que corra tudo bem. - I hope everything goes well.
  • Oxalá faça sol amanhã. - I hope it is sunny tomorrow.

2. Emotion and reaction

Any main clause that reacts emotionally to the que clause: gostar que, adorar que, ter pena que, ter medo que, recear que, alegrar-se de que, surpreender que, ser bom / mau que.

  • Tenho pena que não possas vir. - I am sorry you cannot come.
  • Alegra-me que estejas melhor. - I am glad you are better.
  • Surpreende-me que ele já saiba a verdade. - I am surprised he already knows the truth.

3. Influence: ordering, asking, allowing, forbidding

Verbs that push another subject to act: pedir, dizer (= tell to), mandar, ordenar, exigir, aconselhar, sugerir, permitir, deixar, proibir, impedir, evitar.

  • Peço-te que tenhas paciência. - I ask you to be patient.
  • O médico aconselha que bebas mais água. - The doctor advises you to drink more water.
  • Não permitem que fumemos aqui. - They do not allow us to smoke here.

Note dizer: Digo que ele vem = “I say (report) that he is coming” (indicative, a fact); Digo-lhe que venha = “I tell him to come” (subjunctive, an order).

4. Impersonal expressions of judgement, need and possibility

The frame É + adjective/noun + que… when it delivers a value judgement, necessity, doubt or possibility rather than a plain fact: é importante, é preciso, é necessário, é bom, é melhor, é pena, é possível, é provável, pode ser, convém, basta.

  • É importante que chegues a horas. - It is important that you arrive on time.
  • É preciso que façamos algo. - We need to do something.
  • Talvez ele esteja cansado. - Maybe he is tired.

The odd ones out are impersonals of certainty: é verdade que, é evidente que, é óbvio que, é claro que assert a fact and therefore keep the indicative (É óbvio que ele está cansado*). That indicative-vs-subjunctive contrast is the whole of Lesson 35.

The different-subject condition (the key filter)

A trigger only forces the subjunctive when the two clauses have different subjects. If the subject is the same, drop que and use the infinitive (personal infinitive when needed, Lesson 37):

  • Different subjects -> subjunctive: Quero que (tu) saias. - I want you to leave.
  • Same subject -> infinitive: Quero sair. - I want to leave (myself).
  • Different subjects -> subjunctive: É melhor que (vocês) esperem. - It is better that you wait.
  • Impersonal, no named subject -> infinitive: É melhor esperar. - It is better to wait.

Forms & patterns

The machine has three slots: a trigger, the linker que, and a subjunctive verb.

Trigger familyTypical main-clause verbSentence frame
Wish / hopequero, espero, prefiro, oxaláQuero que tu [subj]
Emotiontenho pena, alegra-me, tenho medoTenho medo que ele [subj]
Influencepeço, mando, aconselho, deixo, proíboPeço-te que tu [subj]
Impersonal judgementé importante, é preciso, é possível, talvezÉ preciso que nós [subj]

Same subject cancels the trigger and selects the infinitive:

SubjectsStructureExample
Differenttrigger + que + subjunctiveEspero que venhas
Sametrigger + infinitive (no que)Espero vir
Impersonal (no subject)é + adj + infinitiveÉ bom descansar

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Espero que tenhas um bom dia.I hope you have a good day.
Quero que me digas a verdade.I want you to tell me the truth.
Tenho pena que ele não esteja cá.I am sorry he is not here.
É importante que estudes todos os dias.It is important that you study every day.
Peço-lhe que feche a porta, por favor.I ask you to close the door, please.
Talvez haja boleia para a estação.Maybe there is a lift to the station.
Prefiro que apanhemos o comboio das oito.I prefer that we take the eight o’clock train.
Oxalá corra tudo bem no exame.I hope everything goes well in the exam.
Não deixam que as crianças saiam sozinhas.They do not let the children go out alone.
É pena que percas esta oportunidade.It is a pity that you are missing this chance.

Common mistakes

  • Quero que tu vens -> Quero que tu venhas - a wish verb forces the subjunctive in the que clause; never the indicative.
  • Quero que eu saia -> Quero sair - same subject means no que and a plain infinitive; the subjunctive is only for a different subject.
  • Espero que ele é feliz -> Espero que ele seja feliz - esperar (hope) triggers the subjunctive; do not slip back to é.
  • É importante que estudar -> É importante estudar (general) or É importante que estudes (specific person) - que must be followed by a conjugated subjunctive, never an infinitive.
  • Peço que tu tens paciência -> Peço que tenhas paciência - influence verbs (pedir, mandar, aconselhar) take the subjunctive.
  • Talvez ele vem -> Talvez ele venha - talvez (“maybe”) signals possibility and requires the subjunctive when it precedes the verb.
  • É óbvio que ele venha -> É óbvio que ele vem - impersonals of certainty (é óbvio, é verdade) keep the indicative; only judgement/doubt impersonals trigger the subjunctive.

Tips

  • Learn the trigger, not the verb form. Ask “does the main clause wish, feel, push, or judge?” If yes, the que clause is subjunctive; if it merely reports a fact (sei que, vejo que, é verdade que), it is indicative.
  • The reliable filter is two different subjects + que. Miss either and you do not use the subjunctive: same subject -> infinitive, no que -> no subjunctive.
  • Espero que is your highest-frequency trigger in real speech (espero que sim, espero que gostes) - drill it until que + subjunctive is automatic.
  • Watch dizer and pedir: reporting a fact is indicative (disse que vinha), but telling someone to do something is subjunctive (disse-lhe que viesse).
  • Oxalá and clause-initial talvez take the subjunctive without any que - treat them as one-word triggers.
  • In Brazil the trigger rules are identical, but colloquial speech often drops the subjunctive after talvez (talvez ele vem); in careful EP the subjunctive is expected - keep it.

B1 35 / 55

Indicative vs subjunctive: opinion, doubt and certainty

Indicativo e conjuntivo: opinião, dúvida e certeza

In short

You can now build the present subjunctive (Lesson 33) and you have met its uses (Lesson 34). This lesson sharpens the single decision that trips up English speakers most: after que, do I use the indicative or the subjunctive? The rule is about stance, not vocabulary. If the main clause asserts something as fact or as a firmly held opinion, the que-clause stays indicative: acho que ela tem razão (“I think she is right”). If the main clause casts the fact in doubt, denies it, or merely floats it as possible, the que-clause turns subjunctive: não acho que ela tenha razão, é possível que ela tenha razão. Watch the flip: acho que takes the indicative, but negate it to não acho que and the doubt it now carries pulls in the subjunctive. Three high-frequency triggers to lock in today: talvez (“maybe”), é possível que (“it is possible that”) and duvido que (“I doubt that”) are all subjunctive, while é verdade que (“it is true that”) stays indicative.

The rule

Certainty and assertion keep the indicative

When the speaker presents the content as real - a known fact or an opinion put forward as true - Portuguese uses the indicative, exactly as English keeps a plain statement:

  • Fact / certainty: sei que, é verdade que, é certo que, é óbvio que, tenho a certeza de que.
  • Opinion asserted as true: acho que, penso que, creio que, parece-me que.

Tenho a certeza de que o comboio parte às nove. (“I’m sure the train leaves at nine.”) The speaker is committing to it, so the verb is indicative.

Doubt, denial and possibility take the subjunctive

When the main clause weakens the truth of the que-clause - doubting it, denying it, or presenting it as only one possibility - the subjunctive appears:

  • Doubt: duvido que.
  • Denial: não é verdade que, nego que, não é que.
  • Possibility / probability: é possível que, é provável que, pode ser que, talvez.

É possível que o comboio esteja atrasado. The lateness is not asserted, only entertained, so estar goes subjunctive (esteja).

Negation is the switch

This is the pattern to internalise. A verb of opinion is indicative when affirmative but flips to subjunctive when negated, because negating “I think…” turns an assertion into a doubt:

  • Acho que ele vem. -> Não acho que ele venha.
  • Penso que ela sabe. -> Não penso que ela saiba.

Questions usually keep the indicative, because a question does not itself deny anything: Achas que ele vem? (“Do you think he’s coming?“).

talvez and where “maybe” sits

talvez means “maybe” and normally stands before the verb, where it demands the subjunctive: Talvez chova amanhã (“Maybe it will rain tomorrow”). Because talvez is one of the adverbs that pull clitic pronouns in front of the verb (Lesson 30), you say Talvez te ligue logo (“Maybe I’ll call you later”), not liga-te. Only when talvez comes after the verb does the indicative return (Chove, talvez), which is rarer and more literary.

é verdade que vs é possível que

The neat minimal pair to remember the whole lesson by: same subject, same verb, opposite mood, driven only by whether the frame asserts or merely allows.

Forms & patterns

Which mood the que-clause takes, by the stance of the main clause:

Main clauseStanceMood after que
sei que, é verdade que, é certo que, é óbvio quecertainty / factindicative
acho que, penso que, creio que, parece-me queopinion assertedindicative
não acho que, não penso que, não creio queopinion deniedsubjunctive
duvido que, não é verdade que, nego quedoubt / denialsubjunctive
é possível que, é provável que, pode ser quepossibilitysubjunctive
talvez (before the verb)maybesubjunctive

The minimal pair, one verb (estar), two frames:

FramePortugueseMood
É verdade que …É verdade que ele está em casa.indicative (está)
É possível que …É possível que ele esteja em casa.subjunctive (esteja)

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Acho que ela tem razão.I think she is right.
Não acho que ela tenha razão.I don’t think she is right.
É verdade que o comboio está atrasado.It is true that the train is late.
É possível que o comboio esteja atrasado.It is possible the train is late.
Duvido que eles cheguem a horas.I doubt they will arrive on time.
Talvez chova amanhã.Maybe it will rain tomorrow.
Tenho a certeza de que ele sabe a resposta.I’m sure he knows the answer.
É provável que haja greve na segunda.It is likely there will be a strike on Monday.
Penso que este autocarro passa aqui.I think this bus stops here.
Não é verdade que ela more em Lisboa.It is not true that she lives in Lisbon.

Common mistakes

  • Não acho que ela tem razão -> Não acho que ela tenha razão - negating an opinion verb turns it into a doubt, so the que-clause goes subjunctive.
  • Talvez ela vem -> Talvez ela venha - talvez placed before the verb always requires the subjunctive.
  • É possível que ele está doente -> É possível que ele esteja doente - possibility is not fact, so use the subjunctive.
  • Duvido que tu tens tempo -> Duvido que tu tenhas tempo - duvidar expresses doubt and takes the subjunctive.
  • É verdade que ele seja rico -> É verdade que ele é rico - a stated fact keeps the indicative; do not over-apply the subjunctive.
  • Acho que ela tenha razão -> Acho que ela tem razão - an affirmative opinion asserts something, so it stays indicative.
  • Talvez ligo-te logo -> Talvez te ligue logo - after talvez the clitic goes before the verb and the verb is subjunctive.

Tips

  • Before you choose, ask one question: am I stating this as true, or flagging it as uncertain? True -> indicative; doubted, denied or merely possible -> subjunctive.
  • Learn the certainty triggers as an indicative block: sei que, é verdade que, é certo que, é óbvio que, tenho a certeza de que, plus acho / penso / creio que while affirmative.
  • Learn the doubt-and-possibility triggers as a subjunctive block: duvido que, talvez, é possível / provável que, pode ser que, não acho que, não é verdade que.
  • Remember that negation is the switch: acho que (indicative) becomes não acho que (subjunctive), while a plain question keeps the indicative - Achas que ele vem?
  • Anchor the whole rule on the pair é verdade que ele está vs é possível que ele esteja: same words, mood decided only by assert-vs-allow.
  • In Brazil: the same logic holds, but casual speech often relaxes the flip after negation (you will hear não acho que ela tem); in careful European Portuguese keep the subjunctive - não acho que ela tenha.

B1 36 / 55

Subordination with the subjunctive, and the future subjunctive

Subordinação com o conjuntivo e o futuro do conjuntivo

In short

Lesson 35 sorted subjunctive from indicative inside that-clauses. This lesson does the same for other conjunctions. Two groups matter. First, a fixed set of connectors - para que, embora, caso, a menos que and friends - always drag a subjunctive behind them, whatever the main verb says: the conjunction alone is the trigger. Second, the time-and-condition words quando, se and logo que, when they point at the future, take a tense English does not have: the future subjunctive (futuro do conjuntivo). Quando chegares, telefono-te - “When you arrive, I’ll call you.” Portuguese marks the still-unreal future event; English just uses the present. Get these two reflexes right and your subordinate clauses stop leaking indicatives.

The rule

Group 1: conjunctions that always take the subjunctive

Some conjunctions carry a built-in note of purpose, concession, or unreal condition, so the verb after them is always subjunctive - you do not weigh the sentence, you react to the word. The core B1 set:

  • para que / a fim de que - “so that, in order that” (purpose): Explico devagar para que todos percebam.
  • embora / ainda que / mesmo que - “although, even though / even if” (concession): Embora esteja cansado, vou sair.
  • caso - “in case, if” (hypothesis): Caso precises de mim, liga.
  • a menos que / a não ser que - “unless”: Não vou, a menos que tu venhas também.
  • sem que - “without (someone doing)”: Ele saiu sem que ninguém o visse.
  • antes que - “before” (something not yet real): Fecha a janela antes que chova.

Use the present subjunctive of Lesson 33 for present or future reference. (When the whole sentence is in the past, these same conjunctions take the imperfect subjunctive - Lesson 46 - but the trigger is identical.)

Group 2: quando, se, logo que and the future subjunctive

The temporal and conditional connectors behave differently. quando (when), se (if), logo que / assim que (as soon as), enquanto (while) and sempre que (whenever) look forward to an event that has not happened yet. Portuguese refuses to call an unrealised future event a fact, so it uses the future subjunctive:

  • Quando chegares a casa, telefona-me. - When you get home, call me.
  • Se tiveres tempo, ajuda-me. - If you have time, help me.
  • Logo que souberes, avisa-me. - As soon as you know, let me know.

Notice the English uses the plain present each time (“arrive, have, know”), which is exactly why learners drop into the Portuguese present indicative here. Resist it: after these words, a future event is future subjunctive.

The flip side: when quando or se points at a habit or general fact, there is no unrealised future, so the indicative returns. Quando chego a casa, janto (“When I get home, I have dinner” - every day) vs Quando chegar a casa, janto (“When I get home, I’ll have dinner” - today).

Building the future subjunctive

One rule handles every verb, regular or irregular:

  1. Take the 3rd-person plural of the pretérito perfeito (the eles past form of Lessons 20-22) - e.g. falaram, comeram, tiveram, fizeram.
  2. Drop the -am.
  3. Add: -, -es, -, -mos, -des, -em.
  • falar -> falaram -> falar, falares, falar, falarmos, falardes, falarem.

Because the eu and ele forms take no ending, a regular future subjunctive is spelled the same as the personal infinitive (Lesson 37). The two split apart only in irregular verbs, where the past stem shows: ter -> tiver (future subj.) but ter (personal infinitive).

Which tense goes in the main clause

After a future-subjunctive clause the main clause is not subjunctive. It is whatever fits: present indicative with future sense (telefono-te), future (telefonar-te-ei), or an imperative (telefona-me). Only the subordinate verb carries the future subjunctive.

Forms & patterns

Group-1 conjunctions and what each contributes:

ConjunctionMeaningForce
para que, a fim de queso that, in order thatpurpose
embora, ainda que, mesmo quealthough, even though / even ifconcession
casoin case, ifhypothesis
a menos que, a não ser queunlessnegative condition
sem quewithout (someone -ing)exclusion
antes quebefore (something unreal)anteriority

Future subjunctive endings (added to the past eles-stem):

-ar (falar)-er (comer)-ir (partir)
eufalarcomerpartir
tufalarescomerespartires
você / ele / elafalarcomerpartir
nósfalarmoscomermospartirmos
vocês / elesfalaremcomerempartirem

Common irregular future subjunctives (from the past stem - eu-form shown):

VerbPretérito (eles)Future subjunctive (eu / se-eu)
ser / irforamfor
tertiveramtiver
estarestiveramestiver
fazerfizeramfizer
dizerdisseramdisser
poderpuderampuder
quererquiseramquiser
sabersouberamsouber
pôrpuserampuser
virvieramvier
trazertrouxeramtrouxer
darderamder

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Telefono-te quando chegares.I’ll call you when you arrive.
Se quiseres, vamos ao cinema.If you want, we’ll go to the cinema.
Logo que souberes o resultado, diz-me.As soon as you know the result, tell me.
Deixo a chave para que possas entrar.I’ll leave the key so that you can get in.
Embora chova, vamos dar um passeio.Even though it’s raining, we’ll go for a walk.
Caso percas o comboio, apanha o autocarro.In case you miss the train, take the bus.
Não saio a menos que o tempo melhore.I won’t go out unless the weather improves.
Vou-me embora antes que eles cheguem.I’m leaving before they arrive.
Enquanto estiveres doente, descansa.While you’re ill, rest.
Faço-o sempre que for preciso.I’ll do it whenever it’s necessary.

Common mistakes

  • Quando chegas, telefono-te -> Quando chegares, telefono-te - a future quando takes the future subjunctive, even though English says the plain “arrive”.
  • Se tens tempo, ajuda-me (for a future request) -> Se tiveres tempo, ajuda-me - open future se is future subjunctive, not present indicative.
  • para que podes entrar -> para que possas entrar - para que is a Group-1 trigger and always takes the subjunctive, never the indicative.
  • embora está cansado -> embora esteja cansado - concessive embora governs the subjunctive; the estar indicative está is wrong here.
  • Building the future subjunctive from the infinitive: se fazer -> se fizer, se ter -> se tiver - take the past eles-stem (fizeram, tiveram), not the infinitive.
  • a menos que vens -> a menos que venhas - a menos que (“unless”) is a fixed subjunctive trigger; here present subjunctive, or future subjunctive if clearly future.
  • Quando eu for grande written Quando eu ser grande -> Quando for - ser and ir share the future subjunctive for, not the infinitive ser.

Tips

  • Split the connectors into two piles: always-subjunctive (para que, embora, caso, a menos que, sem que, antes que) and future-subjunctive-when-future (quando, se, logo que, enquanto, sempre que). The first pile you obey; the second you check the time.
  • To generate any future subjunctive, whisper the eles past form first: “eles fizeram -> se eu fizer.”
  • Regular future subjunctive = personal infinitive spelled the same; they diverge only in irregulars (fizer vs fazer). If a verb is regular, you effectively get Lesson 37 for free.
  • English hides the future subjunctive behind a present tense (“if you have”, “when you arrive”). Train yourself to feel the future meaning under the English present and switch tenses.
  • Do not double up: the main clause after quando/se is present, future, or imperative indicative - never a second subjunctive.
  • In Brazil, the future subjunctive is used identically (Quando você chegar, me liga), but the everyday address is você and the pronoun goes before the verb (me liga); European Portuguese prefers tu and telefona-me.

B1 37 / 55

Personal infinitive

Infinitivo pessoal

In short

Portuguese has something almost no other language offers: an infinitive that carries a subject ending. Alongside the plain falar (“to speak”) sits falarmos (“for us to speak”), falarem (“for them to speak”). This infinitivo pessoal lets you keep a clear, explicit subject inside a non-finite clause, so you can say para eu saber (“so that I know”) or ao chegarmos (“on our arriving”) without building a full que-clause with a conjugated verb. Two pieces of good news: the endings are always the same, and the personal infinitive is always regular - even ser, ter and pôr follow the pattern - so there is nothing irregular to memorise.

The rule

What it is and how you build it

Start from the ordinary (impersonal) infinitive and add these personal endings:

  • eu: - (nothing)
  • tu: -es
  • ele / ela / você: - (nothing)
  • nós: -mos
  • vós: -des
  • eles / elas / vocês: -em

Because the eu and the ele slots add nothing, they look identical to the plain infinitive; the ending is only visible for tu, nós, vós and eles. Crucially, the endings attach to the whole infinitive, irregular verbs included:

  • fazer -> fazermos, fazerem (not a rebuilt stem).
  • ser -> sermos, serem; ter -> termos, terem; pôr -> pormos, porem.

So once you can say the infinitive, you can inflect it. There are no exceptions to learn.

When to use it: three triggers

The personal infinitive appears where an infinitive clause has a subject of its own, especially in these contexts.

1. After a preposition or prepositional phrase. This is the commonest case. para, por, sem, até, ao, antes de, depois de, apesar de, em vez de govern a personal infinitive when the action has its own subject:

  • Comprei um bolo para comermos ao lanche. (“…for us to eat.”)
  • Saíram sem eles se despedirem. (“…without them saying goodbye.”)
  • Telefona-me depois de acabares o trabalho. (“…after you finish…”)

The phrase ao + personal infinitive is a compact way to say “on / upon …-ing”: Ao chegarem a casa, começou a chover (“On arriving home, it started to rain”).

2. After an impersonal expression. é importante, é melhor, é preciso, é possível, convém, basta take a personal infinitive to pin down whose action it is:

  • É melhor esperarmos aqui. (“It’s better for us to wait here.”)
  • É importante os alunos lerem o texto. (“It’s important that the students read the text.”)

Compare the bare, general É importante ler (“It’s important to read”, anyone) with the inflected É importante lermos (“…that we read”).

3. As or with an explicit subject. When the infinitive clause is itself the subject or is felt as a small clause: Foi difícil eles aceitarem a proposta (“It was hard for them to accept the offer”).

When NOT to inflect

Do not inflect an infinitive that simply completes a conjugated verb of the same subject - the modal and phase verbs poder, querer, dever, ir, começar a, ter de:

  • Queremos sair, never queremos sairmos.
  • Podem entrar; Vou fazer o jantar.

The personal infinitive lives in a separate clause (after a preposition or an impersonal expression), not as the direct complement of an auxiliary. If the two verbs share one subject and one clause, keep the plain infinitive.

Personal infinitive or subjunctive?

A prepositional clause with a different subject can often be phrased either with que + subjunctive or with a personal infinitive, and European Portuguese usually prefers the lighter infinitive:

  • Falei devagar para eles perceberem. = …para que eles percebessem.
  • Avisa-me antes de saíres. (same subject felt, still inflected for clarity)

Rule of thumb: preposition + own subject -> personal infinitive; a full que-clause is the heavier, more formal alternative.

Forms & patterns

The endings on the three conjugations and on irregular verbs (all regular in shape):

Personfalarcomerpartirserpôr
eufalarcomerpartirserpôr
tufalarescomerespartiresserespores
ele / vocêfalarcomerpartirserpôr
nósfalarmoscomermospartirmossermospormos
vósfalardescomerdespartirdesserdespordes
eles / vocêsfalaremcomerempartiremseremporem

Common triggers:

TriggerExampleEnglish
parapara eu saberso that I know
semsem eles veremwithout them seeing
aoao entrarmoson our entering
antes de / depois dedepois de comermosafter we eat
apesar deapesar de estarem cansadosalthough they are tired
é melhor / é precisoé preciso teres cuidadoyou need to be careful

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Obrigado por virem à festa.Thank you (pl.) for coming to the party.
Ao saírem de casa, encontraram o vizinho.As they left home, they met the neighbour.
É melhor falarmos com o professor.It is better for us to speak to the teacher.
Comprei bilhetes para vocês irem ao concerto.I bought tickets for you to go to the concert.
Ela repetiu tudo até nós percebermos.She repeated everything until we understood.
Foi difícil eles aceitarem o resultado.It was hard for them to accept the result.
Antes de responderes, pensa bem.Before you answer, think carefully.
Apesar de estarmos cansados, continuámos.Although we were tired, we carried on.
Convém treinares mais para o exame.You had better train more for the exam.
Deixei a luz acesa para eles não terem medo.I left the light on so they would not be afraid.

Common mistakes

  • Queremos sairmos cedo -> Queremos sair cedo - an infinitive completing a same-subject modal (querer, poder, dever) stays plain; never inflect it.
  • para que eu saber -> para eu saber (or para que eu saiba) - after a preposition use the personal infinitive; que would force a conjugated subjunctive.
  • É melhor tu ir mais cedo -> É melhor tu ires mais cedo - when the subject is expressed, inflect: ires, not the bare ir.
  • depois de nós comer -> depois de nós comermos - the nós ending is -mos on the infinitive.
  • sem eles vem -> sem eles verem - verem is the personal infinitive of ver; vem is the present of vir.
  • para fazermos when eu is the subject -> para fazer / para eu fazer - match the ending to the real subject; -mos is only for nós.
  • Building a future-looking form: falaremos for “for us to speak” -> falarmos - falaremos is the future indicative, a different tense.

Tips

  • The tell-tale trigger is a preposition followed by a subject - para eu, sem eles, antes de tu, ao nós. See that shape and inflect.
  • Only tu (-es), nós (-mos), vós (-des) and eles (-em) show a visible ending; eu and ele look exactly like the plain infinitive, which is why the form is easy to miss.
  • Relax about irregular verbs: the personal infinitive is built on the infinitive, so ser, ter, fazer, pôr, ir are all perfectly regular here - the one corner of the verb system with no surprises.
  • Think of ao + personal infinitive as a ready-made “on …-ing” clause: ao chegarem, ao terminarmos, ao ver isso.
  • Reach for it whenever a que + subjunctive clause feels heavy: para eles perceberem is the everyday European Portuguese way to say para que eles percebam.
  • In Brazil: the inflected infinitive is equally standard and used the same way; the difference you may notice is stylistic, with the personal infinitive often preferred over a que-clause in both varieties of careful writing.

B1 38 / 55

Relative pronouns and relative clauses

Pronomes relativos e orações relativas

In short

A relative clause lets you add information about a noun without starting a new sentence: instead of “I bought a book. The book was expensive”, you say “the book that I bought was expensive”. Portuguese does this with a small set of relative words - above all que, plus quem for people after a preposition, and onde for places. Two habits from English will trip you up and both are fixed by one rule: in Portuguese you never drop the relative, and you always put any preposition in front of it. Learn to build “preposition + quem/que” and most relative clauses fall into place.

The rule

que - the all-purpose relative

que is invariable (never changes for gender or number) and does the vast majority of the work. It refers to people or things and can be the subject or the object of its clause.

  • Subject: A senhora que mora ao lado é médica. (The lady who lives next door is a doctor.)
  • Object: O comboio que apanhei estava cheio. (The train I caught was full.)

Notice the second English sentence has no relative word at all - “the train I caught”. Portuguese cannot do that. The que is obligatory: o comboio que apanhei, never o comboio apanhei.

quem - people, after a preposition

quem refers only to people and is used mainly when a preposition is involved. First decide which preposition the verb needs (falar com, gostar de, escrever a, confiar em), then place it before quem:

  • A colega com quem partilho o gabinete mudou-se. (The colleague I share the office with…)
  • O professor a quem escrevi ainda não respondeu. (The teacher I wrote to…)

With an explicit antecedent and no preposition, use que, not quem: a rapariga que conheci (the girl I met), not a rapariga quem conheci. quem also works with no antecedent at all, meaning “whoever / the one who”, and then the verb is third-person singular: Quem não arrisca não petisca.

onde - places

onde means “where” and points to a place. It is interchangeable with em que: a casa onde vivo = a casa em que vivo. For motion towards a place use aonde (aonde vais?), and por onde for “through which”, donde / de onde for “from where”. Use onde only for real, physical places - for time, use em que: o dia em que nos conhecemos (the day we met), not o dia onde….

o que - a whole idea

Use o que (“what / which”) to refer to a complete idea rather than a single noun. It sums up the previous clause or stands for an unspecified thing:

  • Ele chegou atrasado, o que irritou toda a gente. (…, which annoyed everyone.)
  • Não percebi o que disseste. (I didn’t get what you said.)

After tudo, the relative is o que: tudo o que sei (everything I know).

Defining vs adding information

No comma = a defining clause that tells you which one: Os alunos que estudaram passaram (only the ones who studied). With commas, the clause just adds a detail: O meu irmão, que vive em Lisboa, vem cá amanhã (I have one brother; by the way, he lives in Lisbon).

para and por can also introduce relatives, but they collide with the conjunctions para que (“so that”) and porque (“because”), so speakers often switch to o qual there - that form, and the possessive cujo, are the subject of the next relatives lesson.

Forms & patterns

The core relatives:

RelativeRefers toVaries?Typical use
quepeople and thingsnosubject / object; prep + que for things
quempeople onlynoafter a preposition; or “whoever” with no antecedent
ondeplacesno”where”; = em que / na qual
o quea whole idea, “what”nosums up a clause; free relative
quanto(s), quanta(s)quantity, “all that”agreesformal “as much / as many as”

Building “preposition + relative” - the preposition always comes first:

Preposition (from the verb)Thing ->Person ->
de (falar de, gostar de)de quede quem
em (pensar em, confiar em)em queem quem
com (falar com, contar com)com quecom quem
a (assistir a, referir-se a)a quea quem

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
A médica que me atendeu foi muito simpática.The doctor who saw me was very kind.
Este é o assunto de que te falei ontem.This is the matter I told you about yesterday.
A colega com quem almoço saiu mais cedo.The colleague I have lunch with left earlier.
A aldeia onde cresci já quase não tem gente.The village where I grew up has almost no people left.
A caixa em que guardo as fotografias partiu-se.The box in which I keep the photos broke.
Ele desistiu do curso, o que nos surpreendeu a todos.He dropped out of the course, which surprised us all.
Não faço ideia do que se passou na reunião.I have no idea what happened in the meeting.
Quem não arrisca não petisca.Nothing ventured, nothing gained.
Aqueles que chegaram cedo apanharam lugar sentado.Those who arrived early got a seat.
A pessoa em quem mais confio é a minha irmã.The person I trust the most is my sister.

Common mistakes

  • o homem que falei com ele -> o homem com quem falei - put the preposition before the relative and never add a second pronoun; Portuguese does not strand prepositions or double the reference like English “the man I spoke to”.
  • o livro li ontem -> o livro que li ontem - the relative is obligatory; Portuguese never drops it the way English drops “that” in “the book I read”.
  • a rapariga quem conheci -> a rapariga que conheci - with a stated antecedent and no preposition, use que; quem needs either a preposition or no antecedent at all.
  • a casa onde vivo nela -> a casa onde vivo - do not add a resumptive “nela / nele / lá” after onde or em que; the relative already carries that meaning.
  • a cidade que nasci -> a cidade onde nasci (or em que) - a place needs onde / em que, not bare que.
  • o problema o que temos -> o problema que temos - use o que only for a whole idea or “the thing that”, never straight after a concrete noun.

Tips

  • One rule solves most cases: find the preposition the verb requires, then say it out loud before the relative - gostar de + film = o filme de que gosto; gostar de + person = a pessoa de quem gosto.
  • After a preposition, the default split is simple: quem for people, que (or onde for places) for things.
  • To comment on a whole situation, reach for , o que: Choveu o dia todo, o que estragou o passeio.
  • quem with no antecedent takes a singular verb: Quem chegar primeiro abre a porta (whoever arrives first opens the door).
  • Commas change the meaning: os passageiros que tinham bilhete = only some; os passageiros, que tinham bilhete, = all of them, and by the way they had tickets.
  • In Brazil: tudo que (without the o) is very common in speech; European Portuguese keeps the article - tudo o que.

B1 39 / 55

Passive voice and the particle se

Voz passiva e a partícula se

In short

Both the passive and the little word se let you talk about an action while pushing the doer into the background - often out of the sentence entirely. The first tool is the ser-passive, built like English “was written”: ser + participle, with the doer, if named at all, introduced by por. The second is the particle se, one word that does three different jobs - reflexive (ela veste-se), passive (vendem-se casas), and impersonal (vive-se bem) - and the trick is telling them apart, because the verb agreement changes with each. This lesson also settles two loose ends: which participle to use when a verb has two (foi entregue but tinha entregado), and how the verb agrees when the subject is a quantity like a maioria dos alunos.

The rule

The ser-passive with an agent

The passive turns the object of an active sentence into the subject: O júri escolheu o vencedor becomes O vencedor foi escolhido pelo júri (“the winner was chosen by the jury”). The recipe is fixed:

subject + ser (in any tense) + participle (agreeing) + por + agent

  • Ser carries the tense: é escrito (present), foi escrito (PPS), vai ser escrito (future), tinha sido escrito (pluperfect).
  • The participle agrees in gender and number with the subject, as in Lesson 24: a casa foi vendida, os livros foram vendidos.
  • The doer is the agent, introduced by por - never de. And por contracts with the article (por + o -> pelo, por + a -> pela): foi assinado pelo diretor, foi fechada pela polícia.

You can drop the agent whenever it is unknown or unimportant - usually the point of a passive: O livro foi publicado em 2020.

The particle se and its three jobs

The same clitic se (placed by the rules of Lesson 30: enclisis by default, proclisis after negation and question words) covers three constructions.

1. Reflexive se - the subject acts on itself. Here se is a real pronoun, “himself / herself / themselves”, and the verb agrees with the subject: Ela levanta-se cedo. This is the se of Lesson 12.

2. Passive se (se apassivante) - the everyday way to say something is done without naming a doer. It works only with a transitive verb, and the direct object becomes the grammatical subject, so the verb agrees with it: Vende*-se** carro* but Vendem-se carros. This is the se on shop signs (Aluga-se, Fala-se português).

3. Impersonal se - there is no subject at all. Use it with intransitive verbs or verbs that take a preposition, and the verb is always third-person singular: Aqui vive-se bem, Precisa*-se de** empregados*. Because precisar needs de, empregados is not the subject, so the verb stays singular even though the noun is plural.

Double participles: foi entregue vs tinha entregado

Some verbs have two participles: a short irregular one and a long regular one. Choose by the auxiliary:

  • With ser and estar (passive and state), use the short form: A encomenda foi entregue, A sala está limpa.
  • With ter in a compound tense (Lesson 25), use the long form: O carteiro tinha entregado as cartas, A empregada tinha limpado a sala.

The exceptions are pagar, ganhar, gastar, which use their short form pago, ganho, gasto everywhere, including with ter (tinha pago).

Agreement with quantified subjects

When the subject is a quantity word plus a plural noun, agreement wavers:

  • a maioria de + plural: standard is singular (with maioria), but plural (with the noun) is fully accepted: A maioria das casas foi vendida / foram vendidas.
  • percentages + de + plural: the verb normally goes plural: Trinta por cento dos votos foram anulados.
  • um dos que: the que points back to the plural noun, so standard grammar wants a plural verb: Este é um dos livros que se vendem mais.

Forms & patterns

Active turned into a ser-passive:

ActivePassive: ser + participle + por
O júri escolheu o vencedor.O vencedor foi escolhido pelo júri.
Publicaram o livro em 2020.O livro foi publicado em 2020.
A empresa vai contratar dez pessoas.Dez pessoas vão ser contratadas pela empresa.

The agent contraction (por + article):

por +contracts to
opelo
apela
ospelos
aspelas

The three uses of se:

TypeVerb formExampleMeaning
Reflexiveagrees with the subjectEla levanta-se cedo.She gets up early.
Passive se3rd sg / pl, agrees with the patientVendem-se casas.Houses are sold.
Impersonal sealways 3rd singularVive-se bem aqui.One lives well here.

Double participles - choose by the auxiliary:

VerbWith ter (compound)With ser / estar (passive / state)
entregartinha entregadofoi entregue
aceitartinha aceitadofoi aceite
imprimirtinha imprimidofoi impresso
suspendertinha suspendidofoi suspenso
limpartinha limpadoestá limpo

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
O contrato foi assinado pelo advogado.The contract was signed by the lawyer.
A ponte vai ser inaugurada amanhã.The bridge will be opened tomorrow.
Vendem-se apartamentos junto à praia.Apartments for sale near the beach.
Aqui não se fala inglês.English is not spoken here.
Precisa-se de cozinheiros com experiência.Experienced cooks needed.
Em Portugal vive-se bem.In Portugal one lives well.
As encomendas já foram entregues ontem.The parcels were already delivered yesterday.
O carteiro tinha entregado as cartas antes das nove.The postman had delivered the letters before nine.
A maioria dos quartos foi reservada online.Most of the rooms were booked online.
Este é um dos erros que se cometem mais.This is one of the mistakes that are made most often.

Common mistakes

  • As casas foi vendidas. -> As casas foram vendidas. - in a ser-passive both ser and the participle agree with the plural subject: foram + vendidas.
  • O relatório foi escrito por o diretor. -> … pelo diretor. - por contracts with the article, giving pelo / pela / pelos / pelas; never leave por o.
  • O quadro foi pintado de um amigo. -> … por um amigo. - the agent of a ser-passive is introduced by por, not de.
  • Vende-se casas. -> Vendem-se casas. - in the passive se the noun is the subject, so the verb agrees with it.
  • Precisam-se de empregados. -> Precisa-se de empregados. - precisar de takes a preposition, so this is the impersonal se and the verb stays singular.
  • Não fala-se inglês aqui. -> Não se fala inglês aqui. - negation forces proclisis, so se moves in front of the verb (Lesson 30).
  • O carteiro tinha entregue as cartas. -> … tinha entregado as cartas. - after ter use the long entregado; keep the short entregue for ser / estar (foi entregue).

Tips

  • Use the ser-passive to keep the spotlight on the receiver of the action; add por + agent only when the doer matters: O bolo foi feito pela minha avó vs simply O bolo foi feito ontem.
  • The passive se is what you read on signs - Vendem-se, Aluga-se, Fala-se português - and is often smoother than a full ser-passive. Agree the verb with the thing acted on.
  • One test separates passive se from impersonal se: a direct object with no preposition means passive, so the verb agrees (Fazem-se chaves); a preposition between verb and noun (precisar de, falar de) means impersonal, so it stays singular (Precisa-se de chaves).
  • Pick the participle by the auxiliary: ser / estar -> short (foi entregue, está aberto); ter -> long (tinha entregado, tinha aberto). Note pago, ganho, gasto are short everywhere (Lesson 25).
  • With a maioria de, percentages and um dos que, let the verb agree with the plural noun if in doubt (um dos que sabem); with a maioria the singular is equally correct.
  • In Brazil: the clitic se is normally placed before the verb, even to start a clause (Se vende, Se fala espanhol), and Brazilian writing often drops the passive-se agreement (Vende-se casas). European Portuguese keeps enclisis (Vende-se) and the plural agreement (Vendem-se casas).

B1 40 / 55

Word formation and irregular or compound plurals

Formação de palavras e plurais irregulares e compostos

In short

Portuguese builds new words in two ways - by derivation (gluing a prefix or suffix onto a stem: fazer -> desfazer, informar -> informação) and by composition (welding two words together: guardar + chuva -> guarda-chuva). Spotting these patterns unlocks vocabulary you have never met. The flip side is that compound and irregular nouns do not pluralise like ordinary ones: guarda-chuva becomes guarda-chuvas but couve-flor becomes couves-flores, and a whole class of words such as ovo and porco change their vowel sound in the plural without changing a single letter. This lesson gives you the rules for all three.

The rule

Derivation: prefixes and suffixes

A prefix goes in front of a stem and mostly changes the meaning, not the word class: des- undoes or negates (fazer -> desfazer, gostar -> desgostar, ligar -> desligar), in-/im- means “not” (feliz -> infeliz, possível -> impossível, certo -> incerto), re- means “again” (fazer -> refazer, ler -> reler).

A suffix goes on the end and usually changes the word class: -ção/-são turns a verb into a noun (informar -> informação, decidir -> decisão), -dor makes an agent (trabalhar -> trabalhador, jogar -> jogador), -mente turns an adjective into an adverb (rápido -> rapidamente, from lesson 17), -eza/-ez makes an abstract quality noun (belo -> beleza, rígido -> rigidez). The affectionate -inho and the big -ão are suffixes too, but they get their own treatment in lesson 41.

Composition: compound words

A compound fuses two words into one idea. A few fuse completely (girassol, pontapé), but most keep a hyphen: guarda-chuva (umbrella), guarda-roupa (wardrobe), segunda-feira (Monday), couve-flor (cauliflower), porta-voz (spokesperson), fim de semana (weekend, no hyphen since the 1990 spelling agreement). The internal shape matters, because the plural depends on what each part is - a verb, a noun, an adjective, or a linking preposition.

The plural of compound nouns

Ask what the pieces are:

  • Noun + noun, noun + adjective, or adjective + noun: both parts take the plural. segunda-feira -> segundas-feiras, couve-flor -> couves-flores, obra-prima -> obras-primas, amor-perfeito -> amores-perfeitos.
  • Verb + noun: the verb is invariable, so only the noun changes. guarda-chuva -> guarda-chuvas (guarda here is the verb “guards”), porta-voz -> porta-vozes, beija-flor -> beija-flores, guarda-roupa -> guarda-roupas.
  • Parts joined by a preposition: only the first noun changes. pé-de-meia -> pés-de-meia, fim de semana -> fins de semana, mão de obra -> mãos de obra.
  • Watch guarda: in guarda-chuva it is the verb (invariable), but o guarda meaning “the guard” is a noun, so guarda-noturno -> guardas-noturnos pluralises both parts.

Metaphonic plurals: the invisible change

A group of masculine nouns has a closed ô sound in the singular that opens to ó in the plural. The spelling never changes - both are written with a plain o - so this plural is invisible on the page and audible only in speech: ovo -> ovos, porco -> porcos, osso -> ossos, fogo -> fogos, jogo -> jogos, olho -> olhos, povo -> povos, porto -> portos. Not every -o noun does it: bolo -> bolos and gosto -> gostos keep the closed vowel throughout. There is no rule to apply - you learn the “opening” ones as a list, the way a native ear already knows them.

Agreement of compound adjectives

When two adjectives form a compound, only the last one agrees; the first freezes in the masculine singular: luso-brasileiro -> relações luso-brasileiras, político-social -> questões político-sociais, técnico-científico -> áreas técnico-científicas. Two exceptions to keep: surdo-mudo makes both parts agree (surdos-mudos), and colour compounds are invariable - calças azul-marinho, camisolas verde-garrafa and laços cor-de-rosa never change.

Forms & patterns

Derivation at a glance:

ProcessFromNew word
prefix des- (undo / negate)fazer, ligardesfazer, desligar
prefix in-/im- (not)feliz, possívelinfeliz, impossível
suffix -ção/-são (verb -> noun)informar, decidirinformação, decisão
suffix -dor (agent)trabalhar, jogartrabalhador, jogador
suffix -mente (adjective -> adverb)rápido, felizrapidamente, felizmente
suffix -eza/-ez (quality noun)belo, rígidobeleza, rigidez

Plural of compound nouns:

StructureWhich part changesExample
noun + noun / noun + adj / adj + nounboth partscouve-flor -> couves-flores; segunda-feira -> segundas-feiras
verb + nounonly the nounguarda-chuva -> guarda-chuvas; porta-voz -> porta-vozes
joined by a prepositiononly the firstpé-de-meia -> pés-de-meia; fim de semana -> fins de semana
two adjectives (compound adjective)only the lastluso-brasileiro -> luso-brasileiros

Metaphonic plural (spelling identical, vowel opens ô -> ó):

Singular ôPlural óBut these stay closed
ovoovosbolo -> bolos
porcoporcosgosto -> gostos
ossoossosglobo -> globos
fogo, jogo, olhofogos, jogos, olhosbolso -> bolsos

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Comprei dois guarda-chuvas novos.I bought two new umbrellas.
Eles fecham sempre às segundas-feiras.They always close on Mondays.
A sopa leva couves-flores e batata.The soup has cauliflower and potato.
Os porta-vozes dos dois partidos falaram.The spokespeople of the two parties spoke.
Ainda tens uns fins de semana livres?Do you still have a few free weekends?
Os ovos estão no frigorífico.The eggs are in the fridge.
Não gosto muito de jogos de tabuleiro.I do not much like board games.
Ela estuda as relações luso-brasileiras.She studies Luso-Brazilian relations.
Contrataram guardas-noturnos para o evento.They hired night guards for the event.
Ela comprou umas calças azul-marinho.She bought some navy-blue trousers.

Common mistakes

  • guardas-chuvas -> guarda-chuvas - the first part is the verb guardar, so it is invariable; only chuva takes the plural.
  • couve-flores -> couves-flores - two nouns, so both are pluralised, not just the second one.
  • fins de semanas -> fins de semana - when a preposition links the parts, only the first noun changes; semana stays singular.
  • relações luso-brasileiros -> luso-brasileiras - in a compound adjective only the last element agrees; luso- is frozen, but -brasileiras must match relações.
  • calças azuis-marinhos -> azul-marinho - colour compounds are invariable and take neither gender nor number.
  • surdos-mudo -> surdos-mudos - surdo-mudo is the special case where both adjectives agree.
  • Saying ovos with the singular’s closed vowel -> the plural opens the o (ovo with closed ô -> ovos with open ó); the letters are identical, only the sound moves.

Tips

  • Before pluralising a compound, name the parts: verb + noun means only the noun moves (guarda-chuvas); noun + noun means both move (couves-flores). That one question settles most cases.
  • Prepositions freeze whatever follows them: pés-de-meia, mãos de obra, fins de semana - only the word before de ever changes.
  • For compound adjectives, remember “last one only” (questões socioeconómicas agree just on the tail), and treat colours (azul-marinho, cor-de-rosa) as permanently invariable.
  • The metaphonic plural is a listening and speaking skill, not a spelling one: since ovo and ovos look identical, drill the ear on the common set (ovo, porco, osso, fogo, jogo, olho, povo, porto) until the vowel opening is automatic.
  • Use derivation to guess meaning: see des- and think “undo / opposite”, see -dor and think “the person or thing that does it”, see -mente and think “adverb”. It multiplies your vocabulary for free.
  • In Brazil: the compound-plural and metaphony rules are the same; the vowel opening in the plural (ovos, jogos) happens in both norms - it is just easier to hear in European Portuguese, because the surrounding unstressed vowels are reduced so heavily.

B1 41 / 55

Diminutives, augmentatives and the -íssimo superlative

Graus do nome: diminutivos, aumentativos e superlativo em -íssimo

In short

Portuguese lets you change the size and, above all, the feeling of a word by adding a suffix. A gato becomes a gatinho (a small or dear cat), a casa becomes a casarão (a huge house), and bonito becomes bonitíssimo (“extremely beautiful”). None of this is optional decoration: the affectionate diminutive in -inho is one of the clearest markers of natural European Portuguese, and -íssimo is the everyday way to say “very, very”. Get the two spelling reflexes right - the -inho vs -zinho choice, and the c/g shift before the ending - and you will sound far more idiomatic.

The rule

The diminutive: -inho / -inha

The diminutive suffix agrees in gender and number with the noun, exactly like an adjective ending: gato -> gatinho, gata -> gatinha, livros -> livrinhos, casas -> casinhas. There are two shapes of the suffix, -inho and -zinho, and choosing between them is the whole skill.

Choosing -inho or -zinho

  • If the word ends in an unstressed -a, -o or -e, drop that final vowel and add -inho/-inha: casa -> casinha, gato -> gatinho, pente -> pentinho, livro -> livrinho.
  • Otherwise - a consonant, a nasal, a stressed vowel or a diphthong - keep the whole word and add -zinho/-zinha: flor -> florzinha, animal -> animalzinho, café -> cafezinho, mãe -> mãezinha, cão -> cãozinho, pão -> pãozinho.
  • A final -m becomes -n before -zinho: homem -> homenzinho, jardim -> jardinzinho.

Watch the c/g spelling reflex from the reading & pronunciation guide: a stem-final hard c or g becomes qu/gu to keep its sound - pouco -> pouquinho, fresco -> fresquinho, branco -> branquinho.

What the diminutive really does

Size is only half of it. The -inho suffix mostly conveys affection, warmth or softening: um cafezinho is an inviting little coffee, obrigadinho/obrigadinha is a warm thank-you, and Espera um bocadinho (“wait a little bit”) is gentler than Espera um bocado. It attaches happily to adverbs and adjectives too - devagarinho (nice and slowly), quentinho (nice and warm), cedinho (good and early), juntinhos (all cosily together). Some of these have frozen into ordinary words: sozinho (“alone”, from ) is now the normal adjective, not a “little bit alone”.

The augmentative: -ão (and -aço/-aça)

The augmentative -ão means big, often with an admiring or a rough edge: casa -> casarão (a mansion), carro -> carrão (a big flashy car), homem -> homenzarrão (a huge man). Note that -ão usually makes the word masculine, even from a feminine base - a casa but o casarão, a sala but o salão. Many -ão forms have lexicalized into independent nouns: portão (gate, not “big door”), cartão (card), salão (hall). A second suffix, -aço/-aça, adds an intensive or admiring note: um golaço (a stunning goal), um jogaço (a cracking match).

The synthetic superlative: -íssimo

Alongside the analytic superlative from Lesson 18 (muito caro, o mais caro de todos), Portuguese has a one-word absolute superlative in -íssimo, meaning “extremely / very very”: drop the adjective’s final vowel and add -íssimo/-íssima (agreeing in gender and number). caro -> caríssimo, bonito -> bonitíssimo, feliz -> felicíssimo (z becomes c). The same c/g reflex applies: rico -> riquíssimo, longo -> longuíssimo. A handful take the erudite ending -ílimo or are outright irregular, and those are the ones to memorise.

Forms & patterns

Diminutive suffix choice:

BaseEnds inDiminutive
casaunstressed -acasinha
gatounstressed -ogatinho
florconsonantflorzinha
animalconsonantanimalzinho
caféstressed vowelcafezinho
cãonasal diphthongcãozinho
homem-m (-> -n)homenzinho

Diminutive plurals - the -zinho type pluralizes the base first, then adds -zinhos:

SingularBase pluralDiminutive plural
gatinho(gatos)gatinhos
pãozinhopãespãezinhos
animalzinhoanimaisanimaizinhos
papelzinhopapéispapeizinhos

The absolute superlative -íssimo, regular and irregular:

AdjectiveAbsolute superlativeNote
bonitobonitíssimodrop final vowel
ricoriquíssimoc -> qu
longolonguíssimog -> gu
felizfelicíssimoz -> c
fácilfacílimoerudite -ílimo
difícildificílimoerudite -ílimo
bomótimoirregular
maupéssimoirregular
grandemáximoirregular
pequenomínimoirregular

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Queres um cafezinho antes de sair?Do you want a little coffee before leaving?
Espera só um bocadinho, já venho.Wait just a little bit, I am coming right back.
Que casinha tão gira que vocês têm!What a cute little house you have!
Eles vivem naquele casarão ao fundo da rua.They live in that huge house at the end of the street.
O meu vizinho comprou um carrão novo.My neighbour bought a big flashy new car.
Esta sopa está riquíssima, quero mais.This soup is absolutely delicious, I want more.
Foi um exame dificílimo, quase ninguém passou.It was an extremely hard exam, almost nobody passed.
Ainda há uns pãezinhos quentes na cozinha.There are still some warm bread rolls in the kitchen.
Anda devagarinho, que o chão está molhado.Walk nice and slowly, the floor is wet.
O tempo hoje está ótimo para ir à praia.The weather today is great for going to the beach.

Common mistakes

  • florinha -> florzinha - a word ending in a consonant takes -zinho/-zinha, never a bare -inho (likewise stressed vowels, nasals and diphthongs: café -> cafezinho, cão -> cãozinho).
  • pãozinhos -> pãezinhos - for the -zinho plural, pluralize the base first (pão -> pães) and then add -zinhos; you cannot just tack an -s on the end.
  • ricíssimo -> riquíssimo - keep the hard sound: c becomes qu before -íssimo (and g becomes gu: longo -> longuíssimo).
  • fácil / difícil: the erudite superlative is facílimo / dificílimo - the form the references list first and careful writing prefers; facilíssimo / dificilíssimo also occur and are accepted, just less standard.
  • muito bonitíssimo -> bonitíssimo (or muito bonito) - -íssimo already means “very”, so do not pile muito on top of it.
  • um gatinha -> uma gatinha, duas casinha -> duas casinhas - the diminutive still agrees in gender and number with its noun.
  • cafézinho -> cafezinho - the base loses its written accent when the stress moves onto the suffix (café -> cafezinho, avó -> avozinha).

Tips

  • Quick suffix test: ends in an unstressed -a/-o/-e? Drop it and add -inho/-inha (gato -> gatinho). Anything else - consonant, nasal, stressed vowel, diphthong - takes -zinho/-zinha (flor -> florzinha).
  • Reach for the diminutive to sound friendly, not to say “small”: um instantinho, agorinha, só um bocadinho soften a request, and obrigadinho/obrigadinha warms a thank-you. It sounds childish in formal writing, so keep it for speech.
  • The c/g spelling shift shows up in both suffixes: pouco -> pouquinho, fresco -> fresquinho, rico -> riquíssimo, longo -> longuíssimo. Same rule, two places.
  • Treat frozen forms as plain vocabulary: portão, cartão, salão and sozinho are dictionary words now, not live augmentatives or diminutives.
  • In everyday EP speech, super + adjective (superbonito, superfixe) competes with -íssimo; recognise and use -íssimo, but know it reads as emphatic or slightly formal.
  • In Brazil: the diminutive is, if anything, even more constant in speech (rapidinho, pertinho, tchauzinho), and the machinery is identical - so everything here carries straight over.

B1 42 / 55

Verbs and adjectives followed by prepositions

Regência: verbos e adjetivos seguidos de preposição

In short

Many Portuguese verbs and adjectives do not connect to their complement directly - they demand a specific little preposition first, and that preposition is fixed. You do not gostar a thing, you gostar de it; you do not pensar a person, you pensar em them. This is called regência (government): the verb or adjective “governs” which preposition must follow. The catch for an English speaker is that the Portuguese choice almost never matches the English one - “depend on” is depender de, “wait for” is esperar por, “dream of” is sonhar com. There is no rule that predicts the right preposition, so the working method is to learn each verb together with its preposition as a single chunk - precisar de, assistir a, pensar em - exactly the way you memorised a word.

The rule

The preposition belongs to the verb, not to the meaning

Portuguese groups these verbs into loose families by the preposition they take. The families are not logical - they are just what you must memorise - but sorting them this way makes them far easier to store.

  • de: gostar de, precisar de, lembrar-se de, esquecer-se de, depender de, desistir de, duvidar de, aproximar-se de.
  • a: assistir a (to watch / attend), obedecer a, responder a, pertencer a, dedicar-se a, habituar-se a, referir-se a.
  • em: pensar em, acreditar em, insistir em, reparar em (to notice), participar em, consistir em.
  • com: sonhar com, preocupar-se com, importar-se com, casar com, parecer-se com, contar com, concordar com.
  • por: esperar por (to wait for), apaixonar-se por, interessar-se por, optar por, responsabilizar-se por.
  • para: olhar para (to look at), contribuir para.

Adjectives govern prepositions too

The same machinery runs on adjectives: cheio de (full of), cansado de (tired of), contente com (happy with), interessado em (interested in), apaixonado por (in love with). Again the preposition is fixed and does not track English.

  • de: cheio de, cansado de, capaz de, orgulhoso de, diferente de, fácil de / difícil de (+ infinitive).
  • com: contente com, satisfeito com, zangado com, parecido com, compatível com.
  • em: interessado em, rico em.
  • a: semelhante a, igual a, fiel a, superior a, sensível a.
  • por: apaixonado por, responsável por, conhecido por.
  • para: útil para, pronto para, bom para.

The preposition fuses with what follows

The governed preposition still obeys the contraction rules you already know. When an article or a demonstrative comes next, the two merge: gostar de + o café -> gostar do café, assistir a + o jogo -> assistir ao jogo, pensar em + o futuro -> pensar no futuro, apaixonar-se por + a Ana -> apaixonar-se pela Ana. It also happens before demonstratives: de + isso -> disso, em + isso -> nisso, a + aquilo -> àquilo. The preposition never disappears - it is just hiding inside do, ao, no, pela, disso.

It survives before an infinitive

The verb or adjective keeps its preposition even when the complement is a whole action expressed by an infinitive: Gosto de viajar, Preciso de descansar, Estou cansado de esperar, Estou pronto para começar, Insisto em pagar. So “I need to talk” is Preciso de falar - the de is not optional filler, it is the government of precisar.

Clitics stay enclitic

Several of these verbs are reflexive (lembrar-se, apaixonar-se, preocupar-se, dedicar-se), so the pronoun follows EP’s default enclisis: Lembro-me de ti, Apaixonei-me por ela, Preocupo-me com isso. After a negation the pronoun moves in front, as usual: Não me lembro de nada.

Forms & patterns

Common verbs, sorted by the preposition they govern:

PrepositionVerbsTypical English
degostar de, precisar de, lembrar-se de, esquecer-se de, depender de, desistir delike, need, remember, forget, depend on, give up
aassistir a, obedecer a, responder a, pertencer a, habituar-se awatch/attend, obey, answer, belong to, get used to
empensar em, acreditar em, insistir em, reparar em, participar emthink about, believe in, insist on, notice, take part in
comsonhar com, preocupar-se com, casar com, parecer-se com, contar comdream of, worry about, marry, resemble, count on
poresperar por, apaixonar-se por, interessar-se por, optar porwait for, fall in love with, be interested in, opt for
paraolhar para, contribuir paralook at, contribute to

Common adjectives, same idea:

PrepositionAdjectivesTypical English
decheio de, cansado de, capaz de, orgulhoso de, diferente defull of, tired of, capable of, proud of, different from
comcontente com, satisfeito com, zangado com, parecido comhappy with, satisfied with, angry with, similar to
eminteressado em, rico eminterested in, rich in
asemelhante a, igual a, fiel a, superior asimilar to, equal to, loyal to, superior to
porapaixonado por, responsável por, conhecido porin love with, responsible for, known for

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Gosto muito de música portuguesa.I really like Portuguese music.
Preciso de falar contigo ainda hoje.I need to talk to you today.
Lembras-te do verão em que nos conhecemos?Do you remember the summer we met?
Isto depende do tempo que tivermos.This depends on the time we have.
Ontem assistimos ao jogo no café.Yesterday we watched the match at the café.
Estou à espera - espero pelo autocarro há vinte minutos.I have been waiting - I am waiting for the bus for twenty minutes.
Ela apaixonou-se pelo colega de trabalho.She fell in love with her colleague.
Não me preocupo com a chuva.I do not worry about the rain.
Estou muito interessado neste curso.I am very interested in this course.
Estamos orgulhosos de ti.We are proud of you.

Common mistakes

  • Gosto música -> Gosto de música - gostar always governs de; you can never drop it, and de + a música would contract to da música.
  • Depende em ti -> Depende de ti - depender takes de, not the English “on/em”.
  • Penso sobre ti / penso de ti -> Penso em ti - “think about” is pensar em; sobre and de are both wrong here.
  • Ela casou o João -> Ela casou com o João - casar governs com, even though English “marry someone” has no preposition.
  • Espero para o autocarro -> Espero pelo autocarro (or Espero o autocarro) - “wait for” is esperar por, which fuses to pelo; para points at a goal, not the thing awaited.
  • Gosto de o café -> Gosto do café - the governed preposition must fuse with the article: de + o = do, a + o = ao, em + o = no, por + o = pelo.
  • Assisti o filme -> Assisti ao filme - in the “watch/attend” sense, assistir takes a (ao). In Brazil this preposition is routinely dropped in speech (assisti o filme), but in European Portuguese keep the a.

Tips

  • No rule predicts the preposition, so store the pair as one word: not “gostar + something”, but gostar de, precisar de, pensar em, sonhar com. Learn the chunk, and the sentence builds itself.
  • Keep a short list of the English mismatches taped to your memory: think about = pensar em, depend on = depender de, wait for = esperar por, dream of = sonhar com, look at = olhar para. These are where you will actually slip.
  • The preposition never vanishes - it contracts. When you hear do, ao, no, pela, disso, nisso, àquilo, remember there is a governed de / a / em / por inside it.
  • The government holds before an infinitive too: preciso de descansar, cansado de esperar, pronto para sair. Do not strip the preposition just because an action follows.
  • Reflexive members keep EP enclisis - lembro-me de, apaixonei-me por, dedico-me a - and switch to proclisis only after a negation or a trigger word: não me lembro de, quando me apaixonei por.

B1 43 / 55

Pretérito perfeito composto and aspectual periphrases II

Pretérito perfeito composto e perífrases aspetuais II

In short

The pretérito perfeito composto looks exactly like the English present perfect - tenho feito is word-for-word “I have done” - and that is precisely the trap. In European Portuguese it does not mean “I have done (once, and now it’s finished)”. It means an action that has been repeating or going on from a past point right up to now, and typically still continues: Ultimamente tenho dormido mal = “Lately I have been sleeping badly (and still am)”. For a single finished action - even a recent one, even one English would put in the present perfect - EP uses the pretérito perfeito simples of Lessons 20-22: Já comi (“I’ve eaten”), not tenho comido. This lesson fixes that contrast, and then adds a second set of aspectual periphrases (following on from Lesson 9) that pin down how an action unfolds: still going, done again, given up, about to start.

The rule

Building it: present of ter + participle

Same machinery as the mais-que-perfeito of Lesson 25, but with ter in the present instead of the imperfeito:

present of ter (tenho, tens, tem, temos, têm) + past participle (Lesson 24).

  • Eu tenho trabalhado muito. - I have been working a lot.
  • Eles têm feito progressos. - They have been making progress.

As always after ter, the participle is invariable - the frozen -o form, never agreeing: Elas têm chegado tarde (not chegadas). Watch the auxiliary’s spelling: tem (he/she) versus têm (they), with the circumflex marking the plural.

What it actually means in EP

The perfeito composto covers a span that starts in the past and reaches the present, with a sense of repetition or continuity:

  • Nos últimos meses, tem chovido muito. - In recent months it has been raining a lot.
  • A Ana tem estudado todos os dias. - Ana has been studying every day.

The action is not presented as closed; it is still true, still recurring, or expected to go on. Think “have been -ing” or “have kept -ing”, not a one-off “have done”.

The trap: a finished action is the perfeito simples, not this

This is the mistake English speakers make daily. When you mean a single, completed past action - however recent, and even where English uses “have” - reach for the pretérito perfeito simples:

  • “I have already eaten.” -> Já comi. (not tenho comido)
  • “She has arrived.” -> Ela chegou / Ela já chegou. (not tem chegado)
  • “Have you ever been to Porto?” -> Já foste ao Porto? / Alguma vez estiveste no Porto? (perfeito simples)
  • “I have just finished.” -> Acabei de terminar. (acabar de + infinitive, Lesson 9)

Say Tenho comido only if you mean “I have been eating (regularly, lately)”. Já comi is “I’ve eaten (it’s done)”.

Time expressions that call for it

The perfeito composto lives with open, up-to-now spans: ultimamente (lately), nos últimos dias / meses / tempos (in recent days/months), cada vez mais (more and more), até agora (so far). A bounded past time - ontem, em 2010, na semana passada - blocks it and forces the perfeito simples: ontem trabalhei (not tenho trabalhado).

Aspectual periphrases II

Lesson 9 gave you estar a + infinitivo, costumar, começar a and acabar de. Here is the next set - each is a verb locked to a preposition (Lesson 42), followed by the infinitive. They let you say precisely how an action stands:

  • andar a + inf - be busy doing (habitually, these days): Ando a aprender guitarra. Overlaps closely with the perfeito composto.
  • continuar a + inf - still be doing: Continua a chover. (“It’s still raining.”)
  • deixar de + inf - stop / give up doing: Deixei de fumar. (Beware: deixar + infinitive without de means “let/allow”.)
  • voltar a + inf - do again: Voltei a ligar mais tarde. (“I called again later.”)
  • acabar por + inf - end up doing: Acabei por concordar. (“I ended up agreeing.”)
  • estar prestes a + inf - be about to: Estou prestes a sair.

Forms & patterns

The perfeito composto in full (model verb fazer):

Pessoapretérito perfeito composto
eutenho feito
tutens feito
você / ele / elatem feito
nóstemos feito
vocês / eles / elastêm feito

Contrast of meaning - the two tenses that share “have + participle” in English:

PortugueseMeaning
Já comi. (perfeito simples)I have eaten / I ate (done, finished).
Tenho comido bem. (perfeito composto)I have been eating well (lately, and still do).
Comi ontem. (perfeito simples)I ate yesterday (bounded time).
Ultimamente tenho comido fora. (perfeito composto)Lately I have been eating out (ongoing).

Aspectual periphrases II at a glance:

PeriphrasisSenseExample
andar a + infongoing habit, “these days”Ando a ler muito.
continuar a + infstill doingContinua a fazer frio.
deixar de + infstop doingDeixámos de ir lá.
voltar a + infdo againVoltou a estudar.
acabar por + infend up doingAcabei por aceitar.
estar prestes a + infabout toO filme está prestes a começar.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Ultimamente tenho dormido muito mal.Lately I have been sleeping very badly.
A Ana tem estudado todos os dias para o exame.Ana has been studying every day for the exam.
Nos últimos meses, o preço da casa tem subido.In recent months, house prices have been rising.
Nós temos trabalhado até tarde esta semana.We have been working late this week.
Eles têm feito um bom trabalho.They have been doing a good job.
Ando a aprender a tocar guitarra.I have been learning to play the guitar.
Continua a fazer frio lá fora.It is still cold outside.
Ele deixou de comer carne no ano passado.He stopped eating meat last year.
Depois de muito pensar, acabei por concordar.After a lot of thought, I ended up agreeing.
O comboio está prestes a partir.The train is about to leave.

Common mistakes

  • Tenho comido meaning “I have (just) eaten” -> Já comi / Acabei de comer - a single finished action is the perfeito simples (or acabar de), never the perfeito composto.
  • Já tens estado em Lisboa? (for “have you ever been?”) -> Já estiveste em Lisboa? - “ever / in your life” questions take the perfeito simples, not the composto.
  • Tenho trabalhado ontem. -> Trabalhei ontem. - a bounded past time (ontem) forbids the composto; use the simple past.
  • Elas têm chegadas tarde. -> Elas têm chegado tarde. - after ter the participle is invariable (Lesson 25); it never agrees.
  • Eles tem feito muito. -> Eles têm feito muito. - the third-person plural auxiliary is têm, with a circumflex, distinct from singular tem.
  • Ando estudar português. -> Ando a estudar português. - the periphrasis needs the linking a before the infinitive.
  • Deixei fumar. (meaning “I quit smoking”) -> Deixei de fumar. - “stop doing” is deixar de + infinitive; deixar + infinitive alone means “let/allow”.

Tips

  • One rule solves most cases: use tenho feito only for “have been doing (lately) and still”; for anything finished, use the perfeito simples - já fiz, fiz ontem, acabei de fazer.
  • Its natural companions are ultimamente, nos últimos dias/tempos, cada vez mais, até agora - open spans that touch the present. A closed time word cancels it.
  • The participle after ter never changes (Lesson 25): temos escrito, têm dito, tens visto.
  • Mind the spelling of the auxiliary out loud and on paper: tem (one person) vs têm (several).
  • andar a + infinitivo says the same “these days” idea - ando a fazer ginástica sits right next to tenho feito ginástica.
  • Treat the periphrases as fixed verb + preposition frames (Lesson 42): continuar a, deixar de, voltar a, acabar por.
  • In Brazil: the perfeito composto carries the same durative/iterative meaning, and both norms say já cheguei (never tenho chegado) for “I have arrived”; the composto is not the everyday present perfect it looks like.

B1 44 / 55

Reported speech

Discurso direto e indireto

In short

Reporting what someone said is discurso indireto: instead of quoting their exact words (discurso direto), you fold them into a subordinate clause after a verb like dizer, perguntar or pedir. Two things then change together. First, the linker: statements come in with que, yes/no questions with se, other questions with their question word, and commands with para + infinitivo. Second, if the reporting verb is in the past (disse, perguntou), the quoted verb usually shifts one step back in time - present becomes imperfeito, the perfeito simples becomes tinha + participle - and the “here and now” words (eu, agora, hoje, aqui, este) move to a “there and then” footing. Master those two moves and you can retell any conversation.

The rule

The two moves

Turning direct into indirect speech is always the same pair of operations, done in this order:

  1. Attach the quote to a reporting verb with the right linker. No more quotation marks, no more question-mark or exclamation-mark, and the word order becomes that of an ordinary statement.
  2. Backshift, but only after a past reporting verb. Move the verb tense one notch into the past, and adjust every word that pointed at the original speaker’s time, place and identity.

If the reporting verb is in the present (diz que, pergunta se), skip move 2 entirely - nothing shifts: Ele diz que está cansado keeps the present está.

Choosing the linker

The type of the original sentence decides how it plugs in:

  • Statement -> que: “Chove muito.” -> Ele disse que chovia muito.
  • Yes/no question -> se: “Tens fome?” -> Perguntou se eu tinha fome.
  • Wh-question -> its question word (quem, o que, onde, quando, porque, como, qual): “Onde moras?” -> Perguntou onde eu morava. Note that the direct-question é que (Lesson 15) disappears: Onde é que moras? still becomes perguntou onde eu morava.
  • Command or request -> para + infinitivo (often with the personal infinitive of Lesson 37): “Fecha a porta.” -> Pediu-me para fechar a porta.

The tense backshift (reporting verb in the past)

This is concordância dos tempos. Each original tense drops one step:

  • Presente -> pretérito imperfeito: “Trabalho aqui.” -> Disse que trabalhava ali.
  • Pretérito perfeito simples -> mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha + participle, Lesson 25): “Comprei o carro.” -> Disse que tinha comprado o carro.
  • Futuro / ir + infinitivo -> condicional / ia + infinitivo: “Farei isso.” -> Disse que faria isso.; “Vou sair.” -> Disse que ia sair.

Three tenses are already “back” as far as they go, so they do not move - copy them across unchanged: the imperfeito (estava a chover -> disse que estava a chover), the condicional (gostaria -> disse que gostaria), and the mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha feito -> disse que tinha feito).

Shifting the “here and now”

A quote is anchored to the moment it was spoken; once you retell it later, those anchors have to move. This is deixis, and English does exactly the same thing (“today” -> “that day”).

  • People: eu/tu -> ele/ela; nós -> eles; the possessive meu -> dele/dela, nosso -> deles.
  • Time: agora -> naquele momento / nessa altura; hoje -> naquele dia; ontem -> no dia anterior / na véspera; amanhã -> no dia seguinte; esta semana -> naquela semana.
  • Place and pointing: aqui -> ali / lá; este/esta -> aquele/aquela; the verb vir (“come”) often becomes ir (“go”).

Reporting questions

An indirect question is not a question - it is a statement with a question buried in it, so it takes statement punctuation (a full stop, never ”?”) and statement word order (no subject-verb inversion). Yes/no questions need se; everything else keeps its question word. Compare “Quando chega o comboio?” (direct, with inversion and ”?”) to Perguntei quando chegava o comboio (indirect, plain order, backshifted).

Reporting commands and requests

A direct order is an imperative (Lesson 19); reported, it becomes dizer/pedir/mandar + para + infinitive, or pedir/dizer que + present subjunctive (Lesson 33) after a present reporting verb. The para + infinitivo pattern is the everyday EP choice and needs no subjunctive: “Espera aqui!” -> Disse-me para esperar ali.

Forms & patterns

Which linker for which sentence type:

Original is a…LinkerReported frame
statementquedisse que…
yes/no questionseperguntou se…
wh-questionquestion wordperguntou onde / quando / o que…
command / requestpara + infinitivepediu (-me) para…

The tense backshift after a past reporting verb:

Direct speechReported speech
presente (trabalho)imperfeito (trabalhava)
perfeito simples (trabalhei)mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha trabalhado)
imperfeito (trabalhava)imperfeito - no change (trabalhava)
futuro / ir + inf (trabalharei / vou trabalhar)condicional / ia + inf (trabalharia / ia trabalhar)
condicional (trabalharia)condicional - no change
mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha trabalhado)no change

Moving the “here and now”:

DirectReported
agoranaquele momento / nessa altura
hojenaquele dia
ontemno dia anterior / na véspera
amanhãno dia seguinte
aquiali / lá
este / estaaquele / aquela
o meu (livro)o (livro) dele / dela

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
”Estou cansada,” disse a Ana. -> A Ana disse que estava cansada.”I’m tired,” said Ana. -> Ana said she was tired.
”Comprámos a casa,” afirmaram. -> Afirmaram que tinham comprado a casa.”We bought the house,” they stated. -> They stated they had bought the house.
”Vou chegar tarde,” avisou o Rui. -> O Rui avisou que ia chegar tarde.”I’m going to be late,” Rui warned. -> Rui warned that he was going to be late.
”Telefono-te amanhã,” prometeu ela. -> Ela prometeu que me telefonava no dia seguinte.”I’ll call you tomorrow,” she promised. -> She promised she would call me the next day.
”Onde é que moras?” -> Ele perguntou onde eu morava.”Where do you live?” -> He asked where I lived.
”Tens o meu livro?” -> Perguntou se eu tinha o livro dele.”Do you have my book?” -> He asked whether I had his book.
”Fecha a janela, por favor.” -> Pediu-me para fechar a janela.”Close the window, please.” -> He asked me to close the window.
”Já tínhamos jantado.” -> Disseram que já tinham jantado.”We had already had dinner.” -> They said they had already had dinner.
”Farei o meu melhor.” -> Garantiu que faria o seu melhor.”I’ll do my best.” -> He assured me he would do his best.
”Este restaurante é ótimo!” -> O Pedro comentou que aquele restaurante era ótimo.”This restaurant is great!” -> Pedro remarked that that restaurant was great.

Common mistakes

  • Ela disse que está cansada (reporting a past remark) -> Ela disse que estava cansada - after a past reporting verb the presente shifts to the imperfeito.
  • Perguntou onde é que eu morava -> Perguntou onde eu morava - an indirect question drops the direct-question é que and the inversion; it takes plain statement order.
  • Perguntou que eu tinha fome -> Perguntou se eu tinha fome - a yes/no question is introduced by se, never que.
  • Perguntei quando chegava o comboio? -> Perguntei quando chegava o comboio. - an indirect question ends in a full stop, not a question mark; it is a statement.
  • Disse que comprou a casa (careful written style) -> Disse que tinha comprado a casa - a finished event before the report backshifts to the mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha comprado).
  • Disse que chegará tarde -> Disse que chegaria tarde - after a past reporting verb the futuro becomes the condicional (as in Lesson 32).
  • Pediu que fechar a porta / Pediu para fecha a porta -> Pediu para fechar a porta - a reported command uses para + infinitivo (or pediu que + present subjunctive), never a bare imperative.

Tips

  • Work in the fixed order: linker first, then backshift. Swap in que / se / question word / para, strip the ”?” and the quotation marks, and only then move the tenses and the agora/hoje/aqui/este words.
  • Backshift only fires when the reporting verb is past. Report with a present verb (diz que, pergunta se) and everything stays exactly as spoken - a quick way to dodge the whole shift when you are unsure.
  • Memorise the three tenses that never move: imperfeito, condicional, mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha feito). If the original already uses one of them, copy it straight across.
  • In careful and written EP the perfeito simples backshifts to tinha + participle, but in everyday speech you will often hear it simply left in place (Disse que comprou a casa). Learn the full backshift, but do not be surprised by the spoken shortcut.
  • For “why” questions keep porque in the indirect form (Perguntou porque não vinhas), and remember o que stays o que (Perguntei o que ela queria) - do not add é que.
  • In Brazil: reported commands also use pedir/mandar + para + infinitivo, but the everyday clitic sits before the verb (Ele me disse que…), whereas neutral EP keeps enclisis (Ele disse-me que…).

B2 45 / 55

Advanced relatives: o qual and cujo

Relativos avançados: o qual e cujo

In short

Lesson 38 gave you the everyday relatives - que (the all-purpose one), quem (people, after a preposition) and onde (places). This lesson adds the two heavier relatives that careful, written European Portuguese leans on. O qual - with its forms a qual, os quais, as quais - is a longer, more explicit stand-in for que and quem: you reach for it after a preposition, to break an ambiguity, or inside a comma (non-restrictive) clause. Cujo - cuja, cujos, cujas - is the single word for “whose”, and it hides one sharp trap: it agrees not with the owner but with the thing owned, takes no article, and clamps straight onto the noun. Neither is optional polish: after a compound preposition EP refuses bare que, and cujo is the only correct way to relativize possession.

The rule

O qual has four forms and agrees with its antecedent

O qual is really the article o/a/os/as welded to qual, so it carries the gender and number of the noun it points back to (its antecedent):

SingularPlural
Masculineo qualos quais
Femininea qualas quais

O senhor a quem escrevi respondeu uses quem; the more formal o senhor ao qual escrevi respondeu uses o qual, and qual becomes a qual, os quais, as quais to match whatever it refers to.

When to use o qual instead of que

Bare que is still the default for a simple subject or object relative (o livro que comprei). Switch to o qual in three situations:

  1. After a preposition - and obligatorily after a compound preposition. With the simple prepositions de, em, por, a, com + a thing, both que and o qual occur, but after multi-word prepositions (ao lado de, por causa de, graças a, através de, dentro de, a respeito de) EP requires the qual/quem form and never bare que:
    • o motivo pelo qual vim - the reason I came.
    • o prédio ao lado do qual moro - the building next to which I live. (never ao lado de que)
  2. To remove ambiguity. Because o qual agrees, it can point cleanly at one of two possible antecedents where que would be vague: A irmã do médico, a qual vive em Lisboa, … (a qual, feminine = the sister) versus o qual, … (= the doctor).
  3. In non-restrictive (comma) clauses in careful or written register: O relatório, o qual foi divulgado ontem, provocou reações.

The preposition fuses with o qual, exactly like with an article

Every contraction you learned in Lesson 2 (and por -> pelo from Lesson 28) applies here unchanged, because o qual begins with an article:

Preposition +o quala qualos quaisas quais
dedo qualda qualdos quaisdas quais
emno qualna qualnos quaisnas quais
aao qualà qualaos quaisàs quais
porpelo qualpela qualpelos quaispelas quais

So it is na qual, pelo qual, à qual - never em a qual, por o qual, a a qual.

People after a preposition: quem or o qual, never que

For a person after a preposition, EP uses quem (Lesson 38) or, more formally, o qual - but not bare que:

  • o amigo com quem falei = o amigo com o qual falei - the friend I spoke to.
  • NOT o amigo com que falei (heard regionally, but outside the standard).

Cujo: the one word for “whose”

Cujo joins a possessor to a possessed thing and translates “whose” or “of which”. It has four forms and one iron rule: it agrees with the thing possessed, not the owner, carries no article, and sits immediately before that noun:

SingularPlural
Masculinecujocujos
Femininecujacujas
  • o escritor cujos livros li - the writer whose books I read. (cujos agrees with livros, not with escritor.)
  • a empresa cujo diretor conheço - the company whose director I know.
  • um problema cuja solução ninguém encontra - a problem whose solution nobody can find.

A preposition can precede cujo; it still agrees with the possessed noun and never contracts, since there is no article to fuse with:

  • a casa em cujo jardim brincávamos - the house in whose garden we used to play.
  • a autora a cujo estilo me habituei - the author whose style I got used to.
  • o tema sobre cujas implicações discutimos - the topic whose implications we discussed.

Forms & patterns

Choosing the relative after a preposition:

AntecedentSimple prepositionCompound preposition
thingde/em/por/a/com que or o qualonly o qual (do qual, ao lado do qual)
personquem or o qualonly quem / o qual
possession (“whose”)cujo (+ noun)prep + cujo (a cujo, em cujo)

Cujo agrees rightward - look at the noun that follows it:

OwnerPossessed nounResult
o autoros livros (m. pl)o autor cujos livros
a cidadeas praias (f. pl)a cidade cujas praias
o alunoa nota (f. sg)o aluno cuja nota

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
A empresa para a qual trabalho fica no Porto.The company I work for is in Porto.
Estas são as razões pelas quais desistimos.These are the reasons why we gave up.
O comité, o qual se reúne à sexta, decidiu adiar.The committee, which meets on Fridays, decided to postpone.
É um assunto a respeito do qual nada sei.It’s a matter about which I know nothing.
Falei com a médica com quem já te tinhas consultado.I spoke to the doctor you had already seen.
O romancista cujos contos adoro vem cá amanhã.The novelist whose short stories I love is coming tomorrow.
Vivo numa rua cujo nome ninguém sabe pronunciar.I live on a street whose name nobody can pronounce.
A ponte sob a qual passámos é do século XIX.The bridge we passed under is from the 19th century.
Conheço o político a cujas promessas ninguém liga.I know the politician whose promises nobody heeds.
A casa em cujo sótão dormíamos foi vendida.The house in whose attic we used to sleep was sold.

Common mistakes

  • Que after a compound preposition: a razão por causa de que faltei -> por causa da qual - multi-word prepositions demand the qual form and its contraction.
  • An article after cujo: o homem cujo o carro bateu -> cujo carro - cujo already contains the idea of the article; nothing may sit between it and the noun.
  • Making cujo agree with the owner: a mulher cujo filhos vieram -> cujos filhos - it agrees with filhos (m. pl), never with mulher.
  • Using de que / de quem for the “whose” of a thing: a casa de que as janelas estão partidas -> cujas janelas - possession of a thing is always cujo.
  • Dropping the contraction: o fim por o qual lutamos / a sala em a qual entrámos -> pelo qual, na qual.
  • Bare que + preposition for a person: o colega a que pedi ajuda -> a quem (or ao qual).
  • Scattering o qual where plain que is natural: O bolo o qual fiz -> que fiz - without a preposition, in a restrictive clause, que is the correct default; o qual there sounds stilted.
  • In Brazil: the written norm is identical - o qual and cujo work exactly the same way. What differs is only casual speech, where Brazilian Portuguese often avoids both with a resumptive pattern (o autor que eu li os livros dele); that is nonstandard on both sides of the Atlantic, so keep cujo in writing.

Tips

  • After a preposition, ask two questions. Thing or person? Thing -> o/a qual (or bare que with the simple prepositions); person -> quem (or o qual). Simple or compound preposition? Compound -> always the qual/quem form, never que.
  • Cujo looks forward, not back: it takes its ending from the noun that follows it and snaps straight onto it, with no o/a in between - cujo carro, cujas ideias.
  • Contract on autopilot. Any preposition that fuses with o/a/os/as fuses with o qual too - do qual, no qual, pela qual, à qual - but cujo has no article, so it stays loose: a cujo, de cujo, em cujo.
  • Keep o qual in reserve. Plain que remains the everyday relative; reach for o qual only to (a) follow a preposition, (b) break an ambiguity between two possible antecedents, or (c) open a comma clause in careful writing.

B2 46 / 55

Imperfect subjunctive

Pretérito imperfeito do conjuntivo

In short

The present subjunctive (Lesson 33) covers wishes, doubts and emotions anchored in the present or future: Espero que venhas. The pretérito imperfeito do conjuntivo is its past-and-hypothetical twin. You reach for it in three everyday situations: when the same trigger sits in a past or conditional clause (Queria que viesses - “I’d like you to come”), when you build an unreal-present “if” (Se eu tivesse tempo, ia contigo - “If I had time, I’d go with you”), and after como se (“as if”). It is also the tense inside the fixed wish quem me dera (“if only…”). The good news: you do not memorise a new irregular list. This tense is built mechanically from a form you already produced in Lessons 20-22 - the eles/elas preterite - so if you can say foram, tiveram, fizeram, you can build every form here.

The rule

How to build it: from the eles-form of the preterite

Take the 3rd person plural of the pretérito perfeito simples (the eles/elas form, Lessons 20-22), remove the ending -ram, and add one set of endings to what is left:

  • -sse, -sses, -sse, -ssemos, -ssem

The stem you get this way is the same for regular and irregular verbs, which is why the irregulars cost you nothing extra. One spelling point: the nós form always carries a written accent on the vowel just before -ssemos (falássemos, comêssemos, fôssemos).

Regular verbs

Infinitiveeles-preteriteStemimperfect subjunctive (eu)
falarfalaramfala-falasse
comercomeramcome-comesse
partirpartiramparti-partisse

Full pattern for falar: falasse, falasses, falasse, falássemos, falassem.

Irregular verbs: same trick, irregular stem

Because the preterite stem is irregular, so is this tense - but you already learned those preterites, so just chop -ram and add the endings:

Infinitiveeles-preteriteimperfect subjunctive (eu)
ser / irforamfosse
tertiveramtivesse
estarestiveramestivesse
fazerfizeramfizesse
dizerdisseramdissesse
poderpuderampudesse
quererquiseramquisesse
virvieramviesse
pôrpuserampusesse
darderamdesse
verviramvisse
sabersouberamsoubesse
haverhouveramhouvesse

When you use it

1. A subjunctive trigger in the past or conditional. Every trigger from Lessons 34-37 (wish, emotion, influence, doubt, impersonal expressions) demands the present subjunctive when the main verb is present, and the imperfect subjunctive when the main verb is past or conditional. The tenses simply shift back together:

  • Quero que venhas -> Queria que viesses. (I want you to come -> I wanted / would like you to come.)
  • É importante que ele saiba -> Era importante que ele soubesse.
  • Duvido que seja verdade -> Duvidava que fosse verdade.

2. Unreal present (“second conditional”). For a situation contrary to fact now, use se + imperfect subjunctive in the if-clause, and the imperfeito or the conditional (Lesson 32) in the result:

  • Se eu tivesse dinheiro, comprava / compraria uma casa. - If I had money, I’d buy a house.
  • Se fosses mais cedo, apanhavas o comboio. - If you left earlier, you’d catch the train.

Portuguese, unlike English, never puts the conditional after se: the se-clause takes the subjunctive, the result clause takes the conditional or imperfeito. The full three-type system is Lesson 49; this is the middle one.

3. como se (“as if”) always takes the imperfect (or pluperfect) subjunctive, because the comparison is unreal:

  • Ele fala como se soubesse tudo. - He talks as if he knew everything.
  • Trata-me como se fosse uma criança. - He treats me as if I were a child.

4. Wishes: quem me dera. The fixed exclamative quem me dera (“if only…”, literally “who would give me”) takes an infinitive or que + imperfect subjunctive:

  • Quem me dera saber cantar! - I wish I could sing!
  • Quem me dera que fosse verdade. - If only it were true.

Forms & patterns

The endings, added to the eles-preterite stem (after dropping -ram):

PersonEndingfalarser / irter
eu-ssefalassefossetivesse
tu-ssesfalassesfossestivesses
você / ele / ela-ssefalassefossetivesse
nós-ssemosfalássemosfôssemostivéssemos
vocês / eles / elas-ssemfalassemfossemtivessem

Trigger-tense agreement, at a glance:

Main clauseSubjunctive in the subordinate clauseExample
present / futurepresent subjunctive (Lesson 33)Espero que venhas.
past / conditionalimperfect subjunctiveEsperava que viesses.
se (unreal present)imperfect subjunctiveSe viesses, ficava contente.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Queria que ficasses mais um pouco.I’d like you to stay a little longer.
Se eu fosse a ti, não dizia nada.If I were you, I wouldn’t say anything.
Ela pediu que nós chegássemos cedo.She asked us to arrive early.
Era pena que ele não pudesse vir.It was a shame he couldn’t come.
Comportas-te como se tivesses vinte anos.You act as if you were twenty.
Se soubesse a resposta, dizia-ta.If I knew the answer, I’d tell you.
Quem me dera que as férias durassem mais!If only the holidays lasted longer!
Duvidava que aquilo fosse boa ideia.I doubted that was a good idea.
Precisávamos de alguém que falasse alemão.We needed someone who spoke German.
Se houvesse mais tempo, acabávamos o projeto.If there were more time, we’d finish the project.

Common mistakes

  • Queria que tu venhas -> Queria que tu viesses - a past or conditional main verb pulls the subjunctive back to the imperfect; the present subjunctive clashes with queria.
  • Se eu tinha dinheiro, comprava… -> Se eu tivesse dinheiro, comprava… - an unreal-present if takes the imperfect subjunctive, not the indicative imperfeito.
  • Se eu seria rico… / Se eu teria tempo… -> Se eu fosse rico / Se eu tivesse tempo - never put the conditional after se; the se-clause is subjunctive.
  • que ele fazesse / que ele tenesse -> que ele fizesse / tivesse - build the stem from the eles-preterite (fizeram, tiveram), not from the infinitive.
  • que nós fossemos -> que nós fôssemos - the nós form needs the written accent before -ssemos (fôssemos, tivéssemos, falássemos).
  • Ele fala como se sabe tudo -> como se soubesse tudo - como se always governs the imperfect subjunctive, never the indicative.
  • Quem me dera que é verdade -> Quem me dera que fosse verdade - quem me dera is a wish, so it takes the imperfect subjunctive.

Tips

  • The one shortcut that gives you the whole tense: say the eles/elas preterite (foram, tiveram, fizeram, disseram, puderam), drop -ram, add -sse. No separate irregular table to learn.
  • Match the tenses across the sentence: present trigger -> present subjunctive, past or conditional trigger -> imperfect subjunctive. Quero que venhas / Queria que viesses.
  • For an unreal present, both halves step back: se + imperfect subjunctive, then imperfeito or conditional in the result (Se pudesse, ia / iria contigo). The complete conditional-type system is Lesson 49.
  • Burn in the rule that surprises English and Spanish speakers less but trips beginners: no conditional and no future after se. The se-clause is always subjunctive here.
  • Learn quem me dera as a ready-made way to say “I wish / if only”: Quem me dera saber (+ infinitive) or Quem me dera que ficasses (+ imperfect subjunctive). Oxalá works the same way for wishes.
  • Always accent the nós form: falássemos, comêssemos, partíssemos, fôssemos, tivéssemos, fizéssemos.
  • Brazilian Portuguese uses exactly the same forms and the same uses for this tense; the only real EP/BP gap in these sentences is clitic placement (Lesson 30), not the subjunctive itself.

B2 47 / 55

The gerund

O gerúndio

In short

The gerund is the single invariable -ndo form: falando, comendo, partindo. The first thing to unlearn is the reflex that it means “-ing” as in English: in European Portuguese the gerund is not the everyday progressive - “I am eating” is estou a comer (estar a + infinitivo, Lesson 9), never estou comendo, which is Brazilian. What the EP gerund really does is compress a whole adverbial clause - cause, condition, time, manner - into one word, plus mark gradual change with ir and vir. Alongside it live three look-alike infinitive periphrases, estar para, ir a and vir a, that a B2 learner keeps confusing with the plain future.

The rule

Forming the gerund

Drop the -r of the infinitive and add -ndo. This is completely regular, even for verbs that are irregular everywhere else:

falar -> falando, comer -> comendo, partir -> partindo, pôr -> pondo, ter -> tendo, ser -> sendo, ir -> indo, vir -> vindo. The form never changes for person, gender or number - there is no falandos or falanda.

For an action completed before the main verb, use the compound gerund tendo + past participle: tendo falado, tendo comido, tendo posto.

What the gerund does (and does not do) in EP

It does not build the progressive. Compare:

  • Estou a ler. = I am reading. (EP: estar a + infinitivo)
  • Estou lendo. = Brazilian only.

Its real home is the reduced adverbial clause (a oração gerundiva): the gerund replaces a conjunction plus a finite verb, and the reader recovers the relationship from context.

  • Cause: Estando cansado, ficou em casa. = Being tired, he stayed home. (= como estava cansado)
  • Condition: Correndo, ainda apanhas o autocarro. = If you run, you’ll still catch the bus. (= se correres)
  • Time / simultaneity: Encontrei-a lendo no jardim. = I found her reading in the garden. (= enquanto lia)
  • Manner: Saiu batendo com a porta. = He left slamming the door.
  • Anteriority (compound): Tendo acabado o relatório, enviou-o. = Having finished the report, he sent it.

If the gerund clause has its own subject, state it right after the gerund and set the clause off with a comma: Estando o professor doente, a aula foi adiada.

Gradual change: ir and vir + gerund

Two periphrases with the gerund survive fully in EP because estar a + infinitivo cannot carry their meaning of gradual, cumulative change over time:

  • ir + gerúndio - a process unfolding little by little: Vou percebendo cada vez mais. (I am gradually understanding more and more.)
  • vir + gerúndio - “has been …-ing”, building up to now: A situação vem melhorando. (The situation has been improving.)

But with estar, ficar and andar, EP uses a + infinitivo, not the gerund: ficou a olhar (not ficou olhando), anda a estudar (not anda estudando).

The three companion periphrases: estar para, ir a, vir a

These use the infinitive, not the gerund, but they cluster here because they express the same kind of circumstance and are easy to mix up with the plain near future ir + infinitivo (Lesson 11):

  • estar para + infinitivo - on the point of, about to (often with reluctance): O comboio está para chegar. (The train is about to arrive.) Não estou para brincadeiras. (I’m not in the mood for nonsense.)
  • ir a + infinitivo - caught in the very act, “was just about to”: Ia a sair quando o telefone tocou. (I was just leaving when the phone rang.) Note the a: without it, ia sair would read as a past-in-the-future.
  • vir a + infinitivo - to come to / eventually do: Veio a saber a verdade. (He eventually learned the truth.) Se vieres a precisar, diz. (If you should come to need it, say so.)

Forms & patterns

Forming the gerund (simple and compound):

InfinitiveGerundCompound gerund
falarfalandotendo falado
comercomendotendo comido
partirpartindotendo partido
pôrpondotendo posto
tertendo-
virvindotendo vindo

Circumstantial values of the gerund clause:

ValueGerund clauseFinite paraphrase
CauseEstando cansado, ficou em casa.Como estava cansado…
ConditionCorrendo, apanhas o autocarro.Se correres…
Time / simultaneityEncontrei-a lendo.… enquanto lia.
MannerSaiu batendo com a porta.Saiu e bateu com a porta.
AnteriorityTendo acabado, saiu.Depois de acabar / quando acabou…

Gerund and companion periphrases:

PeriphrasisMeaningExample
ir + gerúndiogradual, ongoing changeVou percebendo aos poucos.
vir + gerúndio”has been …-ing”, up to nowA situação vem melhorando.
estar para + infinitivoabout to, on the verge (often reluctant)Está para chover.
ir a + infinitivoin the very act ofIa a atravessar quando…
vir a + infinitivoto come to / eventually doVeio a tornar-se médico.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Estando doente, não foi trabalhar.Being ill, he didn’t go to work.
Correndo, ainda apanhas o comboio.If you run, you’ll still catch the train.
Ele saiu batendo com a porta.He left slamming the door.
Tendo acabado o trabalho, foram almoçar.Having finished the work, they went to lunch.
A economia vem melhorando aos poucos.The economy has been gradually improving.
Vou percebendo cada vez melhor.I am gradually understanding better and better.
O comboio está para chegar.The train is about to arrive.
Ia a sair quando o telefone tocou.I was just leaving when the phone rang.
Mais tarde, vim a saber a verdade.Later, I came to learn the truth.
Passei a tarde a estudar, ouvindo música.I spent the afternoon studying, listening to music.

Common mistakes

  • Estou comendo agora. -> Estou a comer agora. - EP builds the progressive with estar a + infinitivo; estar + gerund is Brazilian.
  • Ele ficou olhando para mim. -> Ele ficou a olhar para mim. - with ficar, estar and andar, EP takes a + infinitivo, never the gerund.
  • Vou a comprar pão (as a plan) -> Vou comprar pão - the near future is ir + infinitive with no a; ir a + infinitive means “in the very act of”.
  • Ia saindo quando… (meaning “I was just leaving”) -> Ia a sair quando… - the “caught in the act” reading needs ir a + infinitivo; bare ia + gerund reads as Brazilian.
  • Estando doente a aula foi adiada. -> Estando o professor doente, a aula foi adiada. - when the gerund clause has its own subject, name it and mark the clause with a comma.
  • Ela partiu deixando a porta aberto. -> … a porta aberta - only the gerund is frozen; words it governs still agree (porta is feminine).
  • Duas pessoas comendos -> comendo - the gerund never takes a plural or feminine ending; it is one fixed form.

Tips

  • Build any gerund the same way - infinitive minus -r plus -ndo - even for irregular verbs (pôr -> pondo, ter -> tendo, vir -> vindo). It is invariable.
  • Reach for the gerund mainly in reduced adverbial clauses; it compresses “como / se / quando + finite verb” into one word and reads well in writing.
  • Keep the plain “what I’m doing now” as estar a + infinitivo (Lesson 9); save the gerund for circumstance, not for the ordinary progressive.
  • EP still uses ir + gerúndio and vir + gerúndio for gradual change (vou percebendo, vem aumentando), but estar / ficar / andar take a + infinitivo.
  • Separate the three look-alikes: ir + infinitivo = near future; ir a + infinitivo = caught in the act; a + infinitivo = plain ongoing action.
  • In Brazil: the gerund is the normal progressive (estou comendo, ficou olhando) and gerund periphrases are far more frequent, so Brazilian text shows many -ndo forms where EP writes a + infinitivo.

B2 48 / 55

Past unreal: condicional composto and MQP composto do conjuntivo

Condicional composto e mais-que-perfeito composto do conjuntivo

In short

Two compound tenses that together express the past that did not happen - the “third conditional” of Se tivesse sabido, teria dito (“If I had known, I would have said”). Both are built the way every compound tense in this course is built - an auxiliary (ter) plus the past participle of Lesson 24 - and the only new thing is which form of ter you put in front:

  • condicional composto = ter in the conditional (Lesson 32: teria) + participle -> “would have done”.
  • mais-que-perfeito composto do conjuntivo = ter in the imperfect subjunctive (Lesson 46: tivesse) + participle -> “had done”, as a hypothesis.

They are the natural partners of the se-clause system you meet in full next lesson, but each also earns its keep alone - for regret, for conjecture, and after any subjunctive trigger that points back in time.

The rule

The condicional composto - teria feito

Take ter in the conditional (teria, terias, teria, teríamos, teriam) and add the participle. It has four everyday jobs:

  • Past unreal result - what would have happened: Com mais tempo, teria acabado o projeto. - With more time, I would have finished the project.
  • Regret and reproach - “I would have…/ you could have…”: Eu teria feito diferente. / Terias podido avisar-me! - You could have warned me!
  • Conjecture about the past (“must have / would have been”): Teriam sido umas cem pessoas. - There must have been about a hundred people.
  • Future-in-the-past in reported speech (Lesson 44): Ele disse que teria terminado até sexta. - He said he would have finished by Friday.

The MQP composto do conjuntivo - tivesse feito

Take ter in the imperfect subjunctive (tivesse, tivesses, tivesse, tivéssemos, tivessem) and add the participle. It is the subjunctive’s past-perfect, so it turns up wherever a past hypothesis sits in subjunctive territory:

  • The se-clause of a past-unreal condition: Se eu tivesse estudado (the full three-way system is Lesson 49).
  • After any subjunctive trigger, pointing back: Foi pena que não tivesses vindo. / Embora tivesse chovido, saímos. / Duvidava que ele tivesse mentido.
  • Wishes about the unchangeable past: Quem me dera que eu tivesse ficado! / Oxalá tivesse dito a verdade.

The pair in action

The classic past-unreal sentence locks the two together: se + tivesse + participle (the condition) with teria + participle (the result). Either half can come first; put a comma after the se-clause when it leads:

  • Se tu me tivesses avisado, eu teria ido. - If you had warned me, I would have gone.
  • Eu teria ido se tu me tivesses avisado. - same meaning, order reversed.

The two halves are not interchangeable: the se-clause takes tivesse, the result takes teria - never the other way round. You can also mix a past cause with a present result (Se tivesse nascido rico, hoje seria feliz - “if I had been born rich, today I’d be happy”), which Lesson 49 lays out in full.

Colloquial EP (and BP) note. In everyday speech, European Portuguese very often swaps one or both compound forms for the mais-que-perfeito composto do indicativo (Lesson 25, tinha feito): Se tivesse sabido, tinha ido. That is normal spoken register - keep the full teria ido for writing and careful speech. Brazilian Portuguese does the same and leans on it even more.

haver as a formal auxiliary

As with every compound tense, haver may replace ter: houvesse feito (subjunctive), haveria feito (conditional). Both are literary; ter is the everyday default.

Forms & patterns

ter - the two auxiliary forms you need:

Personconditional (teria)imperfect subjunctive (tivesse)
euteriativesse
tuteriastivesses
ele / vocêteriativesse
nósteríamostivéssemos
eles / vocêsteriamtivessem

A model verb, fazer (participle feito), in both tenses - the participle never moves:

Personcondicional compostoMQP composto do conjuntivo
euteria feitotivesse feito
tuterias feitotivesses feito
ele / vocêteria feitotivesse feito
nósteríamos feitotivéssemos feito
eles / vocêsteriam feitotivessem feito

The irregular participles from Lesson 24 come straight back: teria/tivesse dito, visto, posto, aberto, escrito, ganho, pago.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Se tivesse acordado a horas, não teria perdido o comboio.If I had woken up on time, I wouldn’t have missed the train.
Nós teríamos ajudado, mas ninguém nos disse nada.We would have helped, but nobody told us anything.
Terias gostado do concerto de ontem.You would have liked yesterday’s concert.
Foi pena que eles não tivessem ficado mais tempo.It was a shame they hadn’t stayed longer.
Embora tivesse estudado muito, não passou.Although he had studied a lot, he didn’t pass.
Ela agiu como se nada tivesse acontecido.She acted as if nothing had happened.
Quem me dera que tu tivesses vindo à festa!I wish you had come to the party!
Àquela hora, já teriam saído de casa.By that time, they would have already left home.

Common mistakes

  • teria in the se-clause: Se eu teria estudado… -> Se eu tivesse estudado… - the se-condition takes the subjunctive (tivesse); teria belongs in the result clause.
  • Indicative after a subjunctive trigger: Embora tinha chovido -> Embora tivesse chovido - triggers like embora, foi pena que, como se, duvidava que demand the subjunctive form, not tinha.
  • Making the participle agree: Elas teriam chegadas. -> Elas teriam chegado - with ter the participle is invariable, always the -o form.
  • Building “would have” with ir: Iria ter feito -> Teria feito - “would have + participle” is simply the conditional of ter + participle; there is no iria here.
  • Wrong participle shape: tivesse fazido -> tivesse feito - irregular participles keep their Lesson 24 form (feito, dito, visto, posto).
  • Backshift slip in reported speech: Prometeu que terá acabado (a future-perfect in a past frame) -> Prometeu que teria acabado - a past reporting verb pulls the “future perfect” back to the condicional composto.

Tips

  • The recipe is fixed: choose the ter form, glue on the participle. teria + participle = “would have”; tivesse + participle = “had” (hypothetical). Everything else is the participle you already know from Lesson 24.
  • In a se-sentence say the halves as a locked pair: se… tivesse / main … teria. If you find yourself putting teria after se, stop and switch it.
  • Reach for the condicional composto for regret and reproach on its own (“I would have…”, “you could have…”), not only inside se-sentences.
  • In speech you will hear - and may use - tinha feito (Lesson 25) in place of teria feito; recognise it as the colloquial stand-in, but write the full form.
  • Keep haver (houvesse / haveria + participle) for deliberately formal or literary writing.

B2 49 / 55

Se-clauses: the three conditionals

Orações condicionais com se: os três tipos

In short

A conditional sentence pairs an if-clause (the condition) with a main clause (the result), and Portuguese sorts them into three types by how real the condition is: real (it may well happen), present-unreal (contrary to fact now, or a remote future), and past-unreal (it did not happen). Each type locks the two clauses into a fixed pair of tenses - and the single biggest surprise for English speakers is that a real future condition takes the future subjunctive after se (Lesson 36), where English just uses the present: Se tiveres tempo (“If you have time”). Get the pairings automatic and you can hypothesise, promise, regret and speculate with confidence. This lesson assembles tools you already have: the future subjunctive (#37), the imperfect subjunctive (#47), the conditional (#33) and the past-unreal pair (#49).

The rule

Type 1 - Real conditions (open or likely)

Use this when the condition is a genuine possibility - a general truth or a real future.

  • General truth / habit: se + present indicative, main clause in the present. Se aqueces gelo, derrete. (If you heat ice, it melts.)
  • Real future: se + futuro do conjuntivo, main clause in the present, future or imperative. Se chover amanhã, ficamos em casa. (If it rains tomorrow, we’ll stay home.) Se puderes, telefona-me. (If you can, call me.)

This is the make-or-break EP point. English keeps the present tense after “if” even for the future (“if you have time”, “if it rains”); Portuguese switches to the future subjunctive: tiveres, chover, puderes, fizeres. Never a future indicative and never a present subjunctive after se.

Type 2 - Present-unreal (hypothetical)

Use this for a situation contrary to present fact, or a remote/imagined future: se + pretérito imperfeito do conjuntivo, result in the condicional.

  • Se tivesse dinheiro, compraria um carro. (If I had money, I would buy a car - but I don’t.)
  • Se fosses mais cedo, apanhavas o comboio. (If you left earlier, you’d catch the train.)

In everyday European Portuguese the imperfeito do indicativo very commonly replaces the conditional in the result clause: comprava for compraria, apanhavas for apanharias. Both are correct; the conditional is the more formal or written choice, the imperfeito the more spoken one.

Type 3 - Past-unreal (it did not happen)

Use this to talk about a past that turned out otherwise - regret, reproach, speculation: se + pretérito mais-que-perfeito composto do conjuntivo (tivesse + participle), result in the condicional composto (teria + participle).

  • Se tivesses estudado, terias passado no exame. (If you had studied, you would have passed the exam.)
  • Se não tivesse chovido, tínhamos ido à praia. (If it hadn’t rained, we would have gone to the beach.)

Here too, the compound indicative pluperfect (tinha + participle) often stands in for the teria form in speech: tínhamos ido alongside teríamos ido.

Mixing the timeframes

The condition and the result do not have to share a tense. A very natural pattern is a past condition with a present result - se + MQP do conjuntivo -> condicional simples:

  • Se tivesse estudado medicina, agora seria médico. (If I had studied medicine, I’d be a doctor now.)

Beyond se: other conditional connectors

Se is the workhorse, but caso, desde que (provided that), a não ser que / a menos que (unless) also introduce conditions - and, unlike se, they take the present subjunctive, not the future subjunctive:

  • Caso precises de ajuda, diz. (Should you need help, say so.) - Caso precises, never Caso precisares.
  • Levo o carro, a não ser que prefiras andar a pé. (I’ll take the car, unless you’d rather walk.)

Forms & patterns

The three types at a glance:

TypeIf-clause (se …)Result clauseExample
1. Realpresent ind. / futuro do conjuntivopresent / future / imperativeSe tiveres tempo, ajuda-me.
2. Present-unrealimperfeito do conjuntivocondicional (or imperfeito do ind.)Se tivesse tempo, ajudava-te.
3. Past-unrealMQP composto do conjuntivocondicional composto (or MQP do ind.)Se tivesse tido tempo, teria ajudado.

The two se-clause tenses for four key irregular verbs (these are the forms you actually build conditions on):

VerbFuturo do conjuntivo (type 1)Imperfeito do conjuntivo (type 2)
ser / irfor, fores, for, formos, foremfosse, fosses, fosse, fôssemos, fossem
tertiver, tiveres, tiver, tivermos, tiveremtivesse, tivesses, tivesse, tivéssemos, tivessem
poderpuder, puderes, puder, pudermos, puderempudesse, pudesses, pudesse, pudéssemos, pudessem
fazerfizer, fizeres, fizer, fizermos, fizeremfizesse, fizesses, fizesse, fizéssemos, fizessem

For type 3, take the ter imperfeito do conjuntivo above and add a participle: tivesse feito, tivesses estudado, tivéssemos ido.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Se chover, ficamos em casa.If it rains, we’ll stay home.
Se tiveres um minuto, liga-me.If you have a minute, call me.
Se eu fosse rico, viajava pelo mundo.If I were rich, I would travel the world.
Se ela soubesse a verdade, ficaria furiosa.If she knew the truth, she would be furious.
Se tivesses estudado, terias passado no exame.If you had studied, you would have passed the exam.
Se não tivesse chovido, tínhamos ido à praia.If it hadn’t rained, we would have gone to the beach.
Se puderes, traz o guarda-chuva.If you can, bring the umbrella.
Se eu tivesse nascido em Lisboa, agora falaria melhor.If I had been born in Lisbon, I’d speak better now.
Caso precises de ajuda, diz.Should you need help, say so.
Se fizer sol amanhã, vamos ao parque.If it’s sunny tomorrow, we’ll go to the park.

Common mistakes

  • Present indicative after se for the future: Se tens tempo amanhã -> Se tiveres tempo amanhã - a real future condition takes the futuro do conjuntivo, not the present.
  • Future indicative after se: Se terei tempo -> Se tiver tempo - se never governs the future indicative; use the future subjunctive.
  • Conditional inside the se-clause: Se compraria uma casa, se tivesse dinheiro -> Se tivesse dinheiro, compraria uma casa - the conditional belongs in the result; the se-clause takes the imperfeito do conjuntivo.
  • Imperfeito do indicativo in a type-2 condition: Se tinha dinheiro, comprava (as a hypothesis) -> Se tivesse dinheiro, comprava - the condition needs the imperfeito do conjuntivo (tivesse), not the indicative (tinha).
  • Present subjunctive after se: Se tenha tempo -> Se tiver (future) or Se tenho (general truth) - the present subjunctive never follows se.
  • Simple past tenses for a past-unreal: Se estudavas, passavas (as a regret about what did not happen) -> Se tivesses estudado, terias passado - past-unreal needs the compound forms.

Tips

  • Learn each type as a locked pair: real future = se + futuro do conjuntivo -> present/imperative; present-unreal = se + imperfeito do conjuntivo -> condicional; past-unreal = se + MQP do conjuntivo -> condicional composto.
  • Drill the one habit English never prepares you for: after se about the future, use tiver, fores, puder, fizer, chover - the future subjunctive - where English uses a plain present.
  • In real EP speech the imperfeito do indicativo freely replaces the conditional in a type-2 result: Se pudesse, ia is as natural as Se pudesse, iria; the same holds for tinha ido vs teria ido in type 3.
  • Mix freely when the logic demands it: a past condition can carry a present result - Se tivesse aceitado o emprego, agora estaria em Berlim.
  • Keep the connectors straight: se takes the future subjunctive, but caso, desde que, a não ser que take the present subjunctive - Caso chova, never Caso chover.
  • In Brazil the three structures are identical; the audible difference is again the result clause, where the imperfeito do indicativo (Se pudesse, ia) dominates spoken usage even more than in Portugal (Lesson 10).

B2 50 / 55

Combined clitics: mo, to, lho

Contração dos clíticos: mo, to, lho

In short

When an indirect object pronoun (me, te, lhe…) and a direct object pronoun (o, a, os, as) both hang on the same verb, European Portuguese does not line them up as two words - it fuses them into one: deu-me o livro plus “it” becomes deu-mo (“he gave it to me”). These contractions - mo, to, lho, no-lo, vo-lo and their feminine and plural mates - are a hallmark of careful EP. The order is always indirect first, direct second, the opposite of how English says “give it to me”. Get that order and the small contraction table under your belt and a whole layer of natural Portuguese opens up.

The rule

The two pronouns fuse

You already met the two families in Lesson 29: the indirect (dative) me, te, lhe, nos, vos, lhes and the direct (accusative) o, a, os, as. Put both on one verb and they contract. The indirect clitic keeps only its consonant onset and the direct clitic supplies the vowel:

  • me + o -> mo (“it to me”); te + a -> ta (“it/her to you”); lhe + os -> lhos (“them to him”).

The direct part carries the gender and number of the thing referred to, exactly as the plain o / a / os / as would: dá-mo (a masculine thing), dá-ma (a feminine thing), dá-mos / dá-mas (plural).

Indirect before direct - always

English puts the direct object first (“lend it to me”), so English speakers reach for a o-me order that does not exist. Portuguese welds them the other way round: dative + accusative. Think of it as “to-me + it” -> mo, never “it + to-me”.

The nos / vos forms take a hyphen

me, te, lhe, lhes fuse into a single written word (mo, to, lho). But nos and vos end in -s, and that -s pulls in the -lo / -la allomorph you saw in Lesson 31: the direct clitic becomes -lo, -la, -los, -las and the pair is written with a hyphen:

  • nos + o -> no-lo; vos + as -> vo-las.

Note that lhe and lhes both contract to the same forms - lho, lha, lhos, lhas - so dei-lho can mean “I gave it to him”, “to her”, or “to them”; context decides.

Placement is the ordinary clitic rule

A fused clitic is still a clitic, so it obeys the enclisis / proclisis switch from Lesson 30. Nothing new to learn:

  • Enclisis (the default): hook it onto the verb with a hyphen - deu-mo, empresto-to, contei-lho.
  • Proclisis (with a trigger - negation, que, quando, se, most question words, adverbs like já, também, só): it jumps in front, written as a separate word - não mo deu, que to empreste, quem lho contou, já no-lo enviaram.

With the future and conditional the pair burrows inside the verb (dar-mo-ei, dir-to-ia): that is mesoclisis, the very next lesson.

When you will actually use them

These contractions are alive in careful speech and normal in writing. In relaxed conversation EP speakers often sidestep them - repeating the noun (dá-me o livro) or dropping the direct clitic - but you must recognise mo, to, lho instantly when you hear or read them.

Forms & patterns

The full contraction grid - indirect down the side, direct across the top:

Indirect +oaosas
memomamosmas
tetotatostas
lhe / lheslholhalhoslhas
nosno-lono-lano-losno-las
vosvo-lovo-lavo-losvo-las

The same pair, shown in enclisis and proclisis (placement from Lesson 30):

MeaningEnclisis (default)Proclisis (after a trigger)
he gave it to medeu-monão mo deu
I lend it to youempresto-toquando to empresto
tell it to himdiz-lhoque lho digas
they sent it to usenviaram-no-lono-lo enviaram
I will hand them to you (pl.)entrego-vo-losvo-los entrego depois

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Pediste-me o relatório e eu entreguei-to ontem.You asked me for the report and I handed it to you yesterday.
A chave? A Ana deu-ma de manhã.The key? Ana gave it to me this morning.
Se precisas do carro, empresto-to sem problema.If you need the car, I’ll lend it to you no problem.
Ele prometeu ajuda e deu-no-la logo.He promised help and gave it to us right away.
Não mo digas, quero fazer surpresa.Don’t tell it to me, I want it to be a surprise.
Quem lho contou? Foi o teu irmão?Who told it to him? Was it your brother?
Comprei os bilhetes e dou-vo-los à entrada.I bought the tickets and I’ll give them to you at the door.
Ainda não ma devolveram.They still haven’t given it back to me.
Peço-te o dossiê; envia-mo por email.I’m asking you for the file; send it to me by email.
Essas fotografias, mostra-lhas quando vieres.Those photos, show them to her when you come.

Common mistakes

  • Ele deu-me-o. -> Ele deu-mo. - the two clitics must contract; you cannot leave me and o side by side on the verb.
  • Dá-o-me. -> Dá-mo. - the order is indirect then direct (me + o -> mo), never the English “it + to me”.
  • Empresto-lo-te. -> Empresto-to. - same trap with te; fuse to to, do not stack.
  • Enviaram-nos-o. -> Enviaram-no-lo. - nos ends in -s, so the direct clitic takes the -lo form and the pair is hyphenated (Lesson 31).
  • Deu-mos a caneta. -> Deu-ma a caneta. - the direct part must agree with the noun; caneta is feminine singular, so me + a -> ma, not mos.
  • Não deu-mo. -> Não mo deu. - não triggers proclisis, so the fused clitic moves in front of the verb.
  • Diz-lhe-o. -> Diz-lho. - lhe + o contracts to lho; keeping them apart is not an option in EP.

Tips

  • Learn the grid by its shape: the indirect gives the onset (m-, t-, lh-, no-, vo-) and the direct gives the vowel + agreement (-o, -a, -os, -as). Build any cell on the spot.
  • Only nos and vos carry the hyphen and the -lo shape, because they end in -s - the same reason comê-lo takes -lo back in Lesson 31.
  • When you are unsure of the order, translate the indirect first: “to me … it” -> m- … -o -> mo. Anchoring on the dative keeps you out of the English word order.
  • To dodge the contraction in speech, just restate the noun (dá-me a chave instead of dá-ma) - fully correct and often more natural in conversation.
  • In Brazil: these contractions are essentially never used, in speech or writing; Brazilians rephrase (me dá a chave, deu o livro pra mim) and mo, to, lho read as distinctly European and formal.

B2 51 / 55

Mesoclisis

Mesóclise (dá-lo-ei)

In short

Mesoclisis is the one place in European Portuguese where an object pronoun goes inside the verb, not before it or after it. It happens with exactly two tenses - the simple future and the conditional (Lesson 32) - and only when the sentence would otherwise call for enclisis (Lesson 30). Instead of gluing the clitic onto the end, Portuguese splits the verb open and drops the pronoun into the seam between the stem and its ending: darei + o becomes dá-lo-ei (“I will give it”), diria + lhe becomes dir-lhe-ia (“I would tell him”). It looks alarming, and it is firmly formal and written - nobody orders coffee this way - but you must be able to read it, and produce it when the register (a legal text, a formal letter, careful oratory) demands it. Everything you need is already in place: the future/conditional endings from Lesson 32, and the clitic forms and -lo/-la allomorphs from Lessons 29-32.

The rule

When mesoclisis fires - all three conditions

Mesoclisis is required only when all of the following are true:

  1. the verb is in the futuro simples or the condicional;
  2. the clause is affirmative and the verb is not preceded by a proclisis trigger;
  3. so the clitic would otherwise be enclitic (attached to the end).

Under those conditions EP does not allow the clitic after the whole word (darei-o is impossible). It also does not allow it before the word, because nothing is pulling it there. The clitic is therefore lodged in the middle.

If any proclisis trigger from Lesson 30 is present - negation (não, nunca, nada), a preverbal adverb (já, também, só), a subordinating conjunction (que, quando, se), a relative or interrogative word - then the clitic simply goes before the whole future/conditional verb, and there is no mesoclisis at all:

  • Dir-lhe-ei a verdade. -> Não lhe direi a verdade.
  • Dá-lo-ei amanhã. -> o darei amanhã.

Proclisis always wins; mesoclisis is only the “default enclisis” case reshaped for these two tenses.

How to build it - three slots

Split the synthetic tense into its stem and its personal ending, and put the clitic between them:

[ future / conditional stem ] - [ clitic ] - [ personal ending ]

The personal endings are exactly those of Lesson 32:

  • future: -ei, -ás, -á, -emos, -ão
  • conditional: -ia, -ias, -ia, -íamos, -iam

So falar + lhe in the future, person by person: falar-lhe-ei, falar-lhe-ás, falar-lhe-á, falar-lhe-emos, falar-lhe-ão.

The -lo / -la allomorph applies inside the word

When the clitic is o, a, os, as, the same rule as Lesson 31 kicks in: the stem’s final -r drops and the clitic becomes -lo, -la, -los, -las. A written accent then lands on the now-stressed stem vowel of -ar and -er verbs (-á-, -ê-), while -ir verbs take no accent (the stressed -i- needs none):

  • amar + o -> amá-lo-ei (“I will love it/him”)
  • vender + a -> vendê-la-ei (“I will sell it”)
  • partir + os -> parti-los-ei (“I will break them”)
  • pôr + o -> pô-lo-ei (“I will put it”)

Before the consonant-initial clitics (me, te, lhe, se, nos, lhes) the -r stays: dar-te-ei, chamar-se-á.

Irregular future/conditional stems carry over

The three verbs with an irregular synthetic stem (Lesson 32) keep that stem in mesoclisis:

  • fazer -> far-: fá-lo-á (“he will do it”), far-se-ia (“it would be done”)
  • dizer -> dir-: dir-lhe-ei (“I will tell him”), dir-se-ia (“one would say”)
  • trazer -> trar-: trar-mo-ão (“they will bring it to me”)

Combined clitics can go inside too

The fused clitics of Lesson 50 (mo, to, lho, no-lo) sit in the seam just like a single pronoun. Because these begin with a consonant, the stem’s -r stays:

  • dizer + lho -> dir-lho-ei (“I will tell it to him”)
  • dar + mo -> dar-mo-á (“he will give it to me”)

Forms & patterns

The full future paradigm of dar with the clitic o (“I will give it”, “you will give it”, …):

PersonEndingMesoclitic form
eu-eidá-lo-ei
tu-ásdá-lo-ás
ele / ela / vocêdá-lo-á
nós-emosdá-lo-emos
eles / elas / vocês-ãodá-lo-ão

A mixed sample across verbs, clitics and both tenses:

Base verbCliticTenseMesoclitic formMeaning
dartefuturedar-te-eiI will give you
dizer (dir-)lhefuturedir-lhe-eiI will tell him/her
fazer (far-)o -> lofuturefá-lo-áhe/she will do it
chamarsefuturechamar-se-áhe/she will be called
vernosfuturever-nos-emoswe will see each other
darlheconditionaldar-lhe-iaI would give him/her
sentarmeconditionalsentar-me-iaI would sit down
dizer (dir-)seconditionaldir-se-iaone would say

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Dir-lhe-ei toda a verdade.I will tell him/her the whole truth.
A empresa chamar-se-á Aurora.The company will be called Aurora.
Vê-lo-emos na próxima reunião.We will see it at the next meeting.
Far-se-á o que for necessário.Whatever is necessary will be done.
Dar-lhe-ia um conselho, se me deixasse.I would give you a piece of advice, if you let me.
Encontrar-nos-emos à entrada.We will meet at the entrance.
Mas não lhe direi onde estão.But I will not tell him where they are.
o farei com uma condição.I will only do it on one condition.

The last two show the same verbs losing mesoclisis the instant não or the adverb appears: the clitic jumps to the front (proclisis).

Common mistakes

  • darei-te / dar-ei-te -> dar-te-ei - in the future and conditional the clitic goes inside the verb, between stem and ending, never tacked onto the whole form.
  • comprarei-o -> comprá-lo-ei - future + o needs mesoclisis and the Lesson 31 allomorph: the -r drops, o becomes -lo, and the stem takes an accent.
  • Não dir-lhe-ei nada. -> Não lhe direi nada. - any proclisis trigger (here não) cancels mesoclisis and pulls the clitic in front of the verb.
  • fazer-se-á / dizer-lhe-ei -> far-se-á / dir-lhe-ei - use the irregular future stem (far-, dir-, trar-), not the plain infinitive.
  • da-lo-ei -> dá-lo-ei - keep the written accent on the stressed stem (dá-, vê-, fá-); dropping it changes the stress.
  • Reaching for mesoclisis in a present or past tense -> it exists only in the futuro simples and the condicional; a present-tense command or statement uses enclisis or proclisis as normal (Lesson 30).

Tips

  • Test three boxes before you write it: (1) future or conditional? (2) affirmative with no preverbal trigger? (3) would the clitic otherwise be enclitic? Only all-yes gives mesoclisis.
  • Build it mechanically in three slots - stem + clitic + ending - and remember the ending is the ordinary Lesson 32 ending (-ei/-ás/-á/-emos/-ão, -ia/-ias/-ia/-íamos/-iam).
  • For o/a/os/as, run the Lesson 31 allomorph inside the word: drop the -r, write -lo/-la, and accent the stem on -ar/-er verbs (amá-lo-ei, vendê-la-ei); -ir verbs take no accent (parti-lo-ei).
  • The moment a não, a preverbal adverb, or a subordinating word turns up, forget mesoclisis and just say não lho direi, quando lho disser.
  • Register reality: mesoclisis is formal, written EP. In speech, and throughout Brazilian Portuguese, people avoid it - proclisis (te darei) or the near future (vou dar-te, Lesson 11) does the job. Read it fluently; produce it only when the tone calls for it.

B2 52 / 55

Textual connectors and discourse markers

Conectores textuais e marcadores discursivos

In short

By B2 your individual sentences are correct, but they may still read as a list. Connectors (conectores) are the words that weld ideas into a paragraph - marking addition, contrast, cause, consequence and conclusion - while discourse markers (marcadores discursivos) manage the flow of speech: opening, sequencing, reformulating and softening. The two things to get right are register (a marker that fits a chat, like pronto or se calhar, ruins an essay) and the false friends (eventualmente, entretanto, atualmente) that mean something other than they look.

The rule

Connectors grouped by what they do

Learn them by function, not alphabetically:

  • Addition: além disso (besides), também, ainda por cima (on top of that), não só… mas também.
  • Contrast / concession: mas, porém, contudo, no entanto, todavia (all “however”); apesar de + infinitive/noun (despite); embora / ainda que + subjunctive (although - see Lesson 36).
  • Cause: porque, pois, visto que, dado que, uma vez que, já que, como (when it opens the sentence).
  • Consequence: por isso, portanto, logo, assim, por conseguinte, consequentemente.
  • Purpose: para + infinitive, para que / a fim de que + subjunctive.
  • Reformulation / conclusion: ou seja, isto é (that is), em suma, em resumo, enfim (in short).
  • Exemplification: por exemplo, nomeadamente (namely), tal como.
  • Sequencing: primeiro, em seguida, depois, por fim, finalmente.

Register: written connectors vs spoken markers

The same logical link has a formal and an informal wardrobe:

  • Formal / written: contudo, todavia, não obstante, por conseguinte, com efeito, ademais.
  • Neutral: mas, porém, no entanto, por isso, além disso, ou seja.
  • Spoken discourse markers: bem, então, pronto (right / OK, wrapping something up), quer dizer (I mean), lá está (that’s just it), se calhar (maybe), pois / pois é (agreement). Several of these - pronto, lá está, se calhar - are markedly European.

Keep the two apart: pronto and se calhar do not belong in a report, and não obstante does not belong in a coffee-break conversation.

Position and punctuation

  • A connector that opens a sentence normally takes a following comma: No entanto, o preço subiu.
  • The same connector can slot between commas after the subject: O preço, no entanto, subiu.
  • Causal pois follows the clause it explains: Fica em casa, pois está a chover (not fronted).
  • mas joins clauses inside a sentence; in careful writing, start a new sentence with Porém or Contudo rather than Mas.

Forms & patterns

FunctionCommon connectorsNote
Additionalém disso, também, ainda por cimaademais is formal
Contrastmas, porém, contudo, no entanto, todaviacontudo/todavia = formal register
Concessionapesar de (+ inf/noun), embora, ainda queembora/ainda que take the subjunctive
Causeporque, pois, visto que, uma vez que, já quecomo only when sentence-initial
Consequencepor isso, portanto, logo, por conseguintepor conseguinte = formal
Conclusionem suma, em resumo, ou seja, enfimou seja reformulates
Spoken markerspronto, lá está, se calhar, pois é, quer dizerconversation only

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Estava cansado; no entanto, continuou a trabalhar.He was tired; however, he kept working.
Não tenho tempo; além disso, não me apetece.I don’t have time; besides, I don’t feel like it.
Chegámos tarde porque havia muito trânsito.We arrived late because there was a lot of traffic.
Choveu todo o dia; por isso, ficámos em casa.It rained all day, so we stayed home.
Embora seja caro, vale a pena.Although it’s expensive, it’s worth it.
Se calhar vou contigo mais logo.Maybe I’ll go with you later.
Ou seja, o projeto foi cancelado.In other words, the project was cancelled.
Por um lado é barato, por outro é frágil.On one hand it’s cheap, on the other it’s fragile.
Apesar de estar cansado, saiu à noite.Despite being tired, he went out at night.
Em suma, precisamos de mais tempo.In short, we need more time.

Common mistakes

  • Eventualmente for English “eventually” -> in Portuguese eventualmente means “possibly / occasionally”; say acabar por or mais tarde for “eventually”.
  • Apesar de que está cansado -> Apesar de estar cansado or Embora esteja cansado - apesar de takes an infinitive or noun, not a que-clause.
  • Entretanto to mean “however” -> in EP entretanto mainly means “meanwhile”; for “however” use no entanto or contudo.
  • Atualmente for English “actually” -> atualmente means “currently”; for “actually” use na verdade or na realidade.
  • Starting every contrast with mas -> in writing, vary with porém, contudo, no entanto; a chain of mas reads as childish.
  • No entanto o preço subiu -> No entanto, o preço subiu - a fronted connector takes a comma after it.
  • Pois está a chover, fica em casa -> Fica em casa, pois está a chover - causal pois comes after the clause it justifies, never at the front.

Tips

  • Match the register: contudo, todavia, por conseguinte for formal writing; mas, por isso, então for everyday speech; never drop pronto or se calhar into an essay.
  • Own a few markedly European markers for conversation: pronto (right, that’s that), lá está (that’s exactly it), se calhar (maybe), pois é (yeah, true).
  • Concession, purpose and condition connectors (embora, para que, a não ser que) pull the subjunctive (Lesson 36); addition, cause and consequence connectors (além disso, porque, por isso) take the indicative.
  • Punctuate connectors: a fronted one takes a comma after it, and a mid-sentence one sits between two commas.
  • Watch the false friends: eventualmente (possibly), entretanto (meanwhile), atualmente (currently) - none mean what they look like.
  • In Brazil: everyday speech leans on and daí to sequence events and on tipo as a filler, where EP prefers então, depois and pronto; EP’s se calhar corresponds to Brazilian talvez.

C1 53 / 55

Cleft structures and marked word order

Estruturas clivadas e ordem marcada

In short

Portuguese word order is fairly free, and speakers exploit that freedom to put one piece of a sentence in the spotlight. The main tool is the cleft (estrutura clivada): you split a plain sentence in two and wrap the focused part in a ser … que frame. O Pedro partiu o vaso (“Pedro broke the vase”) becomes Foi o Pedro que partiu o vaso (“It was Pedro who broke the vase”) - the same facts, but now the blame is squarely on Pedro. Alongside the full cleft sits the frozen reinforcer é que (O Pedro é que partiu o vaso), and the mirror-image pseudo-cleft built on o que / quem (Quem partiu o vaso foi o Pedro). This lesson sorts these three out, shows when the copula agrees and when it stays fixed, and adds the everyday habit of fronting a topic for contrast. Everything here assumes you already have é que questions (Lesson 15) and clitic placement (Lessons 29 to 31).

The rule

The full cleft: ser … que

Take any constituent - subject, object, time, cause, place - pull it out, and frame it with a form of ser before and que after:

  • Foi o Pedro que partiu o vaso. - It was Pedro who broke the vase. (focus: subject)
  • Foi o vaso que o Pedro partiu. - It was the vase that Pedro broke. (focus: object)
  • Foi ontem que ele chegou. - It was yesterday that he arrived. (focus: time)
  • É por isso que estou aqui. - That’s why I’m here. (focus: cause)
  • É em Lisboa que eles moram. - It’s in Lisbon that they live. (focus: place)

The copula ser is not fixed: it harmonizes in tense with the verb of the clause. A past clause takes foi / era; a present clause takes é; a future clause takes será:

  • É o João que paga. - present clause, present é.
  • Foi o João que pagou. - past clause, past foi.
  • Será o João que vai pagar. - future reference, será.

With a focused subject pronoun, careful European Portuguese also makes ser agree in person and number with that pronoun, and the clause verb agrees too:

  • Fui eu que paguei. - It was I who paid.
  • Foste tu que o disseste. - It was you who said it.
  • Fomos nós que ganhámos. - It was we who won.

The frozen 3rd-person Foi nós que ganhámos is heard colloquially but avoided in careful register - agree the copula.

The frozen reinforcer: X é que

There is a lighter, extremely common cleft where é que does not inflect at all. You leave the sentence in its normal order and simply insert the invariable é que right after the focused element:

  • O Pedro é que partiu o vaso. - Pedro is the one who broke the vase.
  • Amanhã é que vai chover. - Tomorrow is when it’s going to rain.
  • Agora é que são elas. - Now we’re in trouble. (fixed idiom)

Note the contrast with the full cleft: here é que stays é even when the action is past (O Pedro é que partiu o vaso, not foi que), because é que has fossilized into a single focus particle. This is the same é que you already use to soften questions (Onde é que moras?, Lesson 15); in a statement it marks focus instead.

The pseudo-cleft: o que / quem … ser

Flip the structure around and lead with a free relative (o que = “what”, quem = “the one who”, onde = “where”), then bridge with ser:

  • O que eu quero é descansar. - What I want is to rest.
  • Quem partiu o vaso foi o Pedro. - The one who broke the vase was Pedro.
  • Onde eles moram é em Lisboa. - Where they live is in Lisbon.

The copula again agrees in tense (é / foi), and it sits between the two halves. This order front-loads the setup and lands the focus at the end - useful when you want a build-up.

Fronting and left dislocation (marked order)

Short of a full cleft, you can simply move a constituent to the front for contrast or topic-setting. When the fronted element is the object, European Portuguese usually leaves a resumptive clitic behind (clitic left dislocation):

  • Esse livro, já o li. - That book, I’ve already read it.
  • Ao João, dei-lhe o recado ontem. - As for João, I gave him the message yesterday.
  • Café, eu não bebo. - Coffee, I don’t drink. (bare fronting, no resumptive)

The fronted phrase names the topic; the clitic (o, lhe) keeps its normal grammatical slot inside the clause. Placement follows the usual rules: enclisis by default (dei-lhe), but a trigger like forces proclisis (já o li).

Forms & patterns

StructureShapeCopulaExample
Full cleftser + focus + que + clauseinflects for tense/personFoi o Pedro que partiu o vaso.
Reinforcerfocus + é que + clausefrozen (always é)O Pedro é que partiu o vaso.
Pseudo-clefto que / quem + clause + ser + focusinflects for tenseQuem partiu o vaso foi o Pedro.
Left dislocationfocus, + clause with resumptive cliticnoneEsse livro, já o li.

Copula agreement across the full cleft, focusing each subject pronoun:

FocusCleft
euFui eu que resolvi o problema.
tuFoste tu que resolveste o problema.
ele / elaFoi ele que resolveu o problema.
nósFomos nós que resolvemos o problema.
eles / elasForam eles que resolveram o problema.

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Foi a Ana que me contou tudo.It was Ana who told me everything.
É o dinheiro que falta, não a vontade.It’s the money that’s missing, not the will.
Foi por causa da chuva que cancelámos.It was because of the rain that we cancelled.
Tu é que decides, não eu.You’re the one who decides, not me.
O que me irrita é a falta de respeito.What annoys me is the lack of respect.
Quem avisou foi a vizinha.The one who warned us was the neighbour.
Fomos nós que organizámos a festa.It was we who organized the party.
Essa questão, já a discutimos ontem.That issue, we already discussed it yesterday.
É agora que precisamos de ti.It’s now that we need you.
Foi aqui que tudo começou.It was here that it all began.

Common mistakes

  • Onde são que moram? -> Onde é que moram? - the reinforcer é que is invariable; it never agrees in number or tense.
  • O Pedro foi que partiu o vaso (meaning the frozen reinforcer) -> O Pedro é que partiu o vaso - in the X é que pattern the particle stays é even about the past; only the full ser … que cleft inflects.
  • Foi nós que ganhámos -> Fomos nós que ganhámos - in careful register the cleft copula agrees with a focused subject pronoun.
  • Foi eu que fiz isso -> Fui eu que fiz isso - same agreement: eu takes fui, and the clause verb also agrees (fiz).
  • O que eu quero é descanso said as É o que eu quero descanso -> O que eu quero é descanso - in a pseudo-cleft the relative half comes first and ser bridges to the focus.
  • Esse livro, já li (object fronted, no resumptive) -> Esse livro, já o li - a dislocated definite object leaves a resumptive clitic behind.
  • Foi ontem quando cheguei -> Foi ontem que cheguei - clefts use que as the linker for every constituent, including time, not quando or onde.

Tips

  • Decide first what you are spotlighting, then wrap just that in ser … que. If you find yourself clefting the whole sentence, you have chosen too much focus.
  • Keep the two clefts apart by a simple test: can you change the tense of the little verb? Foi / é / será o Pedro que… yes, it is a real copula and must agree. O Pedro é que… no, it is frozen - leave it as é.
  • Reserve clefts for genuine contrast or correction (Foi a Ana, não a Rita, que ligou). Over-clefted prose sounds insistent; neutral order is the default.
  • Fronting is lighter than a cleft and very idiomatic in speech. When you topicalize a definite object, remember the resumptive clitic and its placement (já o li, dei-lhe).
  • The pseudo-cleft is a strong way to end on your point: set up with O que… / Quem… and let the focus land last. It pairs well with the discourse markers of Lesson 52.

C1 54 / 55

Advanced compound tenses

Tempos compostos avançados

In short

You already build the past with ter + past participle (tenho feito, tinha feito). The same recipe - an auxiliary plus an invariable participle - also reaches into the future, both subjunctives, the gerund and the personal infinitive. This lesson closes the paradigm. Nothing new about the participle is involved; the whole skill is conjugating ter in the right tense or mood and letting the participle ride along, so terei feito, tenha feito, tiver feito, tendo feito and termos feito all fall out of one pattern.

The rule

One recipe, five new slots

Every compound tense in Portuguese is ter (in some tense/mood) + particípio passado. You have met the indicative pairings (pretérito perfeito composto, mais-que-perfeito composto); the remaining ones simply put ter into tenses you have not yet paired it with. The participle never agrees after ter - it stays in its default masculine-singular form.

Futuro composto do indicativo: terei feito

Conjugate ter in the simple future (terei, terás, terá, teremos, terão) and add the participle. It marks an action that will already be complete before a later future point - English “will have done”:

  • Até sexta-feira, terei terminado o relatório.
  • Quando chegares, eles já terão saído.

Like the simple future, it can also voice a supposition: Ele não atende; terá adormecido (“he must have fallen asleep”).

Compound subjunctives: tenha feito and tiver feito

Any context that triggers the subjunctive can trigger its compound form when the action is completed.

  • Pretérito perfeito composto do conjuntivo - tenha feito (present subjunctive of ter: tenha, tenhas, tenha, tenhamos, tenham). Use it for a completed action inside a subjunctive-selecting clause anchored in the present:
    • Espero que ele tenha chegado a horas.
    • Duvido que eles tenham percebido o problema.
  • Futuro composto do conjuntivo - tiver feito (future subjunctive of ter: tiver, tiveres, tiver, tivermos, tiverem). Use it in a temporal or conditional clause (after quando, se, assim que, logo que) for something finished before the main event:
    • Quando tiveres acabado, avisa-me.
    • Se até lá não tiverem respondido, telefono-lhes.

(For the past-unreal pair tivesse feito / teria feito see step 49; here we complete the future and present subjunctive branches.)

Gerúndio composto: tendo feito

The gerund of ter is tendo; with a participle it forms tendo feito - “having done”. It heads a reduced adverbial clause and marks anteriority: the action was finished before the main clause happened.

  • Tendo terminado o trabalho, foi para casa.
  • Não tendo recebido resposta, insistimos.

Contrast the simple gerund fazendo (Step 48), which is simultaneous: fazendo o trabalho, cantava (while doing) vs tendo feito (after having done).

Infinitivo pessoal composto: termos feito

The personal infinitive (Step 38) also has a compound form: the personal infinitive of ter (ter, teres, ter, termos, terem) plus the participle. It carries a subject through its endings and expresses a completed action, typically after a preposition:

  • Lamento não termos avisado a tempo.
  • Depois de eles terem saído, arrumámos a sala.

Because the ending shows the person, this keeps the subject explicit in a non-finite clause when the action is already over.

C1 detail: which participle, and no agreement

After ter/haver the participle is invariable: tenho escrito as cartas, never “escritas”. Agreement appears only in the ser/estar passive (Step 43): as cartas foram escritas. For verbs with two participles, the classic rule pairs the regular -ado/-ido form with ter/haver and the short form with ser/estar: tinha aceitado / foi aceite; tinha entregado / está entregue. A few short forms - pago, gasto, ganho - are now standard with ter too (tenho pago, tenho gasto).

Forms & patterns

The recipe across all five new slots (model verb fazer, participle feito):

Compound formter is in…Result (eu)English
Futuro composto (ind.)futureterei feitoI will have done
Perfeito composto (conj.)present subjunctivetenha feito(that) I have done
Futuro composto (conj.)future subjunctivetiver feito(when/if) I have done
Gerúndio compostogerundtendo feitohaving done
Infinitivo pessoal compostopersonal infinitiveter feito(for me) to have done

ter conjugated through each, with the full person set:

PersonFuturo ind.Pres. conj.Futuro conj.Inf. pessoal
eutereitenhativerter
tuterástenhastiveresteres
você / ele / elaterátenhativerter
nósteremostenhamostivermostermos
vocês / eles / elasterãotenhamtiveremterem

Double participles - which form goes where:

VerbWith ter/haver (-ado/-ido)With ser/estar (short)
aceitartinha aceitadofoi aceite
entregartinha entregadoestá entregue
limpartinha limpadoestá limpo
pagartinha pago (or pagado)está pago

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Até ao fim do mês, terei pago todas as dívidas.By the end of the month, I will have paid off all the debts.
Duvido que eles tenham compreendido a ironia.I doubt they have understood the irony.
Assim que tiveres lido o contrato, assina-o.As soon as you have read the contract, sign it.
Tendo esgotado os argumentos, calou-se.Having exhausted his arguments, he fell silent.
Lamento não termos podido ajudar mais.I regret that we were not able to help more.
Se não tiverem decidido até amanhã, avanço sozinho.If they have not decided by tomorrow, I will go ahead alone.
Ele não responde; terá esquecido o encontro.He is not answering; he must have forgotten the meeting.
Espero que ela já tenha saído do hospital.I hope she has already left the hospital.
Por teres chegado cedo, apanhaste bons lugares.Because you arrived early, you got good seats.
Depois de terem assinado, os documentos foram arquivados.After they signed, the documents were filed.

Common mistakes

  • Espero que ele já chegou -> Espero que ele já tenha chegado - a subjunctive trigger (espero que) plus a completed action calls for tenha + participle, not the indicative.
  • Quando terás acabado, avisa-me -> Quando tiveres acabado, avisa-me - after quando/se/assim que Portuguese uses the future subjunctive (tiver feito), never the future indicative.
  • tenho feitas as camas -> tenho feito as camas - the participle is invariable after ter; it agrees only in the ser/estar passive.
  • Fazendo o trabalho, saiu (to mean after finishing) -> Tendo feito o trabalho, saiu - the simple gerund is simultaneous; anteriority needs the compound gerund.
  • Por não ter estudado when the subject is “you” -> Por não teres estudado - the compound personal infinitive still takes personal endings (teres, termos, terem).
  • Piling on compound tenses in speech -> most of these (futuro composto, gerúndio composto, infinitivo composto) are formal/written; overusing them in casual speech sounds stilted. Only tiver feito is everyday.

Tips

  • The recipe never changes: decide the tense or mood the clause needs, put ter in it, and append the invariable participle. You are conjugating one verb, not memorising five tables.
  • Let the clause pick the mood of ter. Subjunctive trigger in the present -> tenha feito. Temporal/conditional quando-se about the future -> tiver feito. A completed background action -> tendo feito.
  • Participle agreement is a ser/estar thing, not a ter thing. After ter it is frozen; in the passive it agrees with the subject.
  • Keep the short participles for ser/estar (aceite, entregue, limpo, morto) and the -ado/-ido forms for ter - except pago, gasto and ganho, which now go with ter too.
  • In Brazil: the forms are the same and the futuro composto do conjuntivo is just as alive, but some short participles surface as aceito and pego rather than aceite, and clitic placement around these auxiliaries follows the Brazilian proclisis pattern.

C1 55 / 55

Pretérito mais-que-perfeito simples

Pretérito mais-que-perfeito simples

In short

The pretérito mais-que-perfeito simples is the one-word “had done”: eu falara means exactly the same as eu tinha falado from step 26. In modern European Portuguese it has all but vanished from speech, surviving in literary and journalistic prose, in a handful of frozen exclamations (quem me dera, pudera), and in careful formal writing. Your practical goal at C1 is to recognize it instantly when you read it - it is easy to mistake for another form - and to remember that you can always fall back on the compound tinha + particípio when you speak. Hold one idea: same meaning as tinha feito, higher register.

The rule

What it means

It marks anteriority in the past - an action already finished before another past moment - and translates as English “had + past participle”:

  • Quando a polícia chegou, o ladrão já fugira. = … já tinha fugido. (When the police arrived, the thief had already fled.)

Semantically it is interchangeable with the compound pretérito mais-que-perfeito composto (tinha + particípio) you met in step 26. The difference is register, not meaning.

How it is built

Take the eles form of the pretérito perfeito simples (steps 21-22), drop the ending -ram, and add -ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -reis, -ram. The nós and vós forms take a written accent to keep the stress where it belongs. Building it on the perfect stem is what makes it reliable: an irregular perfeito automatically yields an irregular pluperfect, so you never have to memorize a second irregular set.

One consequence to notice: the eles form is identical to the pretérito perfeito (eles falaram = both “they spoke” and “they had spoken”). Only context separates them - one more reason the tense lives mostly on the page, where the surrounding narrative makes the meaning clear.

Register: read it, rarely write it

This is a literary tense. In conversation and ordinary writing, European Portuguese uses tinha + particípio without exception. So treat the simple form as passive recognition plus optional formal production: you decode it in a novel or a news report (O ministro afirmara que…), and you may choose it yourself only in deliberately formal prose.

Fixed forms with a life of their own

A few pluperfect forms have frozen into set expressions and no longer mean “had done”:

  • quem me dera (+ infinitive, or + que + imperfect subjunctive) = “if only, how I wish” - here dera is an optative formula, not “had given”.
  • pudera! = “no wonder!, of course!” - an exclamation, unrelated to “had been able”.
  • literary melhor fora / antes fora = “it would have been better”.

Learn these as vocabulary; they are far more frequent than the tense that spawned them.

Forms & patterns

The regular paradigm (from the eles-perfeito, minus -ram, plus the endings):

Personfalar (falaram)comer (comeram)partir (partiram)
eufalaracomerapartira
tufalarascomeraspartiras
ele/ela/vocêfalaracomerapartira
nósfaláramoscomêramospartíramos
vósfaláreiscomêreispartíreis
eles/elas/vocêsfalaramcomerampartiram

Irregular verbs inherit the irregular perfect stem:

InfinitivePerfeito (eles)Pluperfect (eu)English
ser / irforamforahad been / gone
tertiveramtiverahad had
fazerfizeramfizerahad done
dizerdisseramdisserahad said
verviramvirahad seen
virvieramvierahad come
pôrpuserampuserahad put
trazertrouxeramtrouxerahad brought
poderpuderampuderahad been able

Simple (literary) vs compound (everyday) - identical meaning:

SimpleCompoundEnglish
eu falaraeu tinha faladoI had spoken
ela saíraela tinha saídoshe had left
nós fôramosnós tínhamos idowe had gone
eles disserameles tinham ditothey had said

Examples

PortuguêsEnglish
Quando cheguei, ela já saíra.When I arrived, she had already left.
O comboio partira antes das seis.The train had left before six.
Ele contou o que vira na cidade.He told what he had seen in the city.
Nunca estivera tão feliz.He had never been so happy.
lêramos o relatório quando ele falou.We had already read the report when he spoke.
A carta que ela me escrevera perdeu-se.The letter she had written me got lost.
O jornalista afirmara que o acordo falhara.The journalist had stated that the deal had failed.
Fizera tudo o que prometera.He had done everything he had promised.
Quem me dera ter mais tempo!If only I had more time!
Pudera! Estava cansadíssimo.No wonder! He was exhausted.

Common mistakes

  • Building it from the infinitive -> from the eles-perfeito: not fazera but fizera (fizeram minus -ram, plus -a); the irregular perfect stem carries straight over.
  • Dropping the accent in the nós form -> faláramos, comêramos, partíramos, fôramos - without it the stress moves and the form is simply wrong.
  • Using it out loud in casual speech -> say tinha saído, not saíra - the simple form sounds bookish in conversation.
  • Confusing the -ra pluperfect with the -sse imperfect subjunctive (step 47) -> cantara = “had sung” (a fact) vs cantasse = “were to sing / sang” (hypothetical); they are not interchangeable.
  • Reading the frozen pudera! or quem me dera as literal pluperfects -> they are set expressions meaning “no wonder!” and “if only!”.
  • Mixing “fora” (had been / gone) with the adverb fora “outside” -> only context tells them apart (Ele fora ao Porto vs Ele está lá fora).

Tips

  • Aim for recognition first: when a novel or news report shows an unexpected -ra ending on a verb, read it as tinha + particípio and keep going.
  • To decode any form, reverse the process - add -m back to reach the eles-perfeito (fizera -> fizeram -> fazer), which reveals the infinitive.
  • When you need anteriority yourself, the compound tinha feito is always correct and never sounds wrong; reserve the simple form for deliberately formal writing.
  • Memorize the two idioms as vocabulary - quem me dera (“if only”) and pudera! (“no wonder!”) - since they are far commoner than the tense itself.
  • Watch the homographs: vira (had seen, from ver) vs vira (turns, from virar); fora (had been) vs fora (outside); dera (had given) vs the set quem me dera.
  • In Brazil: the simple pluperfect is even rarer in speech than in Portugal and is felt as markedly literary, but the same fixed forms (quem me dera, pudera) are fully alive in both norms.